Test Activity


This topic includes information that appears on the Test Configuration tab for all the test cases.

The Test Activity pane defines the type of test that will be performed and the optional features that are unique to the test case.

Use the Test Activity drop-down list to select the functional test you will execute. The list contains the Test Activities that are available for the test case.

Options: available Test Activities

Default: Capacity Test

Use the dropdown list to select Test Activity:


5G Core Emulator

Emulation Mode

Emulate

(AMF)

5G Core Emulator is a test case that emulates the visited or home network in support of the home routed roaming scenario in 5G system.

Emulation Mode

Use the "Emulate" drop-down box to toggle between the V-Network (visited network) and H-Network (home network).

All emulated NFs are optional and can be enabled or disabled with a checkbox. Once selected, the SEPP is forced to be "Initiator" in V-Network and "Responder" in H-Network.

The selection of "NRF Interface" is also optional. Once selected, the NRF interface will be enabled for all selected NFs except for the SEPP node and nodes we don't yet have support on NRF. 

The "Roaming Scenario with SEPP" is currently force selected. All control plane traffic between the V-Network and H-Network must go through the V-SEPP and H-SEPP via the N32 interface.

Emulator Options :

Currently only enabled for the AMF and SMF node. AMF is available when Emulate = V-Network and AMF is enabled.

The content is ported from standalone AMF and SMF node test cases with minor changes. For example, the "N16 Interface" under SMF is force selected in both networks and the "Emulate" is forced to be V-SMF in V-Network and H-SMF in H-Network.

  • Mobile Subscribers

SUT : 

  • NG-RAN
  • Any NF or combination of NFs in 5G roaming core V-Network
  • Any NF or combination of NFs in 5G roaming core H-Network
  • V-UPF
  • H-UPF

Tcl Parameter: Emulate

Tcl Parameter: AmfEn

NOTES:

  • Details about the parameters on the Emulator Options pane can be found in either the AMF/SMF or Service Based Node test cases.

AAA Testing

Protocol (AAA)

Select RADIUS, Diameter, or Portal as the AAA protocol for the test. The options that are available depend on the test applications licensed for the test system.

  • About Diameter Testing

  • About RADIUS Testing

  • Select Portal to support HTTP Portal Authentication. The AAA Server Node test case provides HTTP Portal Server Node configuration required for HTTP Portal authentication (Configure Portal I/F tab, AC NAS SUT and Portal Node) 

Options: RADIUS, Diameter, Portal

Default: RADIUS

NOTES:

  • RADIUS is not available when you select Test Activity as Inter Technology Mobility or Inter-HSGW.
  • All parameters on the  Emulator Options pane are grayed when you select Portal protocol.

 

Affinity Mode

Select Affinity Mode to turn on performance improvement of Diameter Applications. Only available when AAA Protocol = Diameter.

Significant performance impact can be achieved with Affinity Mode, especially, when running multiple test cases on the same process. A higher activation rate/throughput can be expected. 5 test cases are optimum as all cores will be used per one process on the C100 S2. Other systems may have a different number of cores per process and the recommended number of test cases should be adjusted accordingly.

NOTES:

  • Do not recommend enabling Affinity Mode when only running one test case per process.

  • All test cases running on a specific process should enable Affinity Mode.

  • A mix of Test cases with Affinity Mode on (supported) and off (not supported) may have unpredictable performance results.  

 

Initial Network

In AAA Server Nodal test case, select Test Activity as Inter-Technology Mobility and select one of the following:

  • LTE: performs LTE to eHRPD Handoff
  • eHRPD: performs eHRPD to LTE Handoff
  • Untrusted Non-3GPP : performs ePDG interconnection and inter-access mobility for untrusted non-3GPP accesses

Tcl Parameter: DiaClnInitiateType

NOTE: Select Test Activity as Inter-HSGW for Inter-HSGW handoff.

Alternate Node

Use the Alternate Node checkbox to enable the Alternate Node authentication, and the Alternate Node pane on the RADIUS tab is enabled, allowing you to define the NAS emulator.

IP Address Allocation

In AAA Server Node testing, select the IP Address Allocation checkbox to define the IP address pools (IP Address Allocation) and methods (Address Pool Selection Method) used to dynamically allocate MN IP addresses from a virtual AAA or DHCP server. The IP Pools tab becomes available when you select this checkbox.

Tcl Parameter: NasNode2AuthenticationEnabled

Dual Stack

In AAA Serve Node test case, use Dual Stack to return both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses when requested. Dual Stack is available for your selection only when AAA Protocol = Radius and IP Address Allocation is selected.

NOTE:Follow these steps to support IPv4 and v6 Dual Stack allocation:

  1. Select Dual Stack.
  2. Add at least 1 ipV4 pool and at least 1 ipV6 pool. If you use pool name, add 1 Ipv4 and 1 Ipv6 with the same pool identifier .
  3. Include the allocated IPv4/v6 in the Final Account Stop Request message so that AAA Server is able to release the unused IP address.

TIP:

  • During AAA Server Node testing when you select Dual Stack, the Access-Request automatically supports/identifies allocation of IPv4 and IPv6 address.

  • During AAA Server Nodal, Use VSA editor include 2 attributes (IPv4 and IPv6) to ensure that the Access-Request  supports/identifies allocation of IPv4 and IPv6 address.

Type: True, False

Default: False.

Tcl Parameter: AaaIpAddrDualStackEn

NOTE: When you select Dual Stack, the parameters CoA Simulation, Disconnect Simulation, and Diameter IPSec are not available.

CoA Simulation

In AAA Server Node testing, select the CoA Simulation check box to enable and define the CoA Simulation parameters (CoA Simulation) on the RADIUS tab.

Tcl Parameter: RadCoaSimulationEn

Disconnect Simulation

In AAA Server Node testing, select the Disconnect Simulation checkbox to define the Deactivation Rate (session/sec) for the Mobile Subscribers.

Tcl Parameter: RadDisconnEn

Diameter IPSec

In AAA testing, Diameter IPSec is only available when one NAS Node and one dedicated AAA authentication SUT are involved in the test (AAA Test is Authentication Only). In CSN Nodal test case, IPSec is not allowed for Inter-ASN mobility but it is allowed for Inter-Tech mobility since the Target NAS is not used.

NOTES:

  • AAA Diameter IPSec applies to  AAA Server Nodal, IP App Node, and CSN Nodal testing only.

  • IPSec only applies to the authentication SUT when the is configured with different authentication and accounting SUTs.

  • Diameter IPSec is not allowed in Authentication With Accounting tests.

  • For AAA Server Node testing, if the Number of Peers on the Diameter tab is > 1, the Diameter IPSec is disabled and if selected, de-selected.

 


AMF Nodal Testing - 5G

Capacity Test, Session Loading Test, Inter Technology Mobility, Intra-AMF Mobility, Inter-AMF Mobility, Command Mode and Sequencer Always enabled to perform UE and gNodeB emulation. The following interfaces are always available for testing:
  • NAS-5G - Mm and Sm.
  • N2 - NGAP  (over SCTP)
Initial Network

Available when Test Activity = Inter Technology Mobility. Select Initial Network from dropdown list. Options: 5GS , LTE 

Initial Network indicates where the UE will initially attach / register. 

Select the Handoff Protocol below to indicate the "Target" network.

For example: Initial Network = 5GS , Handoff Protocol = LTE (which is the Target). The UEs will initially attach / register to 5GS then handoff to LTE. 

The F2 Help key has been enhanced to indicate which network is the Target.

Tcl Parameter : InitiateType

Handoff Protocol

Available when Test Activity = Inter Technology Mobility, Command Mode or Sequencer. When Handoff protocol = LTE, the S1-MME becomes available for input. EPS Pane is enabled. When Handoff protocol = WiFi or WiFI-LTE the WiFi Subscribers Pane becomes available for input. Interfaces AP/SSID, SWu IPSec and AAA-RADIUS are enabled. AAA Pane becomes available SUT. Select for VoNR HO <->  Procedure VoWiFi (ePDG) <-> per 23.502 Section 4.11.4. Both Single and Continuous Handoffs from 5GS to WiFi are supported Options : LTE , WiFi, WiFi-LTE

Option WiFi-LTE is used to emulate pairs of 5G UE Register to AMF and establish PDU session, setup a VoNR call, handover to WiFi (ePDG as SUT), then handover to LTE (MME as SUT), then end the call and detach 4G. If continuous mobility is configured, UE will do Register again at 5G network in next mobility cycle. AMF and MME SUTs as well as gNB and eNB Control and User nodes become available for input.

In AMF Nodal, when "Test Activity" is "Inter Technology Mobility", please enable "Multiple SUTs per gNB" in "Network Devices" >> AMF.  Inter technology mobility registration for LTE to 5G supports reallocation: Reference : 23.502 4.11.1.3.3 EPS to 5GS Mobility Registration (Idle) using N26 with AMF Reallocation.

Due to the limitation of SBI configuration, AMF Node can only config multi AMF Nodes when "Inter-AMF Only"  or "SMF Emulation" is checked.

Options: None, LTE (Command Mode, Sequencer)

Tcl Parameter : HandoffProtocol

Handoff Type

Available when Test Activity = Inter Technology Mobility, Intra-AMF Mobility, Inter-AMF Mobility and Dual Connectivity. Select Handoff Type from dropdown list. For Mobility Registration from 4G to 5G after EPS fallback, Test Activity = Inter Technology Mobility, Handoff Protocol = LTE, Handoff Type = REG/TAU, enable Continuous Handoff and Initial Network = Target. For 5GS to EPS TAU Scenario see 23.502 Section 4.11.1.3.2. For Mobility Registration Update see 3GPP TS 23.502 Section 4.2.2.2.

For RAN Initiated QoS Flow Mobility (per 23.502 section 4.14.1):

This procedure is used to transfer QoS Flows to and from Secondary RAN Node. During this procedure, the SMF and UPF are never re-allocated. The UPF referred in this Figure 4.14.1-1  is the UPF which terminates N3 interface in the 5GC. The presence of IP connectivity between the UPF and the Master RAN node, as well as between the UPF and the Secondary RAN node is assumed. If QoS Flows for multiple PDU Sessions need to be transferred to or from Secondary RAN Node, the procedure shown in the Figure 4.14.1-1 below is repeated for each PDU Session.

NOTE the following limitations as of Release 18.8 :

  • For 5GS to EPS idle mode mobility, the following scenario is not currently supported: The UE is registered without PDU Session in 5GC or the UE is registered only with PDU Session for which Session Continuity is not supported during interworking to EPC.

Options: Handover , REG/TAU (Inter Technology Mobility)

Options: Xn , N2, Mobility Registration Update (Intra-AMF Mobility) Options: N2, Mobility Registration Update (Inter-AMF Mobility)

Options: RAN Initiated QoS Flow Mobility (Dual Connectivity)  

Tcl Parameter : HandoffType

Data Traffic Enables the L3-7 Interface - Data Traffic tab.
Data IPSec

Select to use IPSec to encrypt Data Traffic (L3-7 Interface). Define IPSec parameters on the Data IPSec tab.

UE-Requested PDU Session Modification

Select to trigger PDU Session Modification request from UE. Available when NAS-5G SM | NAS 5G Version (24.501) is = > 15.2.0 and when NAS-5G SM | NGAP Version (38.413) is = > 15.2.0. NAS-5G SM | QoS Flow Modification becomes available for input. Available on AMF Nodal, AMF Node and SMF Node test cases.

Tcl Parameter: UeReqPduSessionModEn

PDU Session Secondary Authentication

Select for Secondary Authentication during PDU Session Establishment. Available when NAS-5G SM | NAS 5G Version (24.501) is = > 15.2.0 in AMF Nodal / AMF Node and SMF Nodal / SMF Node test cases. Not available when Registration Only is enabled. Max DNN Mode via TDF is not available with this feature.

When enabled, the “Number of PDUs” in Test Configuration/Mobile Subscribers panel should be equal to “Number of Data Network Names") in NAS-5G/SM Tab.

Enable Include SM PDU DN Req Container in PDU Session Est Req in NAS-5G/SM Tab, Secondary AuthenticationEAP Settings (TLS Only) in AMF Nodal and the Secondary Authentication Configuration Timers (Reauthentication Delay (s), T3590 (s)) in AMF Node / SMF Node.

This options is not available in SMF Nodal when UPF Node Emulation is enabled.

The following use cases are supported by AMF Nodal

    1) PDU Session Secondary Authentication during PDU Session Establishment procedure

    2) Re-authentication after PDU Session Establishment procedure

    3) PDU Session Establishment Reject by NW

    4) PDU Session Release by NW

Supported Call Flows:

In B2B test for AMF Nodal, AAA Node Test Case for DN-AAA is not used because AMF currently does not support the interface to communicate with DN-AAA however, SMF Node does support it.

References: 

3GPP TS 23.501: System Architecture for the 5G System; Stage 2
3GPP TS 23.502: Procedures for 5G System; Stage 2
3GPP TS 24.501: NAS protocol for 5G System; Stage 3
3GPP TS 29.561: Interworking between 5G Network and External Data Networks; Stage 3
3GPP TS 33.501: Security architecture and procedures for 5G System

Note: The latest Wireshark doesn't decode IEs in NAS 5G messages and http2 frame headers of NamfCommunication_N1N2MessageTransferReq  when messages include EAP message IE/SM PDU DN request container container IE.

Tcl Parameter: PduSessionSecAuthEn

Registration Only Select for Registration Only. Registration procedure per reference: 3GPP TS 23.502, Figure 4.2.2.2.2-1

Currently session loading supports registration followed by pdu establishment request with  follow-on request pending bit set to 1.

Thus feature will send registration request message not followed by pdu establishment and follow-on request pending bit set to 0. Thus, the activity becomes (Reg/periodic reg/./DeReg, PDU session establishment is not triggered)

 

Table 9.11.3.7.1: 5GS registration type information element

When Registration Only is checked, the Number of PDUs is forced to 0 and UE-Requested PDU Session Modification, Data Traffic, External Data, Data IPSec, Vo5G, and SMF/UPF Node Emulation are disabled. Also, the NAS-5G|SM and N3 tabs are hidden.

Enable or Disable the NAS-5G|MM, Initial Registration with Follow On to set the Follow-on request bit.

Not available when Test Activity = Command Mode, Sequencer or Inter Technology Mobility

Tcl Parameter: RegistrationOnlyEn

N2 IPSec / Target N2 IPSec

 

Select for N2 IPSec - Additional details here - N2 IPSec
N3 IPSec / Target N3 IPSec Select for N3 IPSec - Additional details here - N3 IPSec
N4 IPSec Select for N4 IPSec - Additional details here - N4 IPSec
Vo5G Select for SIP Vo5G.
EPS Fallback

Available when Test Activity = Inter Technology Mobility with LTE and Vo5G is enabled and Test Activity = Command Mode / Sequencer with Handoff Protocol =  WiFi-LTE and Vo5G.

Select to emulate the scenario that a Vo5G call is attempted while the gNB does not support Vo5G and has to fallback to an eNB to start the media traffic. The fallback itself is triggered by receiving of a PDU Session Resource Modify Request message on the Vo5G PDU. The gNB that's unable to support Vo5G will send back a response with reject cause ims-voice-eps-fallback-or-rat-fallback-triggered and initiate inter-tech mobility to LTE. After the UE is successfully handed over to LTE, the network will resume the call attempt by initiating a Create Bearer Request / Activate Dedicated EPS Bearer Context Request to create the media bearer.

Mobility between 5GS and EPS without N26 is not yet supported.

Tcl Parameter: EpsFallbackEn
Fireball Select for Fireball testing. Requires Capacity test and Data Traffic enabled but not Data IPSec or N3IWF.
SMSo5G Select for Short Message Service over 5G.
N3IWF  

Enable N3IWF ( Non-3GPP InterWorking Function). Per 3GPP 23.502 .

The NWu interface becomes available for input with TCP and NWu IPSec tabs.

Available when Test Activity = Capacity Test or Session Loading Test or Inter Technology with Handoff Protocol = WiFi (Support for Handover of a PDU session procedure between 3GPP and Untrusted non-3GPP access) or LTE ( Handover procedures between EPS and 5GC-N3IWF and back based on Spec 3GPP 23.502 Section 4.11.3).

Support handover a UE from a source Untrusted non-3GPP access to a target 3GPP access and UE handover a PDU Session from Untrusted non-3GPP access to 3GPP access based on 3GPP 23.502 Section 4.9.2 )

Note : SMF and PGW-C should be tightly coupled in the same test case to exchange bearer context during mobility between 5GC-N3IWF and EPS (3GPP 23.502  Sec-4.11.3.2). AMF Node test case with SMF Emulation and PGW-C Emulation is recommended. Do not use the MME Node test case for PGW Emulation for this mobility scenario. 

Tcl Parameter: N3iwfEn

TWIF

Select for the TWIF - Trusted WLAN Interworking function. When enabled, the AAA Interface (RADIUS ), AP/SSIDGRE become available for input. AAA SUT Pane becomes available as well as the AP WAN Node. Currently we only support Number of PDUs set to 1.

Limitations : TWIF is only allowed with these options: Data Traffic , Data IPSec, External Data, Vo5G

Initial Phase 20.2.0 release supports ; 1 UE, 1 Node, No PDU no Data

Phase 2 in 20.4.0 release includes : 

  • L2 over GRE to encapsulate overall traffic from emulated WiFi AP to the TWIF node under test
  • Session establishment and UL/DL data flows

 

 

Spec Reference:

  • TS 23.501 – System Architecture for the 5G System (Rel-16)
  • TS 23.502 – Procedures for the 5G System (Rel-16)
  • TS 24.502 – Access to the 3GPP 5G Core Network via Non-3GPP Access Networks (Rel-16)
  • TS 38.413 – NG Application Protocol (Rel-16)
  • TS 33.501 – Security Architecture and Procedures for the 5G System
  • RFC 3748 – Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)
  • RFC 3579 – RADIUS Support For Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)
  • RFC 7296 – Internet Key Exchange Protocol (IKE v2)
  • IEEE 802.1X – Port-based Network Access Control

The following use cases are supported by AMF Nodal: 

Untrusted & Trusted 3GPP Access – TNGF

  • Registration via non-3GPP Access
  • Deregistration procedure for non-3GPP Access
  • N2 procedures via non-3GPP Access
  • UE requested PDU Session Establishment via non-3GPP Access
  • UE or Network requested PDU Session Modification via non-3GPP Access
  • UE or Network requested PDU Session Release via non-3GPP Access
  • Support for EAP Re-Authentication (Trusted non-3PP Access only)

For Devices without 5G NAS over WLAN Access (TWIF)

  • Initial Registration and PDU Session Establishment
  • Deregistration Procedure
  • N2 Procedures

 

1. UE initiates EAP procedure to send AAA requests to TNGF. EAP message will be encapsulated into AAA message. The AAA request also includes the TNAP identifier, which can be treated as the User Location Information.

The TNAP Identifier shall include the SSID of the access point to which the UE is attached. The TNAP Identifier shall include at least one of the following elements unless otherwise determined by the TWAN operator's policies:

-     the BSSID (see IEEE Std 802.11-2012 [106]);

-     civic address information of the TNAP to which the UE is attached.

Per TS 29.571 V16.5.0 section 5.4.4.62      

Type: TnapId :

Table 5.4.4.62-1: Definition of type TnapId

Attribute name

Data type

P

Cardinality

Description

ssId

string

C

0..1

This IE shall be present if the UE is accessing the 5GC via a trusted WLAN access network.

When present, it shall contain the SSID of the access point to which the UE is attached, that is received over NGAP, see IEEE Std 802.11-2012 [31].

bssId

string

C

0..1

This IE shall be present if available.

When present, it shall contain the BSSID of the access point to which the UE is attached, that is received over NGAP, see IEEE Std 802.11-2012 [31].

civicAddress

Bytes

C

0..1

This IE shall be present if available.

When present, it shall contain the civic address information of the TNAP to which the UE is attached, including the Location-Information Attribute and / or Location-Data Attribute as defined in IETF RFC 5580 [40].

 

2). During EAP-5G procedure TNGF key is created in the UE and in the AMF after the successful authentication. The TNGF key is transferred from the AMF to TNGF in step 10a (within the N2 Initial Context Setup Request). The TNGF derives a TNAP key, which is provided to the TNAP. 

3). After receiving the TNGF key from AMF in step 10a, the TNGF shall send to UE an EAP-Request/5G-Notification packet containing the "TNGF Contact Info", which includes the IP address of TNGF. 

Phase 2 (release 20.4) adds support for the section circled below:

Tcl Parameter: TwifEn

5G-RG

Available in AMF Nodal test case for Capacity or Session Loading test activities. Disabled by any test options other than Data Traffic, Data IPSec, External Data, and Vo5G.

Select for 5G-RG Emulation support in AMF Nodal. 

The System Under Test (SUT) is AGF with Landslide simulating 5G-RGs, AN & PDN as shown in the figure below. Landslide will generate control and user plane test traffic and initiate various procedures towards the AGF & UPF.

  • The interface between AN and AGF is the V interface.
  • The following procedures are supported:
    - Registration
    - PDU session Initiation/Establishment (IPv4, IPv6)
    - Service Request
    - Send/receive user plane data
    - 5G-RG or Network Requested PDU Session Release
    - Deregistration
  • At a high level, the following capabilities will be supported:
    - Control Plane encapsulated into PPP
    - Multiple PDU sessions generated by 5G-RG
    - IPv4, IPv6 & dual-stack support
    - 5GC is R16 compliant
  • Initiation of CP communication between a 5G-RG and an AGF has each layer brought up in the following sequence.
    1) PPPoE procedures as documented in RFC 2516 [39] to establish a PPPoE session.
    2) PPP LCP procedures documented in RFC 1661 [40] augmented with the 5G VSO (RFC 2153 [36]) to open the link and to permit 5G procedure support to be negotiated.
    3) EAP authentication procedures.
    4) VSNCP procedures to open a VSNP channel.

PPPoE procedures

  • PPPoE v1 will be used to carry PPP and VSNP for NAS and AS encapsulation. 
  • PPPoE is used to discover the AGF at the L2 broadcast domain to start the PPP session.
  • PADI message will use a service name tag to request a particular service.
  • PPPoE message exchange is mentioned in the Step1, 2, 3, 4 in the call flow diagram
  • Sample PADI/PDAO/PADR/PADS messages are shown below.

 

 

 

Spec Reference:

  • 3GPP 23.316 
  • FMC Fixed 5G Access
  • RFC-2516-A Method for Transmitting PPP Over Ethernet (PPPoE)
  • RFC-1661-PPP-LCP
  • TR-456-AGF Functional Requirements
  • TR-470-5G Wireless Wireline Convergence Architecture
  • 3GPP 24.502 - EAP-5G
  • RFC 3772 - VSNP 

When enabled, the PPP Tab becomes available for input. The SUT is AGF

In release 23.3, the following changes were made : In the Network Devices, "AP-WAN Node"  tab was renamed to "5G-RG Node" tab without "# of Nodes". The "Starting IP address" was removed as what is selected for 5G-RG is the Eth Port, not an IP address. The 5G-RG tab in Mobile Subscribers has been removed, and the MAC Address field was moved to the "5G-RG Node" tab on Network Devices.

The UE IP address is derived from the NAS-5G/SM PDU IPv6 Address Pool, not from UE Static IPv4.

Tcl Parameter: 5gRgEn

LCS Support

Reset UE Positioning Stored Info

LCS Support is now available in the 5G AMF Nodal / gNB CU SA Nodal and AMF Node test cases. Currently, we support UE Based and UE assisted A-GNSS method. If TDF file is used, only the A-GNSS related parameters need to be configured.

  • When enabled in AMF Nodal / gNB CU SA Nodal, the LCS Interface with LPP Tab and LPPe Tab are available for input.
  • When enabled in AMF Node, the LMF Interface with LPP Tab and LPPe Tab are available for input.

If Reset UE Positioning Stored Info is enabled (Per TS38.509 6.6.1), “NRPPa” command is triggered with the following messages;  

  • Reset UE positioning stored Info message with NAS-PDU: 0x0f8800;

              Protocol discriminator: 1111  

              Skip indicator: 0000 = No indication of selected PLMN (0)

              Message type: Reset UE Positioning Stored Information (0x88)

              UE Position Technology: 0000 0000 = AGNSS (0)

  • e-CID Measurement Initiation with NRPPa-PDU

 

If Reset UE Positioning Stored Info is disabled, “NRPPa” command is triggered with the following message;

  • e-CID Measurement Initiation with NRPPa-PDU
Emergency Alert

Select for the 5G Wireless Emergency Alert broadcast. Commercial Mobile Alert System (CMAS) Broadcast System for 5G.

In AMF Node/Nodal test cases and gNB CUSA Nodal TC, the PWS Tab for N2 interface allows the user to define requests related to Commercial Mobile Alert System (CMAS) Broadcast System for 5G. Per 3GPP 23.401.

Call flow:

Tcl Parameter: AmfEmergencyAlert

Tcl Parameter: GnbEmergencyAlert

Enable E911 Call

Available on AMF Nodal test for Capacity or Session Loading test activities, Vo5G is enabled, Number of PDUs > 1 , NAS 5G Sm - Number of Network Names > 1, and at least 1 DNN must have the Emergency option selected. 

Select to emulate real 5G UE’s E911 call flow that is consisting of the following steps:

  1. UE Register to 5G core and establish 1st PDU for data DNN.
  2. UE establish 2nd PDU for ims DNN and complete SIP Registration.
  3. (real UE dial 911) UE establish 3rd PDU for sos DNN, UE complete SIP sos register and make 911 call through 3rd.

When enabled, the E911 Vo5G tab is for the Emergency PDU and a second Gm2 for the Emergency Profile - Control: SIP , Control - TCP

Separate SIP Call Flow profile per Normal and Emergency PDU provides flexibility in configuring context of SIP messages over mechanism of SIP Configurable via that two Gm Tabs (Gm and Gm2) have to be exposed in GUI level.

Gm Tab/Profile is the default one, and it is associated with Vo5G Tab/Profile while Gm2 Tab/Profile is bound to E911 Vo5G. 

Example :

The E911 Call mechanism uses the highlighted timers (Start PDU Delay (After Registered) (ms)Start PDU Delay (After Prev-PDU) (ms)) as shown in screenshot below: 

In the case of two Vo5G PDNs only, ims and sos: 

  • UE registers in ims PDU after 1 sec and performs SIP Registration.
  • UE registers in sos PDU after 6 sec and performs E911 Call sequence.

In the case of 3 PDUs, data, ims and sos

  • UE registers in data PDU after 1 sec and activates data exchange. 
  • UE registers in ims PDU after 6 sec and performs SIP Registration.
  • UE registers in sos PDU after 11 sec and performs E911 Call sequence.

Two Vo5G Profiles, Normal and Emergency, can be implemented by means of exposure of two Vo5G Tabs :

  • Vo5G - for Normal PDU (ims DNN, in fact)
  • E911 Vo5G - for Emergency PDU (sos DNN, in fact)

Tcl Parameter: E911CallEn

SMF/UPF Node Emulation

Select for SMF/UPF Node Emulation.

For SMF / UPF Emulation, the Nsmf, SMF-AMF, N4 (PFCP ) and N6 (N6 Data Traffic) interfaces become available.  The SUT is AMF SBI, SMF SBI Node , SMF N4 Node , SMF N4 GTP Node, UPF N3 Node, ,UPF N4 Node and UPF N4 GTP Node.

The NAS-5G SM interface has two panels, UE (same as AMF nodal test case) and SMF (same as AMF Node test case).  There will be two SM measurements, one labeled SM-UE and the other SM-SMF.

The N4 (PFCP ) interface has two panels, UPF (same as UPF Node test case) and SMF (same as SMF Node test case).  

Tcl Parameter: SmfUpfNodeEmulationEn

NRF Interface Available when SMF/UPF Node emulation is enabled. Select to enable the Nnrf Client Interface. NF Tab (NF Consumer - Nnrf Client). NF Tab (NF Producer Nsmf). NRF SBI SUT becomes available for input. NRF Interface is also available on several of the 5G test cases including : Service Based Node, Service Based Node , SMF Node, etc Tcl Parameter: NrfIntfEn
Support ATSSS

Select for support for Access Traffic Switching and Steering. Available on AMF Nodal when Test Activity is Inter-Technology Mobility with Wifi Handoff Protocol and  N3IWF is enabled and NAS-5G Version 16.5.0 or higher.

Support Access Traffic Switching: The procedure that moves all traffic of an ongoing data flow from one access network to another access network in a way that maintains the continuity of the data flow. Access traffic switching is applicable when Home-routed Roaming (UE registered to the same PLMN).
between one 3GPP access and one non-3GPP access.

Support Access Traffic Steering: The procedure that selects an access network for a new data flow and transfers the traffic of this data flow over the selected access network. Access traffic steering is applicable between one 3GPP access and one
non-3GPP access.

Based on 5.32.6 of 3GPP TS 23.501 and 3GPP TS 24.193

Limitations: 

  • There is a little of bit performance impact to data throughput when ATSSS is enabled.
  • MPTCP is not supported yet.
  • ATSSS traffic Descriptor, AMF Nodal can only support "Match All", "Low Remote Port", "High Remote Port", "Ipv4 Remote Address", "Ipv6 Remote Address", "Protocol ID", "DNN Type". For other traffic Descriptors, AMF Nodal will return "False" to the traffic match. 
  • 24.193 > 6.1.4 Network steering functionalities information is not supported yet.
  • 24.193 > 6.1.5 Measurement assistance information is not supported yet.

 

Tcl Parameter: AtsssEn

Support Roaming

Support Roaming is available on AMF Nodal Test Configuration and AMF Node Emulator Configuration. 

Available on AMF Nodal when Test Activity is Capacity, Session Loading Test, or Command Mode/Sequencer and Handoff Protocol is “None” or Inter Technology Mobility with Handoff Protocol = LTE and Handoff Type = Handover or REG/TAU and "NAS-5G Version" in Nas 5G Mm is 15.1.0 or higher and "NGAP Version" in N2/NGAP is 15.1.0 or higher. It is disabled when “SMF/UPF Node Emulation”, “N3IWF”, “TWIF”, “5G-RG”, “Support URLLC” and “Support ATSSS” in Test options are enabled.

Available on AMF Node when  "NAS-5G Version" in Nas 5G Mm  is 15.1.0 or higher and "NGAP Version" in N2/NGAP is 15.1.0 or higher. It is disabled when SMF Emulation, UPF Emulation, N22 Interface, N14 Interface are enabled.

In AMF Nodal TC, select Support Roaming to indicate whether to include the mapped Home S-NSSAI in NSSAI sent to AMF if available in Requested NSSAI in Registration Request and in Pdu Session Establishment Request.

In the case of Requested NSSAI of Registration Request, if the “Mapped Home S-NSSAIs” in “Requested NSSAI” in NAS-5G/MM Tab are configured, it will be included. In the case of Pdu Session Establishment Request, if the “Mapped Home S-NSSAIs” in “Allowed NSSAI” sent by SUT-AMF are available and one of them is matched with S-NSSAI of the PDU session that UE will establish, it will be included. In addition, If “Network Slicing Info” in DNN Tab which the PDU to be established belongs to is configured and its S-NSSAI is one of the Allowed NSSAI in Registration Accept received from AMF and that S-NSSAI has the mapped Home S-NSSAI,     UE will include the mapped Home S-NSSAI in NSSAI which is optionally sent together with PDU Session Establishment Request Message.

In AMF Node TC, select Support Roaming to indicate whether to support Roaming Scenario for PDU Session Establishment. Whens enabled, AMF will trigger only the Home Routed Roaming scenario when it handles PDU Establishment Procedure, and the SNSSAI for PDU Session has the mapped Home SNSSAI. Select HomeRouted, currently the only option. When Configured NSSAIs is configured in the NAS-5g, AMF Nodal will include Allowed NSSAI with the mapped S-NSSAI in RegistrationAccept message during registration procedure.

 

Tcl Parameter: SupportRoamingEn

Tcl Parameter: PduEstRoamingType

5G-GRE

Select to add Soft GRE feature under User traffic session. Available in AMF Nodal for Capacity or Session Loading Test. It becomes disabled when any other checkbox is enabled except for Data Traffic and Fireball. On the AP/SSID tab for AMF Nodal only, the "Inner VLAN Tag" is allowed for Fireball but "VLAN Tag Type" is restricted to "0x8100".

Interface : AP/SSID ,DHCP and GRE become available for input. The 5G-GRE Pane becomes available for input. L3 measurements are generated when UE DHCPv4 or UE DHCPv6 is enabled for 5G-GRE even when data traffic is not enabled.

Enter the number of GRE Subscribers Per PDU in the 5G-GRE Pane. 

Range : 1 to 100, Default : 1

Select Apply Test Data File to Mobile Subscribers to add UE MAC Address via Test Data File (TDF). 

Tcl Parameter: 5gGreEn

Tcl Parameter: GreSubsPerPdu

Support NTN

Select to support NRNTN (Non-Terrestrial Network) network. AMF to send Forbidden TAI(s) to UE during initial Registration, mobility and periodic update Registration, and Service Request procedures.

Per 3gpp spec 23.502 release 17.6 sections 4.2.2.2.2, 4.2.3.2.

Can be enabled when NAS-5G version is 17.12.0/Sep2023 or higher and NGAP version (N2 tab) is 17.6.0/Sep2023 or higher. Test Activity excludes “Inter Technology Mobility” and “Dual Connectivity”.

For AMF Nodal TC , select the NTN Type in the gNB Control Node.

For AMF Node TC, enter the Number of Forbidden TACs in the Nas 5G MM Tab. 

Available on both AMF Nodal / Node test cases.

Tcl Parameter: SupportNtnEn

EPS Available when Test Activity = Inter Technology Mobility and Handoff Protocol = LTE.

Perform TAU After Handoff

Select to allow Tracking Area Update (TAU) to be performed immediately after the handover.  

Tcl Parameter: MobTauEn

TAU Delay (ms)

Available when you select when Perform TAU After Handoff is enabled.

Enter the TAU delay in micro seconds to indicate the time before performing Tracking Area Update.

Range : 0 to 65535

Default : 1000  

Tcl Parameter: MobTauDelay

Periodic TAU When Connected

Select to allow Tracking Area Update (TAU) to be performed when connected. 

Tcl Parameter: PeriodicTauUpdateEn

S1-MME IPSec

Select S1-MME IPSec to encapsulate control plane traffic between the eNodeB and MME.

S1-U IPSec

Select S1-U IPSec to encapsulate traffic between the eNodeB (User Plane) and the Serving Gateway (User Plane).

S1 IPSec

Select the S1-IPSec option to encapsulate traffic between the eNodeB and MME, or between eNodeB (User Plane ) and the Serving Gateway (User Plane) per eNodeB. Configure parameters on S1-IPSec | S1-IPSec tab.

Also, when you select S1-IPSec, a separate Security Gateway (Network Devices | eNodeB Security Node) terminates the tunnel.

NOTE: S1-IPSec is mutually exclusive with S1-MME IPSec

 

 

 

AMF Node Testing - 5G

SMF Emulation Select to enable to perform AMF (and SMF) emulation. The following interfaces become available for testing:
  • NAS-5G - SM and MM.
  • N2 - NGAP  (over SCTP).
  • N4 - PFCP (Packet Forwarding Control Protocol) (over UDP) - When SMF Emulation is enabled.

The SUT is UPF (AMF Node , SMF N4 Node , SMF N4 GTP Node )

When SMF Emulation is enabled, N14 Interface and Intra-AMF Only are not available.

 

When SMF Emulation is disabled, N11 Interface toward SMF becomes available for testing. Namf, AMF-SMF as well as NAS-5G- MM tab only and N2 - NGAP are available for input.

The SUT is SMF SBI SUT (AMF Node and AMF SBI Node)

 

Tcl Parameter: SmfEmulationEn

UPF Emulation

UPF Node Emulation is available on AMF Node test case. 

The N4 (PFCP ) and N6 (N6 Data Traffic) interfaces become available as well as UPF N3 Node, ,UPF N4 Node and UPF N4 GTP NodeSMF SBI SUT becomes available for input.

 

When only  "UPF Emulation" is selected and "User Initiates Association" is selected under N4 (PFCP ), Uner the Network Devices/System Under Test section, the "SMF N4 SUT” tab becomes available for input.

When both "SMF Emulation" and "UPF Emulation" are selected :

  • the tabs under the Network Devices/System Under Test section are grayed out and not available for selection
  • only one SMF node and one UPF node are supported
  • “Change of SSC Mode 2 or 3 PDU Session Anchor” is not available on the Nas 5G Sm
PGW-C Emulation

Select for PGW-C Emulation. The S2a/S2b/S5/S8 (GTPv2) interface becomes available for input. Enter the EPS Dedicated Bearers per Default. Available on AMF and SMF Node test cases and on gNB CU SA Nodal test case.

Tcl Parameter: PgwCEmulationEn

N26 Interface The N26 interface provides a reference point between Access and Mobility Management function (AMF) and the Mobility Management Entity function (MME). The N26 (GTPv2) interface becomes available for input. Available on AMF Node , gNB CU SA Nodal and MME Node test cases (The S11/N26 (GTPv2) interface becomes available for input on MME Node test case). Tcl Parameter: N26En
SMSo5G Select for Short Message Service over 5G.
UE-Requested PDU Session Modification

Select to trigger PDU Session Modification request from UE. NAS-5G SM | QoS Flow Modification is disabled for input.

Available on AMF Nodal, AMF Node and SMF Node test cases.

NRF Interface

Select to enable the Nnrf Client Interface. NF Tab (NF Consumer - Nnrf Client). NF Tab (NF Producer - Namf ). NRF SBI SUT becomes available for input.

Additional details in this NRF Interface section.

N14 Interface

Available when SMF Emulation and Intra-AMF Only are disabled on AMF Node test case. N14 interface provides a reference point between 2 Access and Mobility Management functions (AMF). Interface AMF-AMF becomes available for input.

The SUT is AMF SBI SUT and SMF SBI SUT (AMF Node and AMF SBI Node). The number of AMF Nodes and SMF SBI SUTs are always set to 1.

When SMF Emulation is disabled, N11 Interface toward SMF becomes available for testing. Namf, AMF-SMF as well as NAS-5G- MM tab only and N2 - NGAP are available for input.

Tcl Parameter: N14En

Intra-AMF Only

Available when SMF Emulation and N14 Interface are disabled on AMF Node test case. The SUT is SMF SBI SUT (AMF Node and AMF SBI Node). When SMF Emulation is disabled, N11 Interface toward SMF becomes available for testing. Namf, AMF-SMF as well as NAS-5G- MM tab only and N2 - NGAP are available for input.

SMF SBI SUTs are always set to 1.

Tcl Parameter: IntraAmfOnlyEn

NLs Interface

NLs interface provides a reference point between the Access and Mobility Management functions (AMF) and the (LMF) Location Management function. Interface AMF-LMF becomes available for input.

The NLs Interface is disabled in test configurations when the AMF SBI Node is not enabled on Network Devices. The AMF SBI Node is enabled when SMF Emulation is off, or any of the following test options are on:
    NRF Interface
    N8 Interface
    N12 Interface
    N22 Interface
    N50 Interface

Not available when LCS Support is enabled on AMF Node test case.

The SUT is LMF SBI SUT.

Tcl Parameter: NlsEn

NLg Interface

NLg interface provides a reference point between the Access and Mobility Management functions (AMF) and the (GMLC) Gateway Mobile Location Centre. Interface AMF-GMLC becomes available for input.

The SUT is GMLC SBI SUT.

The NLg Interface is disabled in test configurations when the AMF SBI Node is not enabled on Network Devices. The AMF SBI Node is enabled when SMF Emulation is off, or any of the following test options are on:
    NRF Interface
    N8 Interface
    N12 Interface
    N22 Interface
    N50 Interface

Tcl Parameter: NlgEn

N12 Interface

The N12 interface is also enabled on AMF Node Emulator Configuration. The SUT is AUSF SBI. Interface Namf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and AMF-AUSF (NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. AMF SBI Node is available for input.

The N12 interface is also available on Service Based Nodal test case.

N20 Interface

The SUT is SMSF SBI, select From AMF - Access and Mobility Function. Interface Namf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and AMF-SMSF (NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. AMF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: N20En

The N20 interface is also available on Service Based Nodal test case.

N22 Interface

The N22 interface is also enabled on AMF Node Emulator Configuration. The SUT is NSSF SBI. Interface Namf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and AMF-NSSF (Amf to Nssf NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. AMF SBI Node is available for input.

The N22 interface is also available on Service Based Nodal test case.

Tcl Parameter: N22En

 

Support URLLC

Support URLLC is available on AMF Node Emulator Configuration with SMF Emulation enabled and on SMF Node Emulator Configuration and on AMF Nodal Test Configuration.

The URLLC (Ultra-Reliable Low Latency Communications) feature comes with two parts, i.e., the control and user plane layer. This feature is specific to the signaling part of redundancy for URLLC in the UE requested PDU Session Establishment procedure. Redundancy is achieved by having two GTP tunnel for the same PDU and the resources have needs to be allocated for the same. URLLC needs a always-on PDU session to be established before hand, this is initiated by the UE and then acknowledged by the network if certain conditions are met and with the local policies. Once the always-on PDU is established, which itself is one of the conditions for Redundancy, other checks have to be verified → SST is 2, 5QI should be set to 82. 

During or after a URLLC QoS flow establishment, if the SMF decided that redundant transmission shall be performed based on authorized 5QI, NG-RAN node capability and/or operator configuration, the SMF informs the PSA UPF and NG-RAN to perform redundant transmission via N4 interface and N2 information accordingly. 

1. Activate Redundant Transmission during PDU Session Establishment procedure. 2. Activate Redundant Transmission during PDU Session Modification procedure per reference is 23.502 and TR 23.725 

Limitations : The Redundant TNL information from the UE→SMF is covered, SMF→UPF is not supported. The 5QI value used for URLLC is 82. The Redundant GTP tunnel info: Transport Layer address and gTP-TEID is same as the existing tunnel info.

On AMF Nodal test case :

  • Support URLLC is disabled by either "SMF/UPF Node Emulation" or "Fireball"
  • When "Support URLLC" is checked, at least one DNN tab in NAS-5G|SM must select the "Always-On PDU" option
  • When "Support URLLC" is checked, any DNN tab with the "Always-On PDU" option selected must also select the "Network Slicing Info" option and configure the SST value as 2.
  • Checking "Support URLLC" will automatically check "GTP-U Include Sequencer Number" on the N3|GTP-U tab but it can be unchecked afterwards.
  • When "Support URLLC" is checked, either "GTP-U Include Sequence Number" or "GTP-U Include UL QFI Sequence Number" must be checked.

Tcl Parameter: SupportUrllcEn

N50 Interface

The N50 interface is also enabled on AMF Node Emulator Configuration. Interface Namf (NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. AMF SBI Node is available for input. N50 Interface and Emergency Alert are mutually exclusive.

N50 provides a reference point between Cell Broadcast Center Function (CBCF) and the Access and Mobility Management function (AMF).

AMF forwarding logic for CMAS warning messages has been added based on 

3GPP Spec in section 9.1.3.5.2 of 23.041:  

The AMF forwards Write-Replace Warning Message Request NG-RAN to NG-RAN nodes. The AMF shall use the list of NG-RAN TAIs to determine the NG-RAN nodes in the delivery area. If the list of NG-RAN TAIs is not included and no Global RAN Node ID has been received from the CBCF, the message is forwarded to all NG-RAN nodes that are connected to the AMF. If a Global RAN Node ID has been received from the CBCF, the AMF shall forward the message only to the NG-RAN nodeindicated by the Global RAN Node ID IE. Ngap Tab (PWS Configuration).

Tcl Parameter: N50En

N8 Interface

The UDM (N8) interface is enabled on AMF Node Emulator Configuration. The SUT is UDM SBI. Interfaces AMF-UDM (NF Tab - NF Consumer) and Namf (NF Tab - NF Producer) become available for input. AMF SBI Node is available for input.

The N8 interface is also available on Service Based Nodal test case.

N15 Interface 

The SUT is PCF SBI, select From AMF (N15)- Access and Mobility Function. Interface Namf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and AMF-PCF (Amf to Pcf NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. AMF SBI Node is available for input.

Also available on Service Based Nodal test case when Test PCF (Npcf) and From AMF (N15) are enabled. 

We have support of UE Policy Association Establishment in SBI Nodal and Node. Now this support has been extended to the N1/N2 interface and all the way to the UE. Per Spec reference is 29.513 sec 5.6.1.2. See figure 5.6.1.2-1 : UE Policy Association Establishment procedure - Non-roaming. 

24.501 Annex D defines several UE Policy Delivery Service messages:

  • UE State Indication
  • Manage UE Policy Command
  • Manage UE Policy Command Complete
  • Manage UE Policy Command Reject

They are embedded either in a NAS container on N1 interface or in a Npcf/Namf message. More specifically:

  • During UE registration, the UE State Indication, which contains the current UE local UPSIs, may be carried in a NAS container within Registration Request and then transferred to Npcf_UEPolicyControl_Create request.
  • After the Namf_Communication_N1N2MessageSubscribe service operation, if the PCF decides to provide or update UE policies, it will send them using the Manage UE Policy Command which is embedded within Namf_Communication_N1N2MessageTransfer request and then transferred into a NAS container in DownlinkNasTransport.
  • After possessing the Manage UE Policy Command, the UE sends Manage UE Policy Command Complete or Reject in the uplink direction.

Limitation:

For now we only support UE Policy Association Establishment with initial UE registration.

N2 IPSec Select for N2 IPSec - Additional details here - N2 IPSec
N3 IPSec Select for N3 IPSec - Additional details here - N3 IPSec
N4 IPSec Select for N4 IPSec - Additional details here - N4 IPSec
Command Mode 

When "Command Mode" is "Enabled" and the test case is running, a "Command" button appears under the "Emulator Configuration" by the Mobile Subscribers section. 

Select to trigger Deregistration Request in Command Mode

Select to trigger Release Connection in Command Mode

Click the Command button on the LPP Tab and AMF-LMF to execute the Request Position Info Command.

Click the Command button on the PWS Tab  to execute the Send Message, Stop Message Command.

Multipart Message Options

Select to enter Boundary Delimiter.

 

 


ASN Nodal Testing

MIP Scheme

Use the MIP Scheme radio buttons to select a mobility scheme. Choices include Proxy MIP, Client MIP, or Simple IP. Define the MIP settings on the MIP tab. The MIP tab is available when you select Client MIP or HA Node Emulation on the Test Configuration tab.

NOTE:When MIP Scheme is Client MIP, the MS has MIP functionalities regardless of HA Node Emulation is used or not.

Selecting Client MIP or HA Node Emulation on the Test Configuration tab: You may enter IP address for Dynamic Hope Address Pool and Static Home Address on the Mobile Subscriber Pane
Selecting Client MIP and not selecting HA Node Emulation on the Test Configuration tab:
  • You may enter IP address for Static Home Address on the Mobile Subscriber Pane

  • Dynamic Hope Address Pool does not require IP Address

NOTE: DHCP configuration (DHCP Enabled on the Test Configuration tab) is not supported for Client MIP. It is only available for Proxy MIP and Simple IP, and it is mandatory.

 

BS-ASN Gateway IPSec  

You can use the BS-ASN gateway IPSec to encrypt control plane traffic between the Base Station and ASN nodes. Define the IKE settings on the ASN IPSec tab.

Tcl Parameter: BsIpSecEn

HA Node Emulation

Select to enable the R3 Interface - MIP Tab.

Tcl Parameter: HaEmulation

 

Test Case - Common Parameters

Data Tuning

Select to be able to adjust (attach / detach) the number of sessions established (mobile or UE) during a running test in the Data Traffic Mixer. Available in AMF Nodal, IP Application Node, MME Nodal and SMF Nodal when Data Traffic is enabled (with DMF) and Test Activity = Capacity. Also requires a TAS that supports Data Tuning. 

Added the ability to adjust the number of Session Established  (UE / mobile) and DMF Rate at test session level.

Added options : Manual / Auto

Default : Manual

When the test is started in Auto Mode, the Data Tuning tab appears. Sample successful Data Tuning in Auto mode:

When the test is started in Manual Mode, the Data Tuning tab appears. Initially no UEs are attached. You can start them manually by adjusting the UE % slider bar. The number of UEs running independently can be adjusted for each process. You can also adjust the DMF Rate %. It is initially configured to do 100% of the configured rate. It can be adjusted up to 250% of the configured transaction rate. Thus, if the configured transaction rate is 100 you can increase it to 250. Likewise you can go the other way and reduce the transaction rate. 

In the Data Traffic Tab - Click on Set UE % to enter the percentage of UEs to actually send data traffic. 

Tcl Parameter: DataTuningEn

SGi PtP Tunneling Support

Support for SGi PtP tunneling based on UDP. Used to deliver Non-IP data to AS via SGi. Per 3GPP TS 23.401 v 14.3.0.

Available in MME Nodal/MME Node when SGW/PGW Node Emulation is enabled.

Available in SGW Node when PGW Node Emulation is enabled.

Available in PGW Node.

Define PtP Tunnel - Access Stratum (Protocol = UDP, Source Port, Destination Port) in Network Devices (MME Nodal, MME Node, PGW Node and SGW Node).

Tcl Parameter: SgiPtpTunnelEn

Fireball

Fireball is a DMF threading model that provides optimized performance. This is a licensed feature. Additional details in Fireball Data Message Flows. See this table for supported options. 

Fireball does not support any Data IPSec test scenario.

Fireball does not support ciphering protection and integrity protection for F1UP data - Nas 5G Sm (Include Security Indication), Nas 5G Mm Security Mode ( Integrity Algorithm, Ciphering Algorithm)

Fireball does not support fragmentation - Data Message Flow Packet Size

 

  • Available in AMF Nodal test case when Data Traffic is enabled, Test Activity = Capacity , Session Loading Test, Intra-AMF Mobility, Inter-AMF Mobility, and Inter Technology Mobility" with Handoff Protocol = LTE and Data IPSec or N3IWF are not enabled. Disabled for SMF/UPF Emulation with N6|Data Traffic/NAT enabled. Fireball is disabled for "Inter Technology Mobility" with Handoff Protocol = Wifi. When Test Activity = Session Loading Test, only Fireball UDP, TCP, HTTP, QUIC (fb_udp, fb_tcp, fb_http, and fb_quic) are supported.
  • Available in gNB CU NSA Nodal test case when Data Traffic is enabled , Test Activity = Capacity and Data IPSec is not enabled. Added the capability to run Fireball when Bearer Type = Split Bearer. 
  • Available in gNB CU SA Nodal test case when Data Traffic is enabled , Test Activity = Capacity.
  • Available in gNB CU Node test case.
  • Available in IP Application Node test case when Data Traffic is enabled, Test Activity = Capacity or Session Loading Test, MS Transport IP/Ethernet is enabled and Data IPSec is not enabled. When Test Activity = Session Loading Test, only Fireball UDP, TCP, HTTP, QUIC (fb_udp, fb_tcp, fb_http, and fb_quic) are supported.
  • Available in MME Nodal test case when Data Traffic is enabled, Test Activity = Capacity, Session Loading Test, Intra-MME Mobility , Inter-MME Mobility and Data IPSec is not enabled. On MME Nodal's Test Configuration tab and on Gm|Media when VoLTE + RTP Traffic is enabled. When Test Activity = Session Loading Test, only Fireball UDP, TCP, HTTP, QUIC (fb_udp, fb_tcp, fb_http, and fb_quic) are supported.
  • Available in MME Node test case when Mobility = None or Intra-MME or  Inter-MME and SGW/PGW Node Emulation is enabled.
  • Available in Network Host test case when IP/Ethernet is enabled and Data IPSec is not enabled.
  • Available in PGW Nodal test case when Data Traffic is enabled, Test Activity = Capacity, Protocol = GTPv2 and Data IPSec is not enabled.
  • Available in PGW Node test case when (Mobility = None and Protocol = GTPv2 is enabled) or (Sxb Interface to CP is enabled). Data Traffic and Fireball are mutually exclusive in the PGW Node TC. If you select Data Traffic, the Fireball checkbox becomes disabled.
  • Available in SGW Nodal test case when Data Traffic is enabled, Test Activity = Capacity, and S5/S8 Protocol = GTPv2. Traffic Type = Continuous is required. All other options disabled.
  • SGW Nodal now supports PGW Node Emulation with Fireball Data Traffic, and PGW Node Emulation with VoLTE Fireball RTP, (not simultaneously). If emulating PGW Node, requires Local Network Host for Fireball Data Traffic is required. If emulating PGW Node with VoLTE selected (Fireball RTP data), Local IMS Node is required.
  • Available in SGW Node test case when (Protocol = GTPv2 and PGW Node Emulation are enabled) or (Sxa Interface to CP and/or Separate S5 Interfaces or (PGW Node Emulation and/or Sxa+Sxb Interface to CP). All other options disabled.
  • Available in SMF Nodal test case when Data Traffic is enabled, Test Activity = Capacity, Intra-AMF Mobility, Inter-AMF Mobility,Inter Technology Mobility . Disabled for SMF/UPF Emulation with N6|Data Traffic/NAT enabled. On SMF Nodal's Test Configuration tab and Gm|Media when Vo5G + RTP Traffic is enabled.
  • Available in UE Emulator Data Node test case when Data Traffic is enabled and Data IPSec is not enabled.
  • Available in UPF Nodal test case when Data Traffic is enabled, Test Activity = Capacity.
  • Available in UPF Node test case.
  • Available in Wifi Offload Gateway Nodal test case when Test Activity = Capacity and when AP Tunnel Type = NONE. 
  • Available in Wifi Offload Gateway Node test case. It is enabled when "AP Tunnel Type" is "GRE L2" and "Mobility Action" is "Normal".  Fireball is disabled by Emulator Options "Gn to GGSN", "S2a to PGW", "S2b to PGW", "Inter SSID Mobility", and "AP-WAN PPPoE".

 

Added support for Vlan IDs when running Fireball. Dynamic VLAN is not supported at this time.

Your Test Server must be licensed and configured properly to run Fireball. Go to Test Server Configuration and set Data Gen Performance to Fireball. Go to Managing Test Server Capacity License and select an appropriate License. Contact support with any questions.

Next Hop IP Address must be configured. 

For MME Nodal, the Next Hop IP Address must be configured on the eNodeB User Node. It needs to point at the SGW User Node IP address.

NOTE: Fireball limitations:

  • HTTP Proxy is not currently supported when running Fireball. NAT gateway used with a remote network host is supported.
  • Dynamic VLAN is not supported at this time.
  • Next Hop IP Address must be configured
  • Idle Entry Time for 5G (R)AN Node (ms) is not supported when running Fireball.

Tcl Parameter: FireballEn

CIoT

CP-CIoT EPS Optimization Supported

Ignore RAI

T6a Interface

S1-U Data Transfer Supported

Use Service Request If Apply

Activate S1-U Data Transfer

Active After (ms)

 

UP-CIoT EPS Optimization Supported

Suspend Context When Idle

 

NB-IoT

Preferred CIoT

Send Last Message with RAI

Enable ROHC

      ROHC Profile ID      

 

NB-CIoT Supported on Specific NAS Sessions via TDF

 

Cellular Internet of Things (CIoT) - Cellular network supporting low complexity and low throughput devices for a network of Things. Cellular IoT supports both IP and Non-IP traffic. This is a licensed feature.

Cellular IoT EPS Optimizations provide improved support of small data transfer. One optimization is based on User Plane transport of user data and is referred to as User Plane (UP-CIoT EPS Optimization). Another optimization, known as Control Plane (CP-CIoT EPS Optimization), transports user data or SMS messages via MME by encapsulating them in NAS, reducing the total number of control plane messages when handling a short data transaction. These optimizations can be used separately e.g. if the UE or the network supports one of them, or in parallel if the UE and the network supports both. If both the Control Plane and User plane CIoT EPS optimizations are supported for a UE, the PDN connections that only use the Control Plane CIoT EPS Optimization i.e. the MME has included Control Plane Only Indicator in ESM request will only be handled via the Control Plane CIoT EPS optimization. All other PDN connections are handled using Control Plane or User Plane CIoT EPS optimizations. In addition, the Control Plane CIoT optimization can be used to support PDN connections to an SCEF, while regular S1-U data transfer is used independently to support PDN connections to P-GW. All the SGi PDN connections of a UE shall either use S11-U or S1-U at any point in time.

The User Plane CIoT EPS Optimization functionality enables support for transfer of user plane data without the need for using the Service Request procedure to establish Access Stratum (AS) context in the serving eNodeB and UE.

Additional details in 3GPP TS 24.401 (v13.7.0), TS 24.301 (v13.6.1), 36.413 (v13.3.0) and 29.274 (v13.6.0).

Available for Test Activity = (Capacity Test, Session Loading Test, Session Loading with Mobility, Intra-MME, Inter-MME, Command Mode/Sequencer when Handoff Protocol = "None" ) and NAS Tab Version >= 13.6.1 and S1-AP Version >= 13.3.0 (MME Nodal).

Available when Mobility = None on MME Node Test Case.

Available for Test Activity = Capacity Test or Session Loading Test (SGW Nodal).

Available for Test Activity = Capacity Test (gNB CU NSA Nodal).

CP-CIoT EPS Optimization Supported - Select to enable Control Plane CIoT EPS Optimization Supported. Available in MME Nodal/Node and SGW Nodal.

Tcl Parameter: CpCiotEpsOptimizationEn

 

Ignore RAI - Available in MME Node test case when Control Plane CIoT EPS Optimization Supported is enabled. Select to ignore the RAI byte.

Tcl Parameter: CpCiotIgnoreRai

T6a Interface - Available in MME Node test case when Control Plane CIoT EPS Optimization Supported is enabled. Select to support Non-IP Data Delivery (NIDD) through T6a reference point between Mobility Management Entity (MME) and  Service Capability Exposure Function (SCEF) for reporting UE Loss of Connectivity, UE reachability, location of the UE and change in location of the UE, and Communication Failure. This capability provides the ability to send data over the control plane (MME/SGSN) in a NAS message, thus reducing the total number of control plane messages required for small data delivery.

Click to get additional details on T6a Interface.

 

S1-U Data Transfer Supported - Available in MME Nodal and MME Node test cases when Control Plane CIoT EPS Optimization Supported is enabled. Select to trigger control plane service flag with active flag for NB-IOT device emulation.

Use Service Request If Apply- Available in MME Nodal and MME Node test cases when Control Plane CIoT EPS Optimization Supported and S1-U Data Transfer Supported are enabled. Select for UE Triggered Service Request in Idle Mode (based on 23.401 section 5.3.4.1).

Tcl Parameter: CpCiotUseSvcReqEn

Activate S1-U Data Transfer - Available in MME Nodal and MME Node test cases when Control Plane CIoT EPS Optimization Supported and S1-U Data Transfer Supported are enabled. Select to activate S1-U data transfer.

Enter Active After (ms) - Enter active time in milliseconds. Range: 0 to 65534000, Default = 5000

Tcl Parameter: CpCiotS1uActiveEn

Tcl Parameter: CpCiotS1uActiveDelay

Tcl Parameter: CpCiotS1uXferEn

 

UP-CIoT EPS Optimization Supported - Select to enable User Plane CIoT EPS Optimization Supported. Available in MME Nodal/Node.

Tcl Parameter: UpCiotEpsOptimizationEn

 

Suspend Context when Idle  - Available when User Plane CIoT EPS Optimization Supported is enabled. Select to suspend context when idle. (UeContextReleaseRequest)  Available in MME Nodal.

Tcl Parameter: UpCiotIdleSuspendEn

 

CP-CIoT  - Available when Control Plane CIoT EPS Optimization Supported is enabled. Select for CPCIoT indication.  Available in SGW Nodal.

Tcl Parameter: CpCiotOnlyEn

 

NB-IoT  - Available when Control Plane CIoT EPS Optimization Supported is enabled. Available in MME Nodal.

Tcl Parameter: NbIotEn

 

Narrowband-IoT is a 3GPP Radio Access Technology that forms part of Cellular IoT. It allows access to network services via E-UTRAN with a channel bandwidth limited to 180 kHz (Corresponding to one PRB).

 

To configure for WideBand IoT (WB-CIoT) : Enable CP-CIoT EPS Optimization Supported and UP-CIoT EPS Optimization Supported and

Preferred CIoT = CIoT No Additional Info.

 

Select to enable Preferred CIoT. Available when Control Plane CIoT EPS Optimization Supported or UP-CIoT EPS Optimization Supported is enabled. Available in MME Nodal.

Options: CIoT No Additional Info, CP-CIoT, UP-CIoT.

Tcl Parameter: PreferredCiot

 

Send Last Message with RAI. Available for Test Activity = (Capacity Test, Session Loading Test, Session Loading with Mobility, Intra-MME, Inter-MME, Command Mode/Sequencer when Handoff Protocol = "None" ) and NAS Tab Version >= 13.6.1 and S1-AP Version >= 13.3.0 (MME Nodal).  Select for Retrieve UE Info Procedure with RAI (Release Assistance Indication). Only applies to DMF Protocol = ping, raw, udp, tcp, sctp with limited # of transactions.

Options: 0, 1, 2

  • Option 0 = No information regarding DDX is conveyed by the information element. If received, it shall be interpreted as 'neither value "01" nor "10" applies'

  • Option 1 = No further uplink or downlink data transmission subsequent to the uplink data transmission is expected.

  • Option 2 = Only a single downlink data transmission and no further uplink data transmission subsequent to the uplink data transmission is expected.

Tcl Parameter: CpCiotSendLastMsgWithRai

 

Enable ROHC. Available when CP-CIoT EPS Optimization Supported and NB-IOT are enabled and Preferred CIoT = CP-CIoT on MME Nodal test case and when CP-CIoT EPS Optimization Supported is enabled on MME Node Test Case.

Select for Robust Header Compression.  

Select ROHC Profile ID. Options: ROHC_PROFILE_IP (version 1, default ) or ROHCv2_PROFILE_IP

 

Tcl Parameter: NbIotRohcEn

Tcl Parameter: NbIotRohcProfileId

 

NB-CIoT Supported on Specific NAS Sessions via TDF - Available for Test Activity = (Capacity Test, Session Loading Test, Session Loading with Mobility, Intra-MME, Inter-MME, Command Mode/Sequencer when Handoff Protocol = "None" ) and NAS Tab Version >= 13.6.1 and S1-AP Version >= 13.3.0 (MME Nodal). Not available if CP-CIoT EPS Optimization Supported or UP-CIoT EPS Optimization Supported are enabled.

IMSI is used to identify the NAS Session in this TDF. This TDF overlays NAS Sessions with RAT type 0 (NB-CIoT). No other RAT type is currently supported. TACs in this TDF are used for NB-CIoT and should be among the TACs configured by GUI. Multi-TACs can be configured to NB-CIoT. For NAS Sessions not in the TDF, all configurations via the GUI are not changed.

 

Example tdf file : enbwithdifferentrattype.csv

 

Tcl Parameter: NbCiotCfgFileEn

Tcl Parameter: NbCiotCfgFile

Enable NetLoc Mode  

Enable Network Location. Available in IMS Node, PCRF Node, PGW Node and SGW Nodal.

Follow link for additional information on IMS Node Network Location Support.

Follow link for additional information on PCRF Node Network Location Support.

Follow link for additional information on PGW Node Network Location Support.

Follow link for additional information on SGW Nodal Network Location Support.

Tcl Parameter: NetLocEn

Vo5G

Select to test the SIP Vo5G feature which supports SIP and RTP-based Voice in the 5G test cases.

You are required to configure the following:

CSC-4 to Mission Critical CMS

Available in IP Application Node, MME Nodal, PGW Nodal, SGW Nodal and Wifi Offload Gateway Nodal Test cases. The CSC-4 Interface along with the the CSC-4 APP Tab, TLS Tab and the CSC-4 Flows Tab become available for input.

The Landslide VoLTE modules have been enhanced to support configuration management over HTTP for Mission Critical Push-to-Talk (MCPTT) specified in the 3GPP specifications, including TS 23.280, 22.179, 23.179, 24.379, 24.380, 33.179, 24.382, 24.384, etc. The SUT is the EPC core including PCRF. Landslide is used to emulate MC-PTT clients.

Mission Critical Push-to-Talk (MC-PTT) is one of important technologies that helps to enable the public safety broadband network proposed by First Responder Network Authority (FirstNet). MCPTT is one of the services under the 3GPP Mission Critical Services (MCS) framework. All of the MCS utilize the MC core provided by 3GPP networks to enable MCS subscribers to communicate with fast setup times, strong security and priority handling. MC services include MCPTT, as well as MC Data, MC Video, etc.   

The configuration management interface is called CSC-4 and shown in the following diagram from TS 23.280. It is between the Configuration Management Client (CMC) residing in MCPTT UE, and the Configuration Management Server (CMS) within Common Service Core (CSC). It is used to configure MCPTT service, as well as MCData, and MCVideo services.  This feature focuses on configuration management in MCPTT services based on On-network model, which includes UE configuration, user profile configuration, service configuration, and group configuration.

However, group configuration shown in the diagram is between Group Management Client (GMC) and Group Management Server (GMS) over CSC-5 interface is not currently supported.

Tcl Parameter: MissionCriticalCsc4ClnEn

NTSR

Select for Network Triggered Service Restoration (NTSR). Available in MME Nodal (Capacity Test only), MME Node and SGW Node Test cases (disabled if either CUPS (Sxa / Sxb) option is enabled).

When NTSR is enabled, the SGW Node will send a DDN  (Down Link Data Notification) to the MME when it detects restart via the "restart counter" ( Restart Counter (GTPv2))  in any GTP Signaling message or Echo Request/ Response Message. The Network Devices (NTSR - MMESut_1 and MMESut_2) configured in the SGW Node will be used to pick an MME S11 link to send the DDN Message to. The MME SUT will send a Paging Message upon receipt of the DDN Message to the eNodeB. This will result in the sending of a Service Request Message to the MME to re-establish the session.

Tcl Parameter: NtsrEn

WebRTC  

Available in AMF Nodal, IP Application Node, MME Nodal and Network Host Test cases. Not available when Data Traffic, Data IPSec, External Data, Fireball, VoLTE are selected.

The WebRTC Interface along with the the WebRTC, SIPTLS Tab, OTT Access Auth and the WebRTC Flows Tab become available for input. Control: WebRTCTLS Tab, TCP. Media: Voice/Video - RTP, Voice/Video - SRTP , MSRPOTT Access Auth

Enable WebRTC for support of WebRTC load testing. Refer to RFC 5389 for Session Traversal Utilities for NAT (STUN) and RFC 6455 for WebSocket Protocol.

In the Network Host test case, select either Endpoint or Proxy. When Proxy is enabled, the Media Tab is hidden in the WebRTC.

 

Available on AMF Nodal Test Configuration.

Available on IP Application Node.

Available on Network Host (for B2B testing)

Available on MME Nodal Test Configuration.

Tcl Parameter: WebRtcEn

Tcl Parameter: WebRtcGwMode

N2 IPSec

Target N2 IPSec

Select N2 IPSec to enable IPSec on the N2 Interface. In AMF Nodal / AMF Node testing, select the N2 IPSec option to encapsulate traffic between the gNB and AMF for Control / User Planes. When enabled N2 IPSec becomes available for input on the N2 Interface.

N2 IPSec disables N3IWF, TWIF, and 5G-RG on AMF Nodal test case.

Select Target N2 IPSec to enable IPSec on the Target N2 Interface. In AMF Nodal , the Target N2 IPSec checkbox is available when Test Activity is with Inter-AMF, Intra-AMF, Command Mode, and Sequencer. Configure parameters on Target N2-IPSec | Target N2-IPSec tab. When enabled the Target N2 IPSec becomes available for input on the Target N2 Interface.

Tcl Parameter: GnbAmfIpsecEn

Tcl Parameter: TargetGnbAmfIpsecEn

N3 IPSec

Target N3 IPSec

Select N3 IPSec to enable IPSec on the N3 Interface. In AMF Nodal / AMF Node / UPF Nodal / UPF Node testing, select the N3 IPSec option to encapsulate traffic between the gNB and UPF for Control / User Planes. When enabled N3 IPSec becomes available for input on the N3 Interface.

Per (3gpp ts33.501 section 9.3) - 9.3 Security requirements and procedures on N3. N3 is the reference point between the 5G-AN and UPF. It is used to carry user plane data from the UE to the UPF.

N3 IPSec disables N3IWF, TWIF, and 5G-RG on AMF Nodal test case.

Select Target N3 IPSec to enable IPSec on the Target N3 Interface. In AMF Nodal , the Target N3 IPSec checkbox is available when Test Activity is Inter-AMF, Intra-AMF, Command Mode, and Sequencer. In UPF Nodal, the Target N3 IPSec checkbox is available when Test Activity is Mobility.

Configure parameters on Target N3-IPSec | Target N3-IPSec tab. When enabled the Target N3 IPSec becomes available for input on the Target N3 Interface.

Tcl Parameter: GnbUpfIpsecEn

Tcl Parameter: TargetGnbUpfIpsecEn

N4 IPSec

Select N4 IPSec to enable IPSec on the N4 Interface. In AMF Nodal / AMF Node / gNB CU SA Nodal / SMF Node / UPF Nodal / UPF Node testing, select the N4 IPSec option to encapsulate traffic between the gNB and UPF for Control / User Planes. When enabled N4 IPSec becomes available for input on the N4 Interface. In AMF Nodal, SMF/UPF Node Emulation must be enabled for N4 IPSec to become available for selection.

Per (3gpp ts33.501 section 9.9) - Security mechanisms for non-SBA interfaces internal to the 5GC and between PLMNs

Non-SBA interfaces internal to the 5G Core such as N4 and N9 can be used to transport signalling data as well as privacy sensitive material, such as user and subscription data, or other parameters, such as security keys. Therefore, these interfaces shall be confidentiality, integrity, and replay protected. 

Roaming interfaces between PLMNs except for N32, shall be confidentiality, integrity, and replay protected. Protection for the N32 interface is specified in clauses 13.1 and 13.2.

For the protection of the above mentioned non-SBA internal and roaming interfaces except N32, IPSec ESP and IKEv2 certificate-based authentication shall be supported as specified in sub-clauses 9.1.2 of the present document with confidentiality, integrity and replay protection. This security mechanism shall be used,, unless security is provided by other means, e.g. physical security. A SEG may be used to terminate the IPSec tunnels. 

QoS related aspects are further described in sub-clause 9.1.3 of the present document. 

NOTE:   It is up to the operator choice to use cryptographic solutions or other mechanisms to protect internal non-SBA interfaces such as N4 and N9. IPSec ESP implementation shall be done according to RFC 4303 [4] as profiled by TS 33.210 [3]. For IPSec implementation, tunnel mode is mandatory to support while transport mode is optional.  

IKEv2 certificate-based authentication implementation shall be done according to TS 33.310 [5]. The certificates shall be supported according to the profile described by TS 33.310 [5]. IKEv2 shall be supported conforming to the IKEv2 profile described in TS 33.310 [5]. 

Tcl Parameter: SmfN4IpsecEn

 


CDMA2000 Mobile IP Testing

The End-to-End Mobile IP test case tests a minimum of one FA and one HA SUT, and can support testing two FAs and two HA SUTs. Enter the port used by the HA in HA Port Number. The FA port number is defined on the RP tab in the SUT Port Number field.

Dynamic HA

In the CSN Nodal, FA Nodal, and End-to-End Mobile IP test cases, you can use the Dynamic HA checkbox to enable dynamic Home Agent address resolution. When this option is enabled in the End-to-End Mobile IP test case, the HA SUT drop-down list is disabled. Select the Home Agent address to be used in the RRQ from the drop-down list.

MIP IPSec

In the FA Nodal, HA Nodal and CSN Nodal test cases, you can test using the Mobile IP VPN access model with the MIP IPSec checkbox. In this configuration, one IPSec tunnel is established between either an FA SUT and an HA node (FA Nodal) or an HA SUT and an FA node (HA Nodal) for control plane traffic. Define the IKE settings on the MIP IPSec tab.

NOTE: The MIP IPSec checkbox is disabled during the following conditions:

  • In the CSN Nodal Test Case, when Simple IP and WiMAX Forum Version 1.5.0 is selected.
  • In HA Nodal Test Case, when Test Activity is either Session Loading with Mobility or Inter-PDSN. (If MIP IPSec tunnel were to establish along with the session, the session would not handoff and there would be no registration reply from the FA.)

IMPORTANT: Whenever IPSec is used, your maximum Activation Rate is limited to 200 sessions/second.

 

MIPv6 IPSec

Use the checkbox to enable IPSec between the MN and HA. Define the IPSec settings on the MIPv6 IPSec tab.

LMA Emulation

Select the LMA Emulation checkbox for control node availability (S2a interface). The Bearer IP Address Pool on the Mobile Subscribers pane is only available when emulation is on.

PMIPv6 Transport

The PMIPv6 Transport dropdown list is available only when you select the LMA Emulation. When you select Transport as IPv4, you must enter the PMIPv6 Source Address for LMA Node.

PMIPv6

Use the checkbox to enable IPSec between the SGW/MAG/HSGW and PDN gateway/LMA. Define the IPSec settings on the PMIPv6 IPSec tab.

  • In SGW Nodal and PGW Nodal test cases, the PMIPv6 IPSec checkbox is available only when PMIPv6 protocol is selected. In SGW Nodal testing, PMIPv6 is available only when UMTS release version is 8.
  • In PGW Nodal testing, The UE Initiates Dedicated Bearers and Max Bearers per Subscriber parameter are disabled for PMIPv6.

^ Back to Top


CDMA Femtocell Testing

Femtocell IPSec

You can use the Femtocell IPSec checkbox to encrypt control plane and user plane traffic between the Femtocell node and Femtocell Gateway SUT. Define the IKE settings on the RP IPSec tab.

Auto-Start Auxiliary Sessions

When auxiliary service instances are supported, you can choose to activate them immediately after the MN's main service instance is activated or activate them when they are needed by a DMF with the Auto-Start Auxiliary Sessions checkbox. You can trigger service instance activation by adding event controls to your DMF.

When auxiliary service instances are supported, you can choose to activate them immediately after the MS's main service instance is activated or activate them when they are needed by a DMF by selecting the Auto-Start Auxiliary Sessions checkbox. You can trigger service instance activation by adding event controls to your DMF. See the GPRS section below for the default DMFs that provide this capability.

By default, secondary PDP contexts are automatically activated after the associated primary context is activated. When the test includes secondary contexts, you can clear the Auto-Start Secondary Contexts checkbox and trigger activation of secondary contexts from within a DMF with event controls. Three default DMFs that trigger secondary context activation are provided in the Basic Library:

Route Optimization

Optional in the IPv6 HA Nodal and IPv6 CN Nodal test cases when Data Traffic is included in the test.

 

^ Back to Top


CDMA/WiFI Convergence

Initial Network

Select the Initial Network from the dropdown list. This option is available only when you select the Inter Technology Mobility as the Test Activity.

Options: CDMA Network, WiMAX Network

Default: WiMAX Network

Tcl Parameter: InitiateType

NOTE: The Initial Network and Target FA Node are available if CDMA is licensed. If CDMA is not licensed, the default value is automatically provisioned.

MIP Protocol

Select the MIP Protocol used to define attributes for Mobile IP Registration Request (RRQ) messages (MIPv4) between UE, PDIF-FA's and HA or the types of Mobile IPv6 and ICMPv6 messages the UE will send (MIPv6).

Tcl Parameter: MipVersion

Route Optimization

Route Optimization is optional in the CDMA WiFi Convergence testing when Data Traffic is included on the Test Configuration tab. See also Route Optimization on the Data Traffic tab.

Tcl Parameter: Mip6MnRouteOptEn

MIP IPSec

Select MIP IPSec (on the CDMA/WiFi Convergence Test Configuration tab) to encrypt control plane traffic between the MSs and the PDIF-FAs sent to the HA node. See MIP IPSec tab for defining IKE settings.

Tcl Parameter: MipIpSecEn

HA Node Emulation

In the CDMA/WiFi Convergence test case to select HA Node Emulation to simulate a Home Agent when an HA SUT is not used. You can define Home Agent node on the Network Configurations tab.

 

^ Back to Top


CDMA/WiMAX Convergence Testing

Initial Network

Select the Initial Network from the dropdown list. This option is available only when you select the Inter Technology Mobility as the Test Activity.

Options: CDMA Network, WiMAX Network

Default: WiMAX Network

Tcl Parameter: InitiateType

NOTE: The Initial Network and Target FA Node are available if CDMA is licensed. If CDMA is not licensed, the default value is automatically provisioned.

BS-ASN IPSec

You can use the BS-ASN gateway IPSec to encrypt control plane traffic between the Base Station and ASN nodes. Define the IKE settings on the ASN IPSec tab.

Auto-Start Auxiliary Sessions

When auxiliary service instances are supported, you can choose to activate them immediately after the MS's main service instance is activated or activate them when they are needed by a DMF by selecting the Auto-Start Auxiliary Sessions checkbox. You can trigger service instance activation by adding event controls to your DMF. See the GPRS section below for the default DMFs that provide this capability.

By default, secondary PDP contexts are automatically activated after the associated primary context is activated. When the test includes secondary contexts, you can clear the Auto-Start Secondary Contexts checkbox and trigger activation of secondary contexts from within a DMF with event controls. Three default DMFs that trigger secondary context activation are provided in the Basic Library:

 

 ^Back to Top


CDMA2000 Mobile IP Testing

The End-to-End Mobile IP test case tests a minimum of one FA and one HA SUT, and can support testing two FAs and two HA SUTs. Enter the port used by the HA in HA Port Number. The FA port number is defined on the RP tab in the SUT Port Number field.

Dynamic HA

In the CSN Nodal, FA Nodal, and End-to-End Mobile IP test cases, you can use the Dynamic HA checkbox to enable dynamic Home Agent address resolution. When this option is enabled in the End-to-End Mobile IP test case, the HA SUT drop-down list is disabled. Select the Home Agent address to be used in the RRQ from the drop-down list.

MIP IPSec

In the FA Nodal, HA Nodal and CSN Nodal test cases, you can test using the Mobile IP VPN access model with the MIP IPSec checkbox. In this configuration, one IPSec tunnel is established between either an FA SUT and an HA node (FA Nodal) or an HA SUT and an FA node (HA Nodal) for control plane traffic. Define the IKE settings on the MIP IPSec tab.

NOTE: The MIP IPSec checkbox is disabled during the following conditions:

  • In the CSN Nodal Test Case, when Simple IP and WiMAX Forum Version 1.5.0 is selected.
  • In HA Nodal Test Case, when Test Activity is either Session Loading with Mobility or Inter-PDSN. (If MIP IPSec tunnel were to establish along with the session, the session would not handoff and there would be no registration reply from the FA.)

IMPORTANT: Whenever IPSec is used, your maximum Activation Rate is limited to 200 sessions/second.

MIPv6 IPSec

Use the checkbox to enable IPSec between the MN and HA. Define the IPSec settings on the MIPv6 IPSec tab.

LMA Emulation

Select the LMA Emulation checkbox for control node availability (S2a interface). The Bearer IP Address Pool on the Mobile Subscribers pane is only available when emulation is on.

The PMIPv6 Transport dropdown list is available only when you select the LMA Emulation. When you select Transport as IPv4, you must enter the PMIPv6 Source Address for LMA Node.

PMIPv6

Use the checkbox to enable IPSec between the SGW/MAG/HSGW and PDN gateway/LMA. Define the IPSec settings on the PMIPv6 IPSec tab.

  • In SGW Nodal and PGW Nodal test cases, the PMIPv6 IPSec checkbox is available only when PMIPv6 protocol is selected. In SGW Nodal testing, PMIPv6 is available only when UMTS release version is 8.
  • In PGW Nodal testing, The UE Initiates Dedicated Bearers and Max Bearers per Subscriber parameter are disabled for PMIPv6.

 

HA Node/Nodal

Dynamic Ha Support

In HA Node test case, select to use Dynamic HA Support to enable dynamic Home Agent address resolution, if you wish to set the address in the initial RRQ to 0.0.0.0.

Find MN By NAI

Select to map NAI to HA and use the TDF on MIP tab

DMU

Select to enable DMU (Dynamic Mobile IP Update) - A security feature that allows RSA encryption keys into mobile station to enable secure distribution of mobile IP keys.

Tcl Parameter: DmuEn

Periodic DMU After Session Established

Select to enable a DMU update after the session is established. Enter the frequency in the DMU Interval. Available when DMU is enabled.

Tcl Parameter: PeriodicDmuEn

DMU Interval (s)

Enter the interval in seconds when to perform a periodic DMU (Dynamic Mobile IP Update) after the session has been established.  

Range : 1 to 4000000

Default : 120

Tcl Parameter: DmuInterval

 

^ Back to Top


CDMA2000 Simple IP Testing

In the Simple IP VPN test case, you can test using either the Simple IP VPN or Simple IP VPRN access model.


GPRS Testing

The GGSN Nodal test case tests at least one GGSN SUT, and can support testing two GGSNs in a VPRN configuration.

  • The GGSN SUT services the MN PDP contexts in all configurations and terminates the L2TP tunnel in an L2TP VPN test.

  • When the SUT uses different IP address for control and bearer plane (user) traffic, you can specify the address used for bearer plane traffic by checking the Alt Data box, and selecting a bearer plane "SUT". If a different address is received in a Create PDP Context Response, that address will be used instead of the defined address. You can also define alternative bearer plane IP addresses for the SGSN nodes by enabling the User Node.

  • In a VPRN test, one GGSN services the PDP contexts and another GGSN terminates the L2TP tunnel. Check the L2TP box and select the SUT that will terminate the tunnel.

IP Data Testing

 

 

^ Back to Top


CSN Nodal Testing

Use the CSN Nodal Home Agent System Under Test to encrypt all traffic over the MIP connection.

Select the Home Agent address to be used in the RRQ from the drop-down list.

Select the Enable Dynamic Home Agent check box if you wish to set the address in the initial RRQ to 0.0.0.0.

Select the MIP IPSec checkbox (in the CSN nodal configuration) to encrypt control plane traffic between the ASN-GW and the HA node. See MIP IPSec tab for defining the IKE settings.

Initial Network

Select the Initial Network from the dropdown list. This option is available only when you select the Inter Technology Mobility as the Test Activity.

Options: CDMA Network, WiMAX Network

Default: WiMAX Network

NOTE: The Initial Network and Target FA Node are available if CDMA is licensed. If CDMA is not licensed, the default value is automatically provisioned.

Apply Parameter Values from Test Data Files

You can provision explicit values for the R6 Protocol and WiMAX Forum Protocol by using Test Data Files. Download a sample file by right-clicking the link below.

See Applying Parameter ValuesApplying Parameter Values.

See Test Data Files for further explanation and sample files. If a sample is not found for the specific TDF, you can obtain a sample file from your Technical Support representative. You may also use the following options to select an existing TDF or create/edit TDF-CSV files (TDF-CSV Editor). 

For most TDF Parameters used for Applying Parameters, each row in the file is the overridden value for a different “Session”, aka a different UE. But some TDFs are done in other dimensions, like Bearers, eNodeBs, Subscribers (2 per UE sometimes) or even Hosts, etc. Tooltips on the TDF Parameter: 

Note that the “ID” is a unique ID. Please Provide the ID when reporting issues with a TDF. For TDFs that do not apply / override Parameters, but instead are just their own configuration or data or media files you won’t see TDF ID row details.

TIP: When including large files, please be aware of memory limitations, since the TDF Editor shares memory with the Client.

NOTE: The available TDF options vary. on the L3-7 | IPSec tab > IKE with RSA Settings you may only select the Certificate TDF from TAS (these are non-CSV TDFs).

In addition, where applicable, any rules for defining TDFs are included in specific Test Cases. (For example, In MME Node test case, see MME Node - Provisioning TDF.)

From the DMF Window, press Shift+Alt+A to display the  Save DMF as Tcl window. Click the Save to File button to save as Tcl file. See additional details on Using the Tcl API.

 

Select/Create a new TDF-CSV

Allows you to create a new TDF by entering a file name that doesn’t already exist or select an existing file by entering a file name that already exists.

Click to open the Select Existing or Create window.

  • Navigate to the relevant library/folder,

  • Enter the name of the file:

  • If the file name already exists, the file is selected and applied in the test case.

  • If the file name does not exist, a message displays that says you are creating a new TDF and the embedded TDF-CSV will be launched.

    • Click Yes to launch the TDF-CSV Editor and create/save the new TDF-CSV.

    • Click No to select a different file

NOTE: If you do not have permission to save in the selected library, an error displays when you try to create a new file.
TIP: You may also navigate to the relevant library/folder and select file, and click OK.

 

Upload a New TDF to TAS

Click to import a new TDF file from your local folder and select in the test Case (instead of having to go to TDF Admin).

  • Navigate to the file on your local folder and select.
  • Then navigate to the location (library) where you want to save it on the TAS. You may rename the file, if required.  

View Edit Selected TDF in TDF-CSV Editor

Available only when you have selected a TDF on TAS. Click to open the selected file in TDF-CSV Editor (in place, that is, within the Test Case).

Edit the file and save. You may also click Save As to save the edited TDF-CSV to a different library and also rename the file, if required.

NOTE: You may also select a TDF from a library to which you do not have write permissions, edit the file as required, and save (Save As) only to a different library with the same file name or a different name.

The only options available are Save As and Cancel.

Open Selected TDF in Standalone TDF-CSV Editor

Available only when you have selected a TDF on TAS. Select to retrieve the CSV file and open it in the stand alone TDF-CSV Editor.

Generate Stub TDF-CSV

TIP: Available only when a CSV specification has been defined for in the Test Case for the TDF widget ( View TDF Actions/Options Menu)

 

Opens an example context specific test data parametersexample context specific test data parameters, which you may save as a .CSV file or open in the TDF-CSV Editor.

 

Launch Standalone TDF-CSV Editor

Click to open a blank TDF-CSV Editor.

The Launch Standalone TDF-CSV editor options handles very large TDFs that may use too much Client memory if opened within the Test Case/in the embedded editor.  You may set the standalone TDF-CSV Editor memory high to edit large TDFs.

 

 

^ Back to Top


DCCA Nodal Testing

In DCCA Nodal Testing, use the Diameter IPSec checkbox to encrypt traffic between the Client Node and DCCA SUT. Define the IKE settings on the DCCA-IPSec tab.

Vendor Variant

In both DCCA Nodal and Node test cases, select the Vendor Variant from the drop-down list. Selecting Vendor Variant 1 the Vodafone Options checkbox becomes available. Selecting the Vodafone Options checkbox allows you to enter the relevant configuration parameters on the DCCA App tab in DCCA Nodal and DCCA Node test cases.

Tcl Parameter: VendorVariant

Diameter IPsec

DCCA Node Testing

The Diameter IPSec checkbox is available when the test case is set with only a Primary DCCA Node. That is, only when Re-Auth test is not None, Primary/Secondary Proxy check box is not selected, and DCCA Secondary Node is not selected.

NOTES:

  • The number of tunnels is set by the Number of Peers on the Diameter tab.

  • If Number of Peers > 4, the Diameter IPSec will be turned off and the checkbox disabled.

Affinity Mode

Select Affinity Mode to turn on performance improvement of Diameter Applications.

Significant performance impact can be achieved with Affinity Mode, especially, when running multiple test cases on the same process. A higher activation rate/throughput can be expected. 5 test cases are optimum as all cores will be used per one process on the C100 S2. Other systems may have a different number of cores per process and the recommended number of test cases should be adjusted accordingly.

NOTES:

  • Do not recommend enabling Affinity Mode when only running one test case per process.

  • All test cases running on a specific process should enable Affinity Mode.

  • A mix of Test cases with Affinity Mode on (supported) and off (not supported) may have unpredictable performance results.  

 

^ Back to Top


DCCA Server Node Testing

Vendor Variant

In both DCCA Nodal and Node test cases, select the Vendor Variant from the drop-down list. Selecting Vendor Variant 1 the Vodafone Options checkbox becomes available. Selecting the Vodafone Options checkbox allows you to enter the relevant configuration parameters on the DCCA App tab in DCCA Nodal and DCCA Node test cases.

 

Affinity Mode

Select Affinity Mode to turn on performance improvement of Diameter Applications.

Significant performance impact can be achieved with Affinity Mode, especially, when running multiple test cases on the same process. A higher activation rate/throughput can be expected. 5 test cases are optimum as all cores will be used per one process on the C100 S2. Other systems may have a different number of cores per process and the recommended number of test cases should be adjusted accordingly.

NOTES:

  • Do not recommend enabling Affinity Mode when only running one test case per process.

  • All test cases running on a specific process should enable Affinity Mode.

  • A mix of Test cases with Affinity Mode on (supported) and off (not supported) may have unpredictable performance results.  

Re-Authorization Test

Use the drop-down list to force the server node to send Re-Auth-Requests to the client for all active CC sessions. The client must respond with a Re-Auth-Answer and follow up with an update CCR for that CC session. You can define the starting time and transmission rate for the RAR messages, and choose whether the server node will respond in a positive or negative manner.

Options:

  • None — Re-Auth-Requests are only sent when the validity time expires.

  • Re-Auth — Requests are sent for all MN sessions. The server responds to update CCR messages with result code 2001, DIAMETER_SUCCESS, assuming that no other reason prevents the session from continuing.

  • Re-Auth-Reject — Requests are sent for all MN sessions. The server always responds to update CCR messages with result code 5003, DIAMETER_AUTHORIZATION_REJECTED.

Default: None

Tcl Parameter: DiaSrvCcReAuth

Re-Auth Rate

The rate at which the test attempts to deactivate any active sessions with an ASR message when the test case is stopped.

Range: 1 — Variable1

Default: 1

Tcl Parameter: DiaSrvCcAuthRate

Start Re-Auth

The number of seconds the node will wait, after all CC sessions are established, before beginning to transmit Re-Auth-Requests.

Range: 10 — 65535

Default: 10

1 Maximum rates, number of sessions, and number of emulated nodes vary depending on the test application and the test system's licensed capacity.

Tcl Parameter: DiaSrvCcAuthTime

Primary and Secondary Proxy

Use the Primary Proxy and Secondary Proxy checkboxes to indicate whether proxies will be emulated.

NOTE: The Secondary Proxy checkbox becomes available only when you select the Primary Proxy checkbox.

When you select Primary and Secondary proxy servers, Failover support is available and the settings for the secondary server emulator are enabled.

NOTE: When you select either Primary or Secondary proxy servers, the Route-Record AVP is included in the messages sent by a node.
Secondary DCCA Node

Use Secondary DCCA Node checkbox to allow definition of both the Primary and Secondary Server Nodes. See DCCA Server Node.

Failover

When the Node Configuration supports primary and secondary servers or proxies, you can enable or disable failover support. Transport layer failure on the primary node can be simulated at a time that you define. The node notifies the client whether failover is supported or not with the CC-Session-Failover AVP

Options: Not Supported or Supported

Default: Supported

Tcl Parameter: DiaSrvCcFailover

Simulated Failover

Use the drop-down list to enable failure simulation.

Options: No or Transport Loss

Default: No

Tcl Parameter: DiaSrvCcFailoverType

Start Failover

Use the drop-down list to select the simulated failure trigger.

Options:

  • Before Any Sessions Established — The node will stop responding after the Capabilities Exchange.

  • After X Sessions Established — The node will stop responding after the number of sessions provisioned in X have been established.

  • X Seconds After All Sessions Established — The node will wait for X seconds after the maximum Number of Sessions have been established and then stop responding. If all sessions are not successfully established, the failure will not be triggered.

Default: Before Any Sessions Established

Tcl Parameter: DiaSrvCcFailoverStart

Tcl Parameter: DiaSrvCcFailoverDelay

 

^ Back to Top


 

Database Query Node Testing

LDAP/Ud Select to configure the LDAP server interface Tcl Parameter : ServerMode
DNS Select to configure the DNS server interface Tcl Parameter: ServerMode

 

^ Back to Top


DHCP Server Node Testing

The DHCP Nodal test configuration allows you to select the test activities and options to set up the interfaces and nodes emulated for the message generation and measurement.

Process Broadcast DHCP Messages

Select to process broadcast DHCP messages.

Options: True/False

Tcl Parameter: ProcessBroadcastMsgEn

 

 

^ Back to Top


DRA Nodal Testing

The Diameter Routing Agent (DRA) Nodal test configuration allows you to select the test activities and options to set up the interfaces and nodes emulated for the message generation and measurement.

Affinity Mode

Select Affinity Mode to turn on performance improvement of Diameter Applications.

Significant performance impact can be achieved with Affinity Mode, especially, when running multiple test cases on the same process. A higher activation rate/throughput can be expected. 5 test cases are optimum as all cores will be used per one process on the C100 S2. Other systems may have a different number of cores per process and the recommended number of test cases should be adjusted accordingly.

NOTES:

  • Do not recommend enabling Affinity Mode when only running one test case per process.

  • All test cases running on a specific process should enable Affinity Mode.

  • A mix of Test cases with Affinity Mode on (supported) and off (not supported) may have unpredictable performance results.  

HSS Interfaces

Enable: Use to indicate whether DRA Nodal will emulate various HSS Interfaces.  When selected, LTE Version, the following nodes and interfaces are available for configuration.

Tcl Parameter: HssInterfacesEn

  • LTE Spec Version: Use to specify a release version of 3GPP specification which DRA Nodal uses for constructing or interpreting messages.

Select the required LTE Spec Version from the dropdown list.

Options: 8.10.0, 9.2.0, 10.6.0, 11.4.0, 12.10.0, 12.X.0, 13.4

Tcl Parameter: HssLteVersion

 

  • Client Interfaces: Select one or all of the available Client Interfaces: MME/SGSN, AS , CSCF, SCEF

Selecting one or more of the Client Interfaces requires you to configure MME/SGSN or AS emulated Nodes. Multiple Destination Host and Realm address is supported.

Tcl Parameter: MmeSgsnEn

Tcl Parameter: AsEn

Tcl Parameter: CscfEn

Tcl Parameter: HssScefEn

NOTE: When you Enable HSS Interfaces and select any of the Client Interfaces or the Emulated Nodes/Interfaces, you are required to provide DRA SUT address and Server Node Host/Realm address (see Network Devices > DRA Nodal Testing).

HSS

Select to indicate whether DRA Nodal emulates a HSS node and enter HSS specific configuration in the HSS interface tab.

When HSS emulation is not selected, configure HSS SUT addresses.

Tcl Parameter: HssEn

HSS On Multiple Addresses

Available when you select when multiple interfaces, that is, more than one Client Interface.

Selecting HSS On Multiple Address allows you to configure different IP addresses to be used by the emulated PCRF/HSS server for its different interfaces.  

Tcl Parameter: HssMultiAddrEn

MME/SGSN

Select for DRA Nodal to emulate a MME or a SGSN node and configure the S6a or S6d interfaces.

S6a interface is selected by default.

When MME/SGSN emulation is not selected, configure MME/SGSN SUT addresses.

Tcl Parameter: MmeSgsnNodeEn

AS I/F

Select to indicate whether DRA Nodal emulates a HSS node and AS Node and enter HSS specific configuration in the Sh and HSS interface tabs.

When HSS emulation is not selected, configure HSS SUT addresses.

Tcl Parameter: HssClnAsIf

CSCF I/F

Select to indicate whether DRA Nodal emulates a HSS node and I-CSCFG and S-CSCF Nodes and enter HSS specific configuration in the Cx and HSS interface tabs.

When HSS emulation is not selected, configure HSS SUT addresses.

Tcl Parameter: HssClnCscfIf

SCEF I/F

Select to indicate whether DRA Nodal emulates a HSS node and SCEF S6t Node and enter HSS specific configuration in the S6t and HSS interface tabs.

When HSS emulation is not selected, configure HSS SUT addresses.

Tcl Parameter: HssClnScefIf

 

NOTE: You are required to provide DRA SUT address irrespective of whether you Enable HSS Interfaces and/or select any of the Emulated nodes/interfaces.

 

PCRF Interfaces

  • Enable: Use to indicate whether DRA Nodal will emulate various PCRF and Client Interfaces.  When selected, the LTE Spec Version, PCRF Nodes and interfaces will be available for configuration

  • LTE Spec Version: Use to specify a release version of 3GPP specification which DRA Nodal uses for constructing or interpreting messages.

Select the required LTE Spec Version from the dropdown list.

Options: 8.4.0, 8.5.0, 8.6.0, 8.7.0, 8.8.0, 9.4.0, 9.5.0, 9.6.0, 9.7.0, 9.8.0, 9.9.0, 10.6.0, 10.7.0, 10.8.0, 11.4.0, 11.6.0, 12.X.0

Tcl Parameter: PcrfLteVersion

  • Client Interfaces: Select one or all of the available Client Interfaces: AGW, AF, BBERF, OCS. TDF

Selecting one or more of the Client Interfaces requires you to configure AGW, AF, BBERF , OCS and TDF emulated Nodes. Multiple Destination Host and Realm address is supported.

Tcl Parameter: AgwEn

Tcl Parameter: AfEn

Tcl Parameter: BberfEn

Tcl Parameter: OcsEn

Tcl Parameter: TdfEn

NOTE: When you Enable PCRF Interfaces and select any of the Client Interfaces or the Emulated Nodes/Interfaces, you are required to provide DRA SUT address and Server Node Host/Realm address (see Network Devices > DRA Nodal Testing).

PCRF

Select for DRA Nodal to emulate a PCRF Node and configure the PCRF interface information (QOS, PCC, Diameter, and TCP).

When not selected, configure DRA SUT address and Server Node Host/Realm.

Tcl Parameter: PcrfEn

PCRF  - Nbsf , Nnrf

Select for DRA Nodal to emulate a PCRF Node and configure the Npcf, PCF-BSF (see call flow), Nnrf Client (when Nnrf is enabled) interface information. Binding Support Function - BSF, NRF - Network Repository Function.

Available when AF I/F is enabled.

SUT is BSF SBI (with Nbsf enabled), SUT is NRF SBI (with Nnrf) - See NRF Interface for additional details.

Tcl Parameter: NpcfNbsfEn

Tcl Parameter: NrfIntfEn

PCRF On Multiple Addresses

Available when you select when multiple interfaces, that is, more than one Client Interface.

Selecting PCRF On Multiple Address allows you to configure different IP addresses to be used by the emulated PCRF/HSS server for its different interfaces.  For example, when you configure a local PCRF server to emulate both Gx and Rx interfaces at a same time, selecting PCRF On Multiple Address allows you to configure a different IP addresses for Gx and Rx (instead of the one configured for Rx interface on a same PCRF server).

Tcl Parameter: PcrfMultiAddrEn

AGW I/F

Available only when you select AGW in the Client Interfaces option.

Select to indicate whether DRA Nodal emulates AGW Node/AGW S9 Node and configure Gx or S9 interface parameters (PCC, Diameter, TCP parameters).

Gx interface is selected by default.

When AGW I/F emulation is not selected, but AGW Client Interfaces is selected, configure DRA SUT address and Server Node Host/Realm.

Tcl Parameter: AgwNodeEn

AF I/F

Available only when you select AF in the Client Interfaces option.

Select to indicate whether DRA Nodal emulates AF Node and configure Rx interface parameters (PCC, Diameter, TCP parameters).

When AF I/F emulation is not selected, but AF Client Interfaces is selected, configure DRA SUT address and Server Node Host/Realm.

Tcl Parameter: PcrfClnAfIf

BBERF I/F

Available only when you select BBERF in the Client Interfaces option.

Select to indicate whether DRA Nodal emulates BBERF Node and configure Gxc interface parameters (Diameter, TCP parameters).

When BBERF I/F emulation is not selected, but BBERF Client Interfaces is selected, configure DRA SUT address and Server Node Host/Realm.

Tcl Parameter: PcrfClnBberfIf

OCS I/F

Available only when you select OCS in the Client Interfaces option.

Select to indicate whether DRA Nodal emulates OCS Node and configure Sy interface parameters (Policy, Diameter, TCP parameters).

When OCS I/F emulation is not selected, but OCS Client Interfaces is selected, configure DRA SUT address and Server Node Host/Realm.

Tcl Parameter: PcrfClnOcsIf

TDF I/F

Available only when you select TDF in the Client Interfaces option.

Select to indicate whether DRA Nodal emulates TDF Node and configure Sd interface parameters (ADC Rules, Diameter, TCP parameters).

When TDF I/F emulation is not selected, but TDF Client Interfaces is selected, configure DRA SUT address and Server Node Host/Realm.

Tcl Parameter: PcrfClnTdfIf

 

SCEF Interfaces

Enable: Use to indicate whether DRA Nodal will emulate various SCEF Interfaces.  When selected, LTE Version, the following nodes and interfaces are available for configuration.

Tcl Parameter: ScefInterfacesEn

  • LTE Spec Version: Use to specify a release version of 3GPP specification which DRA Nodal uses for constructing or interpreting messages.

Select the required LTE Spec Version from the dropdown list.

Options: 13.1

Tcl Parameter: ScefLteVersion

 

  • Client Interfaces: Select one or all of the available Client Interfaces: MME, SGSN,

Selecting one or more of the Client Interfaces requires you to configure MME/SGSN or AS emulated Nodes. Multiple Destination Host and Realm address is supported.

Tcl Parameter: ScefMmeEn

Tcl Parameter: ScefSgsnEn

NOTE: When you Enable SCEF Interfaces and select any of the Client Interfaces or the Emulated Nodes/Interfaces, you are required to provide DRA SUT address and Server Node Host/Realm address (see Network Devices > DRA Nodal Testing).

SCEF

Select to indicate whether DRA Nodal emulates a SCEF node and enter SCEF specific configuration in the SCEF interface tab.

When HSS emulation is not selected, configure HSS SUT addresses.

Tcl Parameter: ScefScefEn

SCEF On Multiple Addresses

Available when you select when multiple interfaces, that is, more than one Client Interface.

Selecting SCEF On Multiple Address allows you to configure different IP addresses to be used by the emulated SCEF server for its different interfaces.  

Tcl Parameter: ScefMultiAddrEn

MME I/F

Select for DRA Nodal to emulate an MME and configure the T6a interface.

S6a interface is selected by default.

When MME/SGSN emulation is not selected, configure MME/SGSN SUT addresses.

Tcl Parameter: ScefClnMmeIf

SGSN I/F

Select to indicate whether DRA Nodal emulates an SGSN node and configure the T6b interface.

Tcl Parameter: ScefClnSgsnIf

OCS Interfaces

Enable: Use to indicate whether DRA Nodal will emulate the Gy OCS Interface.  When selected, LTE Version, the following nodes and interfaces are available for configuration.

Tcl Parameter: OcsInterfacesEn

  • LTE Spec Version: Use to specify a release version of 3GPP specification which DRA Nodal uses for constructing or interpreting messages.

Select the required LTE Spec Version from the dropdown list.

Options: 9.4.0, 9.5.0, 9.6.0, 9.7.0, 9.8.0, 9.9.0, 10.6.0, 10.7.0, 10.8.0, 11.4.0

Tcl Parameter: OcsLteVersion

 

  • Client Interfaces: Select one or all of the available Client Interfaces: PGW

Selecting one or more of the Client Interfaces requires you to configure PGW or AS emulated Nodes. Multiple Destination Host and Realm address is supported.

Tcl Parameter: OcsPgwEn

NOTE: When you Enable OCS Interfaces and select any of the Client Interfaces or the Emulated Nodes/Interfaces, you are required to provide DRA SUT address and Server Node Host/Realm address (see Network Devices > DRA Nodal Testing).

OCS

Select to indicate whether DRA Nodal emulates a OCS node and enter OCS specific configuration in the OCS interface tab.

When OCS emulation is not selected, configure OCS SUT addresses.

Tcl Parameter: OcsOcsEn

OCS On Multiple Addresses

Available when you select when multiple interfaces, that is, more than one Client Interface. For future use.

Selecting OCS On Multiple Address allows you to configure different IP addresses to be used by the emulated OCS server for its different interfaces.  

Tcl Parameter: OcsMultiAddrEn

PGW I/F

Select for DRA Nodal to emulate an PGW and configure the Gy interface.

S6a interface is selected by default.

When PGW emulation is not selected, configure PGW SUT addresses.

Tcl Parameter: OcsClnPgwIf

Generic (Gen) Interfaces

Enable to configure up to four Interfaces for Client or Server or both. Use the Profile Tab to add commands/Messages and fill them with AVP's from a defined AVP Database.

Tcl Parameter: GenInterfacesEn

Tcl Parameter: Gen1InterfacesEn Tcl Parameter: Gen1Name Tcl Parameter: Gen1ClnEn Tcl Parameter: Gen1SrvEn

Tcl Parameter: Gen2InterfacesEn Tcl Parameter: Gen2Name Tcl Parameter: Gen2ClnEn Tcl Parameter: Gen2SrvEn

Tcl Parameter: Gen3InterfacesEn Tcl Parameter: Gen3Name Tcl Parameter: Gen3ClnEn Tcl Parameter: Gen3SrvEn

Tcl Parameter: Gen4InterfacesEn Tcl Parameter: Gen4Name Tcl Parameter: Gen4ClnEn Tcl Parameter: Gen4SrvEn

Secondary DRA Node

Select to indicate support for DRA Node failover testing.

Tcl Parameter: SecondaryDraEn

Load Balancing

Select Load Balancing option that supports up to 50 million subscribers, only allowing tests in Proxy Mode. Currently only supported on the C100 M2 with Ultra Extreme license. This is a licensed feature.

When enabled, able to enter up to 50,000,000 subscribers on the Number of Subscribers field.

Tcl Parameter: LoadBalanceEn

Command Mode/Sequencer

The Command Mode and Sequencer options are available only when you select Secondary DRA Node, provides you have the appropriate system license.

Select Command Mode or Sequencer as required.

 

^ Back to Top


eMBMS Testing

Mode

In eMBMS Node test case, there are three emulator modes:

  • eMBMS-GW and BMSC: Emulate combined eMBMS-GW and BM-SC, the interface between eMBMS-GW and BM-SC won’t be exposed.

  • eMBMS-GW: Emulate standalone eMBMS-GW.

  • BMSC: Emulate standalone BM-SC.

Tcl Parameter : EmulatorMode

Test Activity

Capacity and Session Loading. WedDAV supported for Capacity type test only.

Synchronization Interval (Centiseconds)

Synchronization Interval is the interval that each two continuous synchronization message are transmitted.

Range: 1 to 59999

Tcl Parameter: SyncInterval

The packets delivered over M1 interface are synchronously transmitted by eNodeBs. In order to support the inter-eNodeB content synchronization, SYNC protocol layer defined between BM-SC to eNB carries additional information that enable eNodeBs to identify the timing for radio frame transmission and detect packet loss. Every packet in M1 contains the SYNC protocol information which is encapsulated at BM-SC.

Data Traffic

In eMBMS Nodal test case, Select Content Type.

Tcl Parameter : BmscContentType

If Content type = DMF, select to configure streaming IPDV measurement traffic to determine jitter and latency over M1 interface (between eNodeB and MBMS-GW).

If Content Type = WebDav, Configure FLUTE Tab and Content WEBDAV tab

Emulate Multicast Query

In eMBMS Node Test case, select to emulate Multicast Query. Set Multicast Query Interval in M1 Interface (IGMP Tab).

Not available for standalone BMSC Mode.

Tcl Parameter : EmulateMCastQueryEn

MB2

Select for the MB2 reference point between the GCS AS and the BM-SC. Available on eMBMS Node when eMBMS-GW and BMSC is enabled and on IP Application node when SIP VoIP , GM only and Capacity Test Activity are enabled.

On eMBMS Node test case , the GCS-AS SUT is enabled for input. The BMSC MB2-C Node and BMSC MB2-U Node are used for Control and User plane communication between the GCS-AS and the BM-SC. Measurements in MB2 Session, Mb2 Node and Mb2 IP Instance.

On IP Application Node test case , the MB2-BMSC SUT is enabled for input. The MB2-C Node and MB2-U Node are used for Control and User plane communication between the GCS-AS and the BM-SC. Measurements in MB2 Session, Mb2 Node and Mb2 IP Instance.

According to 3GPP TS 23.468 section 5.1.1, MB2 offers access to the MBMS bearer service from a GCS AS. MB2 carries control plane (MB2-C) and user plane (MB2-U) between GCS-AS and BM-SC.

Figure. 1 Non-roaming architecture from 3GPP TS 23.468 v15.0.0.0.

MB2 has the following properties:

  • MB2 is used by the GCS AS to interact with BM-SC for MBMS bearer management.

  • The GCS AS may use the MBMS service from multiple BM-SCs, each with a separate MB2 interface.

  • BM-SC shall provide service to multiple GCS AS (s) via a separate MB2 interface.

  • Within one PLMN, an MBMS session is supported by exactly one BM-SC and provided for only one GCS AS.

  • The data transferred via MBMS bearer (s) by the GCS AS is transparent to the BM-SC. A GCS AS may transfer data from one or multiple GCS groups via a single MBMS bearer.

  • MB2 is a standardized secured interface to an AS.

  • The GCS AS needs to be configured with the IP addresses or FQDN of the contact points of MB2-C. The MB2-C contact points needs to be configured per PLMN ID.

  • The user plane transport information (e.g. IP address/UDP port) for delivering group communication data flow from the GCS AS to the BM-SC over MB2-U shall be exchanged over MB2-C.

Tcl Parameter : Mb2En

Maximum Transmission Unit

The number of bytes at which fragmentation will take place at the bearer plane IP layer.

Range from 123 to 9300

Default = 1400

Tcl Parameter : TrafficMtu

Support Flute

Enable to support Flute. Available in eMBMS Nodal, MME Nodal and SGW Nodal test cases.

If Flute is supported, treat downlink M1 data as Flute Data and Decode it.

If Flute is NOT checked, treat downlink M1 data as RTP data and it is not decoded.

Tcl Parameter : EmbmsFluteEn

Delay Factor (ms)

Enter Delay Factor (ms) when Flute is enabled. Used to emulate the data transfer delay via air interface.

Available in eMBMS Nodal, MME Nodal and SGW Nodal test cases.

Range from 0 to 65535, Default = 0 Tcl Parameter : EmbmsDelayFactor

 

eMBMS Common Parameters

eMBMS M1/M3 Interfaces

(MME Nodal, MME Node and SGW Nodal)

eMBMS M1/M3 Interfaces is available only if your system is licensed and when Test Activity is Capacity. Available in MME Nodal, MME Node and SGW Nodal test cases.

Tcl Parameter: EmbmsEn

eMBMS - M3AP Sessions per eNodeB (MME Nodal)

Available when eMBMS M1/M3 Interfaces is enabled in MME Nodal test case.   

M3ap Sessions per eNodeB

Range: 1 - 1000 (Range depends on License and whether FLUTE is enabled. If FLUTE is enabled, maximum = 100, Non-FLUTe = 1000)

Default: 1

       Tcl Parameter: M3apSessions

eMBMS (MME Node and SGW Nodal)

Sm Sessions per MME

Available when eMBMS M3 Interface is enabled in MME Node Test case and eMBMS M1 Interface is enabled in SGW Nodal test case.

Sm Sessions per MME

 

Range: 1 - 1000

 

Default: 1

 

       Tcl Parameter: SmSessions

 

 

gNB CU NSA Nodal

Inter-CU Initial Type                                        

Available when Inter-CU Mobility Test Activity is enabled in gNB CU NSA Nodal test case. Click Settings and enter the Inter-CU Mobility settings.

Per Spec 3GPP TS 37.340 version 15.6.0 Release/section 10.5 Secondary Node Change (MN/SN initiated).

The Secondary Node Change procedure is initiated either by MN or SN and used to transfer a UE context from a source SN to a target SN and to change the SCG configuration in UE from one SN to another.

Select : MN-Initiated or SN-Initiated

  • MN initiated SN Change

  •  SN initiated SN Change

S1-MME interface with the NAS tab, F1 (F1-AP) and X2-ENB (X2-AP) become available for input. Target gNB DU Control Node , Target gNB DU User Node, (User and Control) Nodes. SUT is gNB CU (Number of Target gNB-CU SUTs)

Tcl Parameter : InitType

5GNSA-4G Mobility

In gNB CU NSA 5GNSA-4G Mobility supports 5G NSA to 4G (eNB) handover as described in spec 3GPP TS 37.340 / section 10.8 Master Node to eNB/gNB Change. You define the S1-MME interface with the NAS tab, F1 with F1-AP, X2-ENB with X2-AP and Target eNodeB Control Node, Target eNodeB User Node, (User and Control) Nodes. SUT is gNB CU (Number of Target gNB-CU SUTs). 

Click Settings to enter the 5GNSA-4G-Mobility settings.

eNB sends out SgNB Release Request when handover happens;

Path Switch Request message is sent after received SgNB Release Request Acknowledge;

Path Switch Request Acknowledge triggers UE Context Release.

Spec 3GPP TS 37.340/section 10.8 Master Node to eNB/gNB Change.

1. Dual Connectivity 5G NSA to 4G eNB -EN-DC:

 

2. Handover from Dual Connectivity 5G NSA to 5G SA :

10.8.2 MR-DC with 5GC

3. eNB/gNB to Master Node change. Per 3GPP TS 37.340/section 10.9:

Click Settings to enter the 5GNSA-4G-Mobility settings.

Section 10.9.1 EN-DC - The eNB to Master Node change procedure is used to transfer context data from a source eNB to a target MN that adds an SN during the handover:

Master eNB sends out SgNB Addition Request when handover happens;

Path Switch Request message is sent after received SgNB Addition Request Acknowledge;

Path Switch Request Acknowledge triggers UE Context Release.

gNB CU Node

NSA Mode

Select NSA Mode for the F1-AP interface between the gNB CU and gNB DU and the X2-ENB interface between the eNobeB and gNB CU. 

Interfaces F1 (F1-AP) and X2-ENB (X2-AP) become available for input. Nodes gNB CU Control Node and gNB CU User Node are available for input. Fireball is supported in NSA Node.

Tcl Parameter : GnbCuSaMode

SA Mode

Select SA Mode for gNB CU Node to emulate 5G support stand alone (SA) test, through F1-C and F1-U. Interfaces F1 (F1-AP)N2 (NGAP) and N3 (GTPU), AS-5G ( RRC, Message Editor) become available for input. Nodes N2 to AMF and N3 to UPF and AMF SUT are available for input. Fireball is not currently supported in SA Mode.

Select either 3GPP or proprietary customer Vendor 1 or proprietary customer Vendor 2, proprietary customer Vendor 3 or proprietary customer Vendor 4

These are the versions and max versions that will be allowed for Vendor 3. Any future version additions with higher values will be blocked at the OK button or Tcl Validate via GUI.

CU Node with Vendor 3 or Vendor 4 options:
   Rrc Tab - RRC max version is "16.5.0/July2021"
   Ngap Tab - NGAP max version is "16.2.0/Jul2020"

When SA Mode is selected, Enable UE Capability Enquiry on F1-AP is automatically enabled to accommodate additional security mode commands after the initial NAS exchange. For SA Mode = Vendor 2, 'UE Context Setup Request' (code 20) must be configured on F1-AP Message Editor - Json Message Editor

For SA Mode with Vendor 4 option: For Intra-DU Inter cell Handover.

In the Non Vendor 4 implementation the Transmission action indicator is included in message #3 which has to be moved to message#5 as per Vendor 4 requirements (shown below in the  code flow below). Also, the SpCell ID is not included in any of the Intra-DU Handover cases. Message #3 includes the target Cell ID in the Special Cell ID IE. Once the transmission action indicator with the value stop is received by the gNB-DU, the source cell traffic is stopped by updating with the DL Data Delivery status of the source cell DRB TEID (message #7).
Once the RRC Reconfiguration is complete, the DL Data Delivery status with the target Cell DRB TEID is sent.

Tcl Parameter : GnbCuSaModeType

E1 Interface to CU-UP

Select for E1 interface to CU-UP Node in SA Mode. When enabled, "Xn Interface" and Fireball are disabled. Only 1 PDU can be configured.

One SUT gNB CU-UP SUT can be configuredgNB CU Control Node and gNB CU-CP E1 Node, E1 Interface - E1 Ap Tab becomes available for input. E1-AP Measurements

3GPP 38.401 NG-RAN Architecture Description

3GPP 38.462 E1 Signaling

3GPP 38.463 E1AP

Limitations: 

Current E1 interface support Landslide capacity test only.

  1. Support one CU-CP to one CU-UP
  2. Limited support to gNB-CU-UP E1 Setup procedure (successful case)
  3. Limited support to E1AP Bearer Context Setup procedure (successful case)
  4. Limited support to E1AP Bearer Context Modification (gNB-CU-CP initiated) procedure (NR-RAN, PDU Session Resource To Setup List, successful case)
  5. Limited support to E1AP Bearer Context Release (gNB-CU-CP initiated)
  6. Do not support multiple PDUs per UE session. 
  7. Do not support mobility test scenarios
  8. Do not support RRC inactive
  9. Do not support PDU modification
  10. Do not support UE Configuration Updates
  11. Do not support MR-DC
  12. Do not support E1 reset, either triggered from NG reset or F1 reset

Tcl Parameter : E1ToCuUpEn

E1 Interface to CU-CP

Select for E1 interface to CU-CP Node in SA Mode.  See figure 6.1.2-1 for overall architecture and limitations for E1 Interface.

When enabled, "Xn Interface" and Fireball are disabled. Only 1 PDU can be configured.

One SUT gNB CU-CP SUT can be configuredgNB CU User Node and gNB CU-Up E1 Node, E1 Interface - E1 Ap Tab becomes available for input. E1-AP Measurements

3GPP 38.401 NG-RAN Architecture Description

3GPP 38.462 E1 Signaling

3GPP 38.463 E1AP

Tcl Parameter : E1ToCuCpEn

Xn Interface

The Xn interface connects one gNB Node to another gNb Node in NG-RAN (see figure 4.1-1 per 3GPP TS 38.300 V15.5.0); and for separation of control and data, "Xn" is further divided into 2 interfaces: "Xn-C" is for the control messages connecting gNB-CU-CP of gNB-CU nodes and "Xn-U" is for user-plane messages connecting gNB-CU-UP of gNB-CU nodes.

The Xn interface is mainly used in handover procedures for information transfer and temporary data forwarding when UE moves away from an area controlled by one gNB node (source node) to a new area controlled by a different gNB node (destination node) - See Figure 9.2.3.2.1-1: Intra-AMF/UPF Handover in 3GPP TS 38.300 V15.5.0); 

When enabled, Xn-C (Xn Ap Tab), Xn-U (GTPU Tab) , Xn SUT , gNB CU Xn Control Node and gNB CU Xn User node become available for input.

 

Tcl Parameter : XnEn

MR-DC

Select for Multi-RAT Dual Connectivity (MR-DC) to support S-NG-RAN Node addition. The S-NG-RAN Node Addition procedure is to establish the UE context and relevant resources at the S-NG-RAN node. Added support for M-NG-RAN node initiated S-NG-RAN node Release with / without keeping UE.

Available when Xn interface is enabled on the gNB CU node test case. 

When enabled, the MR DC interface becomes available for input. MN-CU SUT becomes available when gNB Mode = SN. 

The MN-CU will configure A4 event on the NR Object during the UE attach. When the NR-DC trigger timer expires, the gnb CU Nodal will report the measurement for the A4 event. 

The MN-CU will fetch the target cell ID and other contents to take actions (Ex: SCG Addition or inter-gnb handover).

 

The relationship between the PDU session and SDAP is 1:1. The PDCP and DBR is 1:1.

Spec reference : 

38.473 F1AP 16.6.0/July 2021 in F1

38.331 RRC 16.5.0/July 2021 in RRC/AS-5G

38.423 XnAp 16.6.0/July 2021 in Xn-C

Limitations : 

  • Capacity is the only supported Test Activity
  • Support for one CU Node only
  • PDU Session reconnect/ release/ modify are not supported

Tcl Parameter : GnbCuMrDcEn

Data Forwarding for Mobility

Data Forwarding for Mobility has been moved to N2|NGAP's "Direct Forwarding" checkbox with Tcl variable upgrade. Available when SA Mode is enabled. Select to support Xn HO with data forwarding.

Command Mode 

When "Command Mode" is "Enabled" and the test case is running, a "Command" button appears under the "Emulator Configuration" by the Mobile Subscribers section. 

Select to trigger Reset in Command Mode

Click the Command button on the X2-AP to execute the Reset Command.

 

gNB CU SA Nodal

Vendor Variant

Select either 3GPP or proprietary customer Vendor 1 or proprietary customer Vendor 2, proprietary customer Vendor 3, or proprietary customer Vendor 4 .

When "Vendor 3" is selected, only "15.3.0/Sep2018" and "15.7.0/Oct2019" are available under the "Version (38.473)" dropdown list under the F1 (F1-AP).

These are the versions and max versions that will be allowed for Vendor 3. Any future version additions with higher values will be blocked at the OK button or Tcl Validate via GUI.

SA Nodal with Vendor 3 option:
   Rrc Tab - RRC max version is "16.5.0/July2021"
   Nas 5G Mm - NAS-5G max version is "16.5.0/Jul2020"
   Ngap Tab - NGAP max version is "16.2.0/Jul2020"

When "Vendor 3" is selected, the intra-DU inter-cell handover message flow will be as follows : 

Note: Message 5 is changed from DL RRC Message Transfer to UE Context Modification Request, and message 5.1 (UE Context Modification Response) is added.

SA Nodal with Vendor 4 option: For Intra-DU Inter cell Handover.

In the Non Vendor 4 implementation the Transmission action indicator is included in message #3 which has to be moved to message#5 as per Vendor 4 requirements (shown below in the  code flow below). Also, the SpCell ID is not included in any of the Intra-DU Handover cases. Message #3 includes the target Cell ID in the Special Cell ID IE. Once the transmission action indicator with the value stop is received by the gNB-DU, the source cell traffic is stopped by updating with the DL Data Delivery status of the source cell DRB TEID (message #7).
Once the RRC Reconfiguration is complete, the DL Data Delivery status with the target Cell DRB TEID is sent.

Tcl Parameter: VendorVariant

Initial Network

Available when Test Activity = Inter Technology Mobility. Select Initial Network from dropdown list. Options: 5GS

Initial Network indicates where the UE will initially attach / register. 

Select the Handoff Protocol below to indicate the "Target" network.

For example: Initial Network = 5GS , Handoff Protocol = LTE (which is the Target). The UEs will initially attach / register to 5GS then handoff to LTE. 

The F2 Help key has been enhanced to indicate which network is the Target.

Tcl Parameter : InitiateType

Handoff Protocol

Available when Test Activity = Inter Technology Mobility.

When Handoff protocol = LTE, the S1-MME becomes available for input. EPS Pane is enabled.  

Options : LTE 

3GPP 23.501, 23.502, 38.413, 24.501, 33.501, 38.473, 38.331, 36.413

 O-RAN.WG5.C.1-v07.00

 

Inter RAT Handover to LTE message flow is listed below in section Handoff Type.

Tcl Parameter : HandoffProtocol

Handoff Type

Available when Test Activity = Inter Technology Mobility.

When Handoff protocol = LTE, the S1-MME becomes available for input. EPS Pane is enabled. Inter RAT Handover to LTE procedure,

Options : Handover, REG/TAU

3GPP 23.501, 23.502, 38.413, 24.501, 33.501, 38.473, 38.331, 36.413

 O-RAN.WG5.C.1-v07.00

Inter RAT Handover to LTE message flow:

Figure 6.8.1.1-1: Inter RAT Handover to LTE message flow (O-RAN.WG5.C.1-v 07.00)

5GS to EPS handover using N26 interface (23.502)

Tcl Parameter : HandoffType

AMF/SMF Node Emulation

Select for AMF/SMF Node Emulation within gNB CU SA Nodal.

SUT UPFSMF N4 Node , SMF N4 GTP Node become available for configuration.

Interface CN NAS-5G includes 2 sub-tabs: Nas 5G Sm (SM) and Nas 5G Mm (MM). 

Interface N2 includes 2 sub-tabs : (NGAP) and (SCTP)

Interface N4 (PFCP (UPF and SMF) and N4 IPSec

Tcl Parameter: AmfSmfNodeEmulationEn

UPF Node Emulation

Select for UPF emulation within gNB CU SA Nodal.

The N4 (PFCP ) and N6 (N6 Data Traffic) interfaces become available as well as UPF N3 Node, ,UPF N4 Node and UPF N4 GTP Node.

Tcl Parameter: UpfNodeEmulationEn

PGW-C Emulation

Select for PGW-C Emulation. The S2a/S2b/S5/S8 (GTPv2) interface becomes available for input. Enter the EPS Dedicated Bearers per Default.

Requires AMF/SMF Node Emulation.

Tcl Parameter: PgwCEmulationEn

PGW-U Emulation

PGW-U Emulation checkbox was added to gNB CU SA Nodal for 5G/4G mobility scenarios. Select PGW-U Emulation for UPF Node to internally allocate additional map space to accommodate multiple TEIDs (4G Uplink) per PFCP Session. 

Only available for selection when UPF Node Emulation is enabled.

Tcl Parameter: PgwUEmulationEn

N26 Interface

Select for N26 Interface - Requires AMF/SMF Node Emulation.

Additional details here - N26 Interface

Emergency Alert

Select for Emergency Alert - Requires AMF/SMF Node Emulation.

Additional details here - Emergeny Alert

N4 IPSec

Select for N4 IPSec - Requires AMF/SMF Node Emulation or UPF Node Emulation. Disabled for both together.

Disabled for N26 Interface with PGW-C Emulation.

Additional details here - N4 IPSec

 

^ Back to Top


 

LCS Testing

Slg

Selecting Slg provides the Slg interface tab in LCS Node/Nodal test cases for EPC location services between GMLC and MME.

Tcl Parameter : SlgEn

Slh  

Selecting Slh provides the Slh interface tab in LCS Node/Nodal test case for GMLC to request routing information from the HSS/HLR.

Tcl Parameter : SlhEn

Sls

Selecting Sls provides the Sls interface tab in LCS Node/Nodal and MME Node/Nodal test cases for MME to request location information from the e-SMLC.

Tcl Parameter : SLsgEn

E2

Selecting E2 provides the E2 interface tab in LCS Node and PSAP Node test cases. LCS Node test case can be used to emulate a GMLC instance and an E2 interface for interacting with an external PSAP. Per reference docs : NENA-05-001 December 2003 (NENA Standard for the Implementation of the Wireless Emergency Service Protocol E2 Interface) and J-STD-036-A - Enhanced Wireless 9-1-1 Phase 2

Tcl Parameter : E2En

 

^ Back to Top


GPRS Testing

In the GGSN Nodal test case, you can configure the test for an L2TP VPN access model with the Security Gateway checkbox. When you enable the gateway, you can define the Security Gateway node and the L2TP and PPP-L2TP tabs are added to the test case to define the L2TP tunnel and the PPP sessions within the tunnel. In this configuration, the Security Gateway is responsible for assigning IP addresses to the PDP contexts. Define an address pool on the Mobile Subscriber pane.

You can also define a GGSN LAC SUT for VPRN testing.

IMPORTANT: When testing in an L2TP VPN configuration, the PDP Type must be PPP.

Auto-Start Secondary Contexts

When auxiliary service instances are supported, you can choose to activate them immediately after the MS's main service instance is activated or activate them when they are needed by a DMF by selecting the Auto-Start Auxiliary Sessions checkbox. You can trigger service instance activation by adding event controls to your DMF. See the GPRS section below for the default DMFs that provide this capability.

By default, secondary PDP contexts are automatically activated after the associated primary context is activated. When the test includes secondary contexts, you can clear the Auto-Start Secondary Contexts checkbox and trigger activation of secondary contexts from within a DMF with event controls. Three default DMFs that trigger secondary context activation are provided in the Basic Library:

 

Network Requested Secondary PDP Context Activation  

The parameter is available when GTP Version > 0 (on the GTP tab) and Number of Secondary PDP Contexts is > 0 (on the Mobile Subscriber pane).

Type:  True/False

Default: False

Tcl Parameter: NetReqSecPdpActEn

 

Initiate Delete PDP Context

During GGSN Node testing, when you select Initiate Delete PDP Context the GGSN sends a Delete PDP Context Request to the SGSN, triggering the SGSN to release the context and tear down its tunnel with the GGSN. Upon completion, the SGSN replies with a Delete PDP Context Accept, allowing the GGSN to tear down its tunnel with the SGSN.

The Delete Timer(s) is available when you select Initiate Delete PDP Context.  The value set in this field determines how long a successful PDP session will be active before the Delete PDP Context Request is sent.

APN DNS Lookup

In GPRS testing, select the APN DNS Lookup checkbox to allow SGSNs to make a DNS query for the APN name to determine the GGSN address and forward the PDP contexts create request accordingly.

When you select the APN DNS Lookup checkbox, the APN DNS Lookup parameters on the Network Devices tab becomes available.

L2TP VPN Configuration

During GGSN Node testing, selecting L2TP VPN configuration makes the Security Gateway responsible for assigning IP addresses to PDP contexts.

QOS Updates

Use QOS Updates to change a context's address or its QOS profile with GGSN-initiated PDP context updates when you select  QOS Updates. Define update frequency and content on the QOS Update tab

 

^ Back to Top


HNB Testing

Core Network

Select  either PS Domain or CS Domain (Voice over Iuh) or PS & CS Domain

PS  Domain (Iuh interface - SM/GMM Tabs become available)

CS Domain (Iuh interface - MM/CC Tabs become available, Rtpvoice used to emulate voice traffic)

PS & CS Domain (Iuh interface - SM/GMM and MM/CC Tabs become available, Rtpvoice used to emulate voice traffic)

Auto-Start Secondary Contexts

By default, secondary PDP contexts are automatically activated after the associated primary context is activated. When the test includes secondary contexts, you can clear the Auto-Start Secondary Contexts checkbox and trigger activation of secondary contexts from within a DMF with event controls. Three default DMFs that trigger secondary context activation are provided in the Basic Library:

Activate PDP Contexts upon GMM Attach Deactivate PDP Contexts upon GMM Attach

When you select the checkbox (default setting), the test will attempt to activate the number of PDP contexts defined on the Mobile Subscribers pane after an MN successfully attaches to the SGSN SUT. When you clear the checkbox, the test will only perform attaches and detaches with the SGSN.

NOTE: When the Test Activity is Command Mode, the following are not available:

  • Activate PDP Contexts upon GMM Attach  
  • Deactivate PDP Contexts upon GMM Detach
Initial Network

Select Initial Network from the dropdown list. This option is available only when you select "Inter Macro-HNB Mobility".

Options: HNB, Macro (default)

Tcl Parameter: InitiateType

HNB GW DNS Lookup

In HNB testing, select the HNB GW DNS Lookup checkbox to allow SGSNs to make a DNS query for the DNS name to determine the GGSN address and forward the PDP contexts create request accordingly.

When you select the HNB GW DNS Lookup checkbox, the HNB GW DNS Lookup parameters on the Network Devices tab becomes available.  

HNB IPSec

You can use the HNB IPSec checkbox to encrypt control plane traffic between the UE/HNB and HNB GW.

Target HNB IPSec

The Target HNB IPSec checkbox becomes available when the Test Activity is Session Loading With Mobility or Intra-HNB GW Mobility.

3G Macro RNC Emulation

Available when Test Activity = Capacity. Enables the Iu-PS (PS Domain), Iu-CS (CS Domain) or both (PS & CS Domain) interfaces.

Support for HHO, connected mode, Intra HNB-GW mobility per 3GPP TS 25.467 (release 9)

Tcl Parameter: MacroRncEmulationEn

Perform LAU After Handoff

The Perform LAU After Handoff becomes available when the Test Activity is Session Loading With Mobility or Intra-HNB GW Mobility and CS Domain is selected.

Tcl Parameter: MobLauEn

Enter TAU Delay (ms) - Default = 1000

Tcl Parameter: MobLauDelay

Relocation Type

Relocation Type becomes available when the Test Activity is Session Loading With Mobility or Intra-HNB GW Mobility on HNB GW Nodal TC.

Also available on MSC Node and SGSN Node Test cases.

If UE Involved is selected, the Target Cell Id will be available in the id-RelocationPreparation RANAP Message.

Options: UE Not Involved or UE Involved (default)

Tcl Parameter: RelocationType

CN Involved

CN Involved becomes available when the Test Activity is Session Loading With Mobility or Intra-HNB GW Mobility.

Support for mobility with CN involved. Support for Intra-HNB in SSGN and MSC Emulator configurations.

Tcl Parameter: CnInvolvedEn

 

^ Back to Top


HSGW Nodal Testing

Initial Network

Select the Initial Network from the dropdown list. This option is available only when you select the Inter Technology Mobility as the Test Activity.

Options: CDMA, LTE

Default: CDMA

Tcl parameter: InitiateType

SGW Node Emulation Select SGW Node Emulation, available when Test Activity is Inter Technology Mobility, to enable the S11 interface between the MME SUT and the emulated  Serving Gateway. In addition, SGW GTP Node, SGW User Node and SGW MAG Node become available for configuration.

NOTE: SGW Node Emulation is available only when LMA Node Emulation is selected.

 

If you do not select SGW Node Emulation, you would need to add the SGW Node test case, which provides a way to interface/communicate with the HSGW Node via the Use IMSI as NAI User and Use APN as NAI Domain parameters (in SGW Node test case).

Optimized Handoff

Available when Test Activity is Inter Technology Mobility and LMA Node Emulation is not selected. Select to indicate Optimized Handoff from LTE to eHRPD, with Multi-PDNs and also in both Active Mode and Idle Mode (Handoff In Idle Mode).

NOTE: Optimized Handoff does not support HO from eHRPD to LTE.

 

Use the checkbox to select the Target MME S101 SUT and configure on the Network Devices tab for optimized handoff. Also configure:
  • Target SGW S103 Node between HSGW SUT and SGW Node
  • ePCF S101 Node between UE (ePCF Node) and MME SUT (Target MME S101)

Partial Context Handoff

Available (if you system is licensed for LTE) when the Test Activity is Inter Technology Mobility or Session Loading with Mobility and the Mobility Type is Inter Technology.

Tcl Parameter: PartialContextHandoffEn

NOTE: Optimized Handoff and Partial Context Handoff are mutually exclusive.

Partial Context Handoff specifies that when the UE returns to HSGW to resume the existing session, the PDN connections are created only per the existing context UE has on network. Similarly, bearers are established to match those that were available on the network. (Since the HSGW has partial context for the UE, it reduces the delay before the UE can send and receive packets.)

UE Context Maintenance timer

In HSGW Node test case, The UE Context Maintenance Timer (s) is available accessible only when you select Mobility Support as Inter-Technology.

  • The HSGW uses the UE Context Maintenance timer to track and maintain the UE partial context.
  • The value of the timer indicates the maximum number of consecutive seconds that a partial UE session context (which includes the LCP, CCP, authentication and A10 session context for a given UE) is maintained by the HSGW.
  • The value 0 indicates that the UE Context Maintenance timer is not used and consequently the UE partial context is not maintained.

NOTE: The UE Context Maintenance Timer (s) and Optimized Handoff are mutually exclusive.

IMPORTANT: Ensure the following:

  • The value of UE Context Maintenance Timer (s) is long enough to maintain the UE Context until it returns (not release the UE context before the UE returns to the eHRPD network).
  • The value of UE Context Maintenance Timer (s) on HSGW Node test case is greater than the Mobility Delay Time (HSGW Nodal | Test Conjuration | Test Options | Settings)

UE Initiates Dedicated Bearers

Available when Test Activity is Inter Technology Mobility and when Aux Srv Instances per Subscriber is > 0. The TFT Settings are only also enabled when Aux Srv Instances per Subscriber is > 0.

Vendor variant

 

Available when Test Activity is Inter Technology Mobility and Mobility is Inter-Technology in Nodal and Node test cases. Default value is None.

Handoff Mode

 

The Handoff Mode is available only when you select the Inter-HSGW as the Test Activity.

Select the handoff mode With Context Transfer or Without Context Transfer (default). Selecting the With Context Transfer radio button allows you to enter the UE Aquisition Time.

Tcl Parameter: UeAcqTime

LMA Node Emulation

 

Select LMA Node Emulation for control node availability (S2a interface). The Home Address Type and Bearer IP Address Pool on the Mobile Subscribers pane are available only when you select LMA Node Emulation. LMA Node also become available for configuration.

NOTE: When LMA Node Emulation is not selected, SGW Node Emulation and PMIPv6 Transport is not available.

 

PMIPv6 Transport

The PMIPv6 Transport dropdown list is available only when you select the LMA Node Emulation. When you select Transport as IPv4, you must enter the PMIPv6 Source Address for LMA Node.
PMIPv6 IPSec

Use the checkbox to enable IPSec encapsulation between the SGW/MAG/HSGW and LMA. Define the IPSec settings on the PMIPv6 IPSec tab.

Auto-Start Auxiliary Sessions

When auxiliary service instances are supported, you can choose to activate them immediately after the MS's main service instance is activated or activate them when they are needed by a DMF by selecting the Auto-Start Auxiliary Sessions checkbox. You can trigger service instance activation by adding event controls to your DMF. See the GPRS section below for the default DMFs that provide this capability.

By default, secondary PDP contexts are automatically activated after the associated primary context is activated. When the test includes secondary contexts, you can clear the Auto-Start Secondary Contexts checkbox and trigger activation of secondary contexts from within a DMF with event controls. Three default DMFs that trigger secondary context activation are provided in the Basic Library:

Data Forwarding

Available when Test Activity is Inter Technology Mobility and Optimized Handoff is selected (LMA Node Emulation is not selected). Select to indicate Data Forwarding is supported during Optimized Handoff from LTE to eHRPD.

Handoff In Idle Mode

Available when Test Activity is Inter Technology Mobility and Optimized Handoff is selected (LMA Node Emulation is not selected). Select to indicate Handoff In Idle Mode is supported during Optimized Handoff from LTE to eHRPD.

 

^ Back to Top


HSS Nodal Testing

Affinity Mode

Select Affinity Mode to turn on performance improvement of Diameter Applications.

Significant performance impact can be achieved with Affinity Mode, especially, when running multiple test cases on the same process. A higher activation rate/throughput can be expected. 5 test cases are optimum as all cores will be used per one process on the C100 S2. Other systems may have a different number of cores per process and the recommended number of test cases should be adjusted accordingly.

NOTES:

  • Do not recommend enabling Affinity Mode when only running one test case per process.

  • All test cases running on a specific process should enable Affinity Mode.

  • A mix of Test cases with Affinity Mode on (supported) and off (not supported) may have unpredictable performance results.  

HSS-MME/SGSN I/F   S6a Selecting S6a provides the S6a interface tab in HSS Nodal test case for authenticating/authorizing user access to the evolved system (AAA interface) between MME and HSS. Select HSS-MME/SGSN I/F and either S6a or S6d or Gr interface. Mutually exclusive with LDAP I/F. Tcl Parameter: HssIfEn Tcl Parameter: HssClnInterface
HSS-MME/SGSN I/F   S6d Selecting S6a provides the S6a interface tab in HSS Nodal test case for authenticating/authorizing user access to the evolved system (AAA interface) between SGSN and HSS. Select HSS-MME/SGSN I/F and either S6a or S6d or Gr interface. Mutually exclusive with LDAP I/F.
HSS-MME/SGSN I/F   Gr Selecting the Gr radio button provides the Gr interface tab in HSS Nodal test case to test communication between SGSN and HSS. Select HSS-MME/SGSN I/F and either S6a or S6d or Gr interface. Mutually exclusive with LDAP I/F.
HSS-IMS I/F  Sh Select to configure the Sh interface between the Application Server (AS) and the HSS. Sh interface is used for storing, retrieving and modifying user data. User profile can be enabled via Sh interface. Available when LTE Spec Version > = 11.4.0 and for Capacity Test and Session Loading Test. Mutually exclusive with LDAP I/F. Tcl Parameter: ImsIfEn Tcl Parameter: HssShEn
HSS-IMS I/F  Cx Select to configure the Cx interface between the CSCF (Call Session Control function) and the HSS. User Profile tab can be enabled via Cx interface. Available when LTE Spec Version > = 11.4.0 and for Capacity Test and Session Loading Test. Mutually exclusive with LDAP I/F. Tcl Parameter: HssCxEn
EIR I/F   S13 Select to configure S13 interface, EIR database/HSS for transfer of subscription and authentication data between MME and HSS. Available for Capacity Test and Session Loading Test. Mutually exclusive with LDAP I/F and S13'. Tcl Parameter: EirIfEn Tcl Parameter: EirClnInterface
EIR I/F  S13' Select to configure S13' interface between SGSN and EIR database/HSS for transfer of subscription and authentication data between SGSN and HSS. Available for Capacity Test and Session Loading Test. Mutually exclusive with LDAP I/F and S13.
CBC I/F  SBc Select to configure the CBC interface used for Public Warning message delivery. Available for Capacity Test and Session Loading Test. Mutually exclusive with LDAP I/F. Tcl Parameter: CbcIfEn
LDAP I/F Ud Select to configure the LDAP client interface. Mutually exclusive with all other Emulated Interfaces. Cannot enable any other interfaces when you select LDAP I/F U/D. Available for Capacity Test and Session Loading Test. Tcl Parameter: LdapIfEn
Signaling Bearer The Signaling Bearer dropdown list, available when you select the Gr radio button, indicates signaling protocols used between 2 entities for transporting SS7 messages (i.e., MAP).    
LTE Spec Version

Use to specify a release version of 3GPP specification which HSS Nodal uses for constructing or interpreting messages.

Select the required LTE Spec Version from the dropdown list.

Options: 8.10.0, 9.2.0, 10.6.0, 11.4.0, 12.10.0, 12.X.0

Tcl Parameter: LteVersion

Target Emulated Interfaces

Available when Test Activity = Mobility. Support for handover scenarios: HSS-MME/SGSN/IF.

S6a -> S6a, S6d -> S6d, Gr -> Gr, S6a -> Gr, S6a -> S6d. Mobility is not supported between S6d and Gr.

Other interfaces are disabled , except S6a, S6d and Gr, when Mobility is selected.

Options: S6a, S6d, Gr

Tcl Parameter: MobHssClnInterface

Authentication After Handoff

Tcl Parameter: AuthAfterHoEn

 

^ Back to Top


HSS Node Testing

Affinity Mode

Select Affinity Mode to turn on performance improvement of Diameter Applications.

Significant performance impact can be achieved with Affinity Mode, especially, when running multiple test cases on the same process. A higher activation rate/throughput can be expected. 5 test cases are optimum as all cores will be used per one process on the C100 S2. Other systems may have a different number of cores per process and the recommended number of test cases should be adjusted accordingly.

NOTES:

  • Do not recommend enabling Affinity Mode when only running one test case per process.

  • All test cases running on a specific process should enable Affinity Mode.

  • A mix of Test cases with Affinity Mode on (supported) and off (not supported) may have unpredictable performance results.  

S6a

Selecting S6a provides the S6a interface tab in HSS Node test case for authenticating/authorizing user access to the evolved system (AAA interface) between MME and HSS.

Tcl Parameter: HssSrvS6aEn

S6c S6c is a diameter interface that carries routing information between an HSS and an SMS-GMSC.  When an SMS message is being sent to a mobile subscriber via the SGd interface, the SMS-GMSC sends an S6c routing info request (Send-Routing-Info-for-SM-Request) to the HSS to determine on which MME the destination subscriber is registered. The HSS responds with routing information that the SMS-GMSC uses to send the SMS message towards the correct MME. The HSS determines the routing information to send using information it receives over the S6a interface (when the MME sends an Update Location Request to the HSS).   Only available when S6a interface is enabled. Support for MME SMS registration is added to the existing HSS S6a feature. In a received Update Location Request message, the emulated HSS looks for the indicators to determine if the MME is registering for SMS.  The HSS will respond with the SMS registered bit set in the ULA flags if the MME is successfully registered for SMS service.  All subscribers that are associated with the MME are registered for SMS service.  (Only one ULR request needs to contain the MME SMS registration info for all UE’s to receive SMS messages via that MME).

 

The main applicable reference specs are:

3GPP TS 29.338 (14.1.0) – this defines the Diameter based interfaces specific to SMS when used with SMS in MME architecture. This includes the S6c, SGd, and Gdd interfaces. The Gdd interface is not applicable. 3GPP TS 29.272 (15.6.0) defines the S6a interface.

   

Tcl Parameter: HssSrvS6cEn

S6d

Selecting S6d provides the S6d interface tab in HSS Node test case for authenticating/authorizing user access to the evolved system (AAA interface) between SGSN and HSS.

Tcl Parameter: HssSrvS6dEn

Gr

Selecting the Gr radio button provides the Gr interface tab in HSS Node test case to test communication between SGSN and HSS.

Tcl Parameter: HssSrvGrEn

SWx

Selecting the SWx radio button provides SWx interface between 3GPP AAA Server and HSS Node is used for transport of authentication, subscription and PDN connection related data.  

Tcl Parameter: HssSrvSwxEn

S13

Select to configure S13 interface, EIR database/HSS for transfer of subscription and authentication data between MME and HSS.

Tcl Parameter: EirSrvMmeEn

S13'

Select to configure S13' interface between SGSN and EIR database/HSS for transfer of subscription and authentication data between SGSN and HSS.

Tcl Parameter: EirSrvSgsnEn

SBc

Select to configure the CBC interface used for Public Warning message delivery.

Tcl Parameter: CbcSrvEn

CX

Select to configure the Cx interface between the CSCF (Call Session Control function) and the HSS. User Profile tab can be enabled via Cx interface. Available when LTE Spec Version > = 11.4.0

Cx Interface is also available on IMS Node test case.

Tcl Parameter: HssSrvCxEn

Sh

Select to configure the Sh interface between the Application Server (AS) and the HSS. Sh interface is used for storing, retrieving and modifying user data. User profile can be enabled via Sh interface. Available when LTE Spec Version > = 11.4.0

Tcl Parameter: HssSrvShEn

S6t

Select to configure the S6t interface used between the HSS and SCEF (Services Capability Exposure Function).  LTE Spec Version = 13.4.0 or 15.X.0. Added inter-working with S6a in release 17.4, LTE Spec Version must be > or = 15.X.0 for both S6a and S6t checkboxes to become available for interoperability testing. Command Mode is not available with S6t interface. Must enter at least one MSISDN or an External Identifier when S6t Interface is enabled.

Tcl Parameter: HssSrvS6tEn

Wx

Select to configure the Wx interface used between the HSS and 3GPP AAA. Available when LTE Spec Version = 11.2.0

Tcl Parameter: HssSrvWxEn

SLh

Select to configure the SLh interface used between HSS and GMLC.

Tcl Parameter: HssSrvSlhEn

Zh

Available when  LTE Spec Version > = 11.4.0 and <= 12.X.0.

The purpose of Zh interface is to perform the retrieval of an authentication vector and possibly GBA User Security Setting (GUSS ) from the HSS.  The reference point Zh used between the BSF and the HSS allows the BSF (Boot Strapping Function) to fetch the required authentication information and all GBA user security settings (GUSS) from the HSS. The reference point Zh is an intra-operator domain interface.

Zh interface will be introduced on top of existing diameter based implementation of IMS Cx interface as depicted in Figure 1 below.

Document

Title

 

 

3GPP TS 29.109v15

Zh and Zn interfaces  based on the Diameter protocol

3GPP TS 33.220v15

Generic Authentication Architecture; Generic Bootstrapping Architecture

3GPP TS 29.229

Cx and Dx

3GPP TS 29.228v9

IP Subsystem Cx and Dx interfaces Signalling flows and messages contents

Tcl Parameter: HssSrvZhEn

Emulate UDM (Nudm)

NRF Interface

Select to add UDM (Nudm Interface) capabilities to HSS Node to support 4G to 5G mobility including EPS fallback testing. Expose:
  • N8 to AMF
  • N10 to SMF
  • N13 to AuSF

Select to emulate UDM (Nudm)- Unified Data Management Function. Interface Nudm (Nudm NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. UDM SBI Node is available for input. Starting SUPI, Starting GPSI, IMEI, Software Version

Reference is 3GPP TS 23.632 V16.1.0

Architecture:                                                                                      Architecture for Direct UDM-HSS interworking in reference point representation:

 

Supported Procedure:

Authentication (reference section 5.2/3GPP TS 23.632 V16.1.0)

  1. authentication request coming to the UDM (from AusF) indicating that the authentication vectors needs to be generated at the HSS 
  2. authentication request coming to the HSS (MME)  indicating that the authentication vectors needs to be generated at the UDM

5GC-EPC Mobility (reference section 5.3/3GPP TS 23.632 V16.1.0) **

As defined in 3GPP TS 23.501 [2], when interworking procedures with N26 are used, the UE operates in single-registration mode. For the 3GPP access, either the AMF or the MME is registered in the HSS+UDM.

 

1. Mobility from 5GC to EPC, with N26  ( *(reference section 5.3.2/3GPP TS 23.632 V16.1.0)

Figure 5.3.2-1 shows the interaction between the HSS and UDM in an interworking scenario with N26, when the UE attaches to the EPC. 

Supported Procedure:

  • [1] The HSS receives an S6a ULR request containing the IMSI of the subscriber.
  • [2] The HSS responds to the MME with an S6a-ULA.
  • [5] UDM cancels the user registration in 5GC by sending a Nudm_UECM_DeregistrationNotification to the AMF.

Procedure [3] and [4] are not require since Landslide emulates both UDM & HSS on HSS Node.

 

2. Mobility from EPC to 5GC, with N26  (reference section 5.3.3/3GPP TS 23.632 V16.1.0) 

Figure 5.3.3-1 shows the interaction between the UDM and the HSS in an interworking scenario with N26, when the UE attaches to the 5GC. 

Supported Procedure:

  • [1] The UDM receives a Nudm_UECM_Registration request for 3GPP access containing the SUPI of the subscriber.
  • [2] The UDM responds to the AMF with a Nudm_UECM_Registration Response.
  • [3] MME sending a CLR via the S6a interface.

When NRF Interface is enabled on HSS Node, the UDM Registration to NRF procedure is performed once HSS is started . Per 3GPP TS 29.510, Section 5.2.2.2.2 (Figure 5.2.2.2.2-1 NF Instance Registration). In addition, NF Heart-Beat (Figure 5.2.2.3.2-1 NF Heart-Beat) is performed periodically after successful registration. Procedure NF Instance Deregistration ((Figure 5.2.2.4.1-1 NF Instance Deregistration) is performed during de-registration.

When NRF Interface is enabled on HSS Node, Interface Nnrf Client (NF Consumer) , SUT NRF SBI (Network Devices) and NRF SBI Node become available for input.

 

Signaling Bearer The Signaling Bearer dropdown list, available when you select the Gr radio button, indicates signaling protocols used between 2 entities for transporting SS7 messages (i.e., MAP).    
LTE Spec Version

Use to specify a release version of 3GPP specification which HSS Node uses for constructing or interpreting messages.

Select the required LTE Spec Version from the dropdown list.

Options: 8.4.08.10.0, 9.2.0, 10.6.0, 11.2.0, 11.4.0, 12.10.0, 12.X.0, 13.4.0 (S6t interface only), 15.X.0 (S6a Interface only), 16.1.0

Tcl Parameter: LteVersion

SCTP Command Mode Internal use.
Command Mode

See HSS Node Command Mode test case.

Command Mode option is not available when you select only SWx interface as the IDR and DSR commands are not applicable to the SWx interface command set.

^ Back to Top


IMS Nodal Testing

Test Activity

Select Capacity Test, Session Loading Test or Inter Technology Mobility.

Handoff Protocol

Available when Test Activity = Inter Technology Mobility. Select for E-SRVCC (Single Radio Voice Call Continuity) procedure.

New Tabs, ISC-PS and ISC-CS, are enabled for Signaling flows. AS, AS Port and AS Host become available in Network Devices as well as S-CSCF Node and ATGW Node.

The Inter-Technology Mobility Settings dialog supports "Single Handoff" only:

See Flow - Boxes with Black text is depicting PS Subscriber, Boxes with Green text is depicting the paired CS Subscriber:

       

Reference documents:

  • 3rd party registration (Call flows defined in 3GPP 24.237 A.3.3)
  • Session Origination with PS to CS SRVCC enhancements (Call flows defined in 3GPP 24.237 A.4.2)
  • eSRVCC procedure (Call flows defined in 3GPP 24.237 A.18.3)
  • IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) Service Continuity Stage 3 - TS 24.235 V15.0

This is a licensed feature.

Option = E-SRVCC

Tcl Parameter: HandoffProtocol

Core Network   

PS Domain     Mw    ISC    Mx   Ml   Generic

CS Domain     Nc

Select to either PS (Packet Switched) or CS (Circuit Switched) domain.

  • PS Domain : Enables the Mw Interface (P-CSCF Testing), ISC (S-CSCF Testing), Mx Interface (CSCF/BGCF and IBCF Testing), Ml (E-CSCF and GMLC Testing) or Generic (Generic IMS interface). Enter Generic Interface Name (see additional details below)
  • CS Domain : Enables the Nc Interface.

Tcl Parameter: MsNetwork

Generic Interface Name

Available when PS Domain Generic Interface is enabled. In IMS Nodal test case, the Generic interface allows you to configure testing of an IMS Interface. Enter the Generic Interface Name.

The Generic Interface name (If Test1 is used) will be populated on the Test Node Tab (GEN-Test1 Node), the RTP Traffic tab ( GEN-Test1 RTP Traffic), and the SIP OM tabs (e.g. GEN-Test1|Main, GEN-Test1|1xx, etc).

Enter up to 8 letters, number or '_'. The first character must be a letter.

Configure:  

The Generic Interface can used to emulate Mg and Mj interfaces for X-CSCF testing.

Mj interface uses SIP over UDP or TCP , BGCF to MGCF or MGCF to BGCF per 3GPP 23.002, 23.228, 24.229, 29.163.

Mg interface uses SIP over UDP, MGCF to I-CSCF per 3GPP 23.002, 23.228, 24.229.

Tcl Parameter: GenericName

 

^ Back to Top


IMS Node Testing

Test Activity

Indicates the Test Activity performed in IMS Node test case. Command Mode/Sequencer available.

NOTE: When Sequencer Mode is used, note that IMS Node starts executing it's sequencer commands (any commands, including sync points) when all of its configured subscribers are registered.  

 

P-CSCF Mode

 

SIP Endpoint    Proxy      B2BUA

Select to indicate whether IMS Node emulates SIP Endpoints, SIP Proxy or Back-to-Back User Agent (B2BUA).

  • SIP Endpoints: Select SIP Endpoints to emulate SIP Registrar and SIP Endpoints used to create or receive SIP messages.
  • Proxy: Select Proxy to emulate SIP Proxy to route requests as appropriate.

Selecting Proxy allows you to also select Enable Separate Registrar to receive register requests. Selecting Enable Separate Registrar ensures the REGISTER requests goes to the registrar and INVITE requests will go to proxy.

  • B2BUA: Select B2BUA (SCC-AS) to parse the 3rd Party REGISTER message (Enable 3rd Party Registration) and send back 200 OK Message. The SCC-AS is also capable of sending back a SIP MESSAGE (which provides SCC-AS related information) and is also capable of providing a B2BUA call. Currently we support: PS Registration and CS Registration with prior PS Registration, PS Calls through ISC Interface, no CS allowed and PS to CS SRVCC.

NOTE: When B2BUA is selected, the ISC SIP Message automatically includes "Provisional Response", "Reliable Provisional Response" and "Message".   

 

Tcl Parameter: ImsMode

Interface Gm   Mw   ISC   Mx  Ml

 

Select either the Gm, Mw (P-CSCF testing), ISC (S-CSCF/I-CSCF Testing), Mx Interface (CSCF/BGCF and IBCF Testing) or Ml (E-CSCF and GMLC Testing).  Additional information in IMS Nodal/Node Test Case.

Tcl Parameter: ImsInterface

I2 Interface

Select to enable the I2 interface.

Tcl Parameter: ImsNodeI2En

Mw + ISC Interface

Select for I/S-CSCF wraparound testing. Inter working between Mw and ISC interface. Used in conjunction with IMS Nodal when Test Activity = Inter Technology Mobility and Handoff Protocol = E-SRVCC.

Registration and Call in PS domain is between ATCF and I-CSCF. Registration in CS domain is between MSC and I-CSCF.

Access transfer from PS to CS is between ATCF and I-CSCF. I-CSCF will communicate with AS. Send 3rd Party Registration message.

For other messages, IMS Node (Mw+ISC) will forward messages.

ATCF SUT, MSC SUT and AS SUT become available for input.

Tcl Parameter: MwPlusIscEn

Cx Interface

Select to enable the Cx interface to add interaction between Cx flows and SIP flows.

Available when Gm Interface, SIP Endpoint or Proxy, Enable RegistrationEnable Authentication, Type = IMS AKA are enabled and Command Mode is off.

Cx SUT (HSS) become available for input. P-CSCF NodeI-CSCF HSS I/FS-CSCF HSS I/F Nodes are available for input.

CX Interface "App" sub-tabs (I-CSCF, S_CSCF) are not available for input because they are retrieved from the SIP flows. 

Tcl Parameter: HssCxEn

H.248 Interface

Available in IMS Node in Proxy mode to support a H.248 interface towards Media Gateway for back to back testing.

Interface H.248 and MGC Node become available for input.

SSC - Subscriber Session Control, SSE - Subscriber Service Edge

Tcl Parameter: H248En

Gm Retained After Handoff

If Gm retention is off then terminate 4G session (Terminate SIP dialogue, and release all resources associated with session). If GM retention is enabled, then the network side release will be accomplished.

Tcl Parameter: GmRetainedEn

Enable Preconditions

Select to indicate support for SIP Preconditions, which ensures network resources are reserved (using pre-defined reservation mechanisms before beginning a session) for a SIP session. See Call Flow Info for additional parameters.

Enable Emergency

Select to allow setting up of Emergency call flow functionality. The Emergency service requires you to define the phone number associated with Public User Identity. Configure Emergency Phone Number to Emergency Service URN Translation table for SIP Endpoints.

NOTE: The following dependencies apply when you select Enable Emergency:

  • Gm | P-Headers enabled (and greyed and you cannot change them).

  • Emulator Configuration | Enable Registration is selected and greyed

  • Emulator Configuration | Functionality Pattern is set to All Terminate (and greyed)

  • Emulator Configuration | P-CSCF Mode is set to SIP Endpoint

  • Phonebook | SIP Endpoints | Emergency Phone to Emergency service URN Translation is available for configuration.

Enable Subscription

If enabled, IMS will reply with a 200 OK for incoming "SUBSCRIBE" followed by a "NOTIFY" response to SIP subscriber. Tcl Parameter : SipSubscriptionEn

Enable Registration

Select to send a registration request from the server to a Registrar server. This is available when P-CSCF Mode is SIP Endpoints. When P-CSCF is Proxy, as registration is mandatory, this parameter is not available for selection.
  • Expires: The length of time for which the IMS registration is valid. When the time specified expires, the IMS should register again.

  • Temporary User ID: When checked, the IMSI from the PhoneBook Tab is used for Registration as Temporary User ID. Per 3GPP TS 23.238.

NOTES:

  • An IMS network element is designed to support not only UE which has IMS credential (has IMC or ISIM) but also those without IMS credential (ISIM-less, IMC-less i.e. UE supports non-3gpp access only). When a UE does not have IMS credential, the UE can create a temporary user id from its IMSI for registering with the IMS. Upon successful registration, the IMS network will provide the UE with new user/public ids for subsequent usage (i.e. making calls). New ids are stored in P-Associated-Uri of a 200-OK response of Register from IMS.
  • The landslide “Temporary User Id” check boxes are designed to simulate the functions of IMS and UE to cover the condition of no IMS credentials.

  • The checkbox on the nodal side is used for simulating UE function and the one on the node side is for the IMS function. You need to enable both sides in order for them to inter work correctly.

 

Enable Supplementary

Enables Scripting function on GM Tab - SIP Supplementary Script. SIP Supplementary script configuration is not available when IMS Node test case is in Proxy Mode. Tcl Parameter: SupplementalEn
Update Contact Header

Select to modify the Contact header of SIP response messages. Available in IMS Node. This option is enabled for Gm or Mx in SIP Endpoint mode. Per RFC 3261.

Tcl Parameter: ImsNodeUpdateContactHdrEn

Final Response Delay (ms)

Select to configure a delay (in milliseconds) before sending the final (200 OK) response to SIP INVITE request.

Range = 1 to 65535

Default value = 1 ms

Tcl Parameter: Delay2xxForInvValEn

Tcl Parameter: Delay2xxForInvVal

Rx Interface

Select Rx Interface to define the Rx interface between the PCRF and the IMS Node. See also AF Node.  The Rx Interface is available only when your system is licensed for PCRF function.

IMS APN: Enabled when you select Rx Interface. Select to allow APN information from the user, so that the AAR messages can have CalledStationID AVP to specify the APN to which the IMS belongs.

Default: APN0

Tcl Parameter: ImsApn

N5 Interface (5G)

Select N5 Interface to define the N5 interface between the PCF and an Application Function (the IMS Node).

Also available on Service Based Nodal test case when (Test PCF (Npcf)From SMF (N7) , From AF (N5)) is enabled.

Interface AF-PCF is available for input. See also AF SBI Node.  SUT is PCF SBI.

IMS APN (DDN): Enabled when you select N5 Interface. Enter the DDN.

Default: ims

Tcl Parameter: N5En

Tcl Parameter: ImsApn

Start Rx after SDP Negotiation

Select Start Rx after SDP negotiation for IMS Node to send AAR messages after SDP offer & answer have been exchanged i.e. SDP offer is sent in INVITE message and SDP Answer has been received in 183 message or 200 OK of INVITE.

Available when Mode = Proxy and Rx Interface is enabled.

Tcl Parameter: ImsNodeStartRxAfterSdpNegoEn

Call Progress after Rx Response

Available on IMS Node TC when Mode is "Proxy" and Rx Interface selected. Select for IMS Node to forward the 183 Session Progress/ 200 OK only after AAA response is received from PCRF. 

1. Call Setup progress after AAA is received.

2. Time out waiting on AAA response - The timeout interval (waiting for AAA response) is configured on Rx tab on IMS Node TC Diameter - Retry Time (ms)

3. AAA response from PCRF with Result-Code AVP set to error (e.g. 5012). IMS Node will cancel the call if AAA response has error.

Tcl Parameter: ImsNodeCallProgAfterRxRspEn

Enable NetLoc Mode

Select to enable Network Location. Available when Rx Interface is enabled. Supported in SIP Endpoint and Proxy modes, This feature requires the IMS Node to become aware of received AAA and to make decision based on UEs in AAA.   The P-CSCF suspends the SIP dialog waiting on receipt of AAA, the expiration of a timer, or the receipt of RAR, which indicates that AAA was sent from the PCRF, but not received at the P-CSCF. The P-CSCF uses the contents of AAA to determine if it should continue to wait for an ANI report in a subsequent RAR. If AAA indicates that NetLoc is not supported, then the SIP dialog is resumed; otherwise, the P-CSCF wait for RAR with ANI report or the expiration of ANI Report Timeout timer before resuming the SIP dialog.   Tcl Parameter: ImsNodeNetLocEn   ANI Report Timeout (s) Range: 0 - 60 Derfault: 30 Tcl Parameter: ImsNodeAniReportTimeout

Enable Late SDP Offer

Select to enable Late Media Support. Available for SIP Endpoint only. If enabled:
  • IMS Node will not send SDP with the INVITE message
  • IMS Node expects to receive SDP offer in 183 message
  • IMS Node will respond with SDP answer in the PRACK message
  Tcl Parameter: ImsNodeLateSdpOfferEn

Enable RTP Traffic

Select to indicate that the RTP (Real-time Transport Protocol) data traffic that supports/ carries the media streams (e.g., audio and video) and configure Gm > Media-RTP parameters.   The parameter is not available when P-CSCF Mode = Proxy.

Enable MSRP

Select Enable MSRP to configure MSRP within SIP/SDP parameters on Gm | Media | MSRP tab. After you Enable MSRP, select Send Messages on the Gm | Media | MSRP tab to define MSRP options and send messages.

Call Starts After

 Indicates when the call starts.

Options: When All Users Registered (0); When User Registered (1)

Default: When User Registered (1)

   Tcl Parameter: ImsNodeCallStart

SIP Subscriber URI Scheme

SIP Endpoint URI Scheme

Available when IMS Node is Endpoint. Select to indicate support for MSISDN based Public Identities in both Tel-URI (e.g., +972-3-7212345) and SIP-URI ([email protected]) forms:

Options: SIP-URI, tel-URI or SIPS-URI (only when GM TLS  or Mm TLS is installed)

Tcl Parameter: SipSubscriberUriScheme

Tcl Parameter: SipEndpointUriScheme

Application Servers

 

Use built-in Application servers - Used to indicate whether the test is to use "built-in" services configured on the L/S IMS node or to use external application servers from a SUT. Server Type SCC-AS - Available when Mode = B2BUA and ISC Interface is selected. Select and the Service Centralization and Continuity (SCC) panel in App Servers will become available for input. Enter ATU-STI, STN-SR and C-MSISDN.

NOTE: Currently, the use of external Application Servers is not supported

Communications Diversion - The communications Diversion check box must be checked with the CFU (call forwarding) built-in. When enabled the App Servers Tab is presented for provisioning.

Communications Barring - The communications Barring check box when enabled,  the App Servers Tab is presented for provisioning.

Service Centralization and Continuity - The Service Centralization and Continuity check box is enabled when Interface = Mw or ISC. When enabled,  the App Servers Tab is presented for provisioning. Support for call flow between ATCF and SCC AS.

Communications Waiting - The communications Waiting check box when enabled,  the App Servers Tab is presented for provisioning. Used to provision Call Waiting.

MCPTT - The MCPTT check box when enabled (IMS Mode = Proxy, Enable Supplementary), the App Servers Tab is presented for provisioning. Part of the Mission Critical Push-To-Talk (MCPTT) services.

Conference - The Conference check box when enabled,  the App Servers Tab is presented for Conference Policy provisioning.  Available when Mode = B2BUA and ISC Interface is selected.  

Communications Redirection - The communications redirection check box when enabled, the App Servers Tab is presented for provisioning. This option is enabled for Gm/Mw/ISC in Proxy Mode with Enable Supplementary. Select for IMS Node to provide redirection, i.e. will respond to initial INVITE with a 302 response.

 

Tcl Parameter: AppExternalType

Tcl Parameter: AppServerEn

Tcl Parameter: AppCommDiversionEn

Tcl Parameter: AppCommBarringEn

Tcl Parameter: AppSccEn

Tcl Parameter: AppCommWaitingEn

Tcl Parameter: AppMcpttEn

Tcl Parameter: AppConferenceEn

Tcl Parameter: AppCommRedirectEn

 

^ Back to Top


IP Application Node Testing

 

MS Transport :

  • IP/Ethernet
  • IP/PPPoE

The MS Transport protocol IP/Ethernet and IP/PPPoE requires you to configure the following:

IP/Ethernet

IP/PPPoE

 

  • A PPPoE tab displays for configuration. See also Mobile Subscriber pane | IP Application Node.

DHCP Client

Select to enable the MSs to obtain IP addresses from a DHCP server and configure the DHCP client parameters.

Data Traffic

Selecting the Data Traffic option includes the Data Traffic tab to the L3-7 protocol tab.

DHCP Relay Agent

You can emulate a DHCP Relay Agent (as described in RFC 3046) with the DHCP Relay Agent checkbox.

Select DHCP Client to enable the DHCP Relay Agent checkbox. When you select the parameter, the DHCP Relay Agent Node sub-tab is enabled for configuration along with the DHCP Relay Agent parameters on the DHCP interface tab.

In the IP Application Node test case, the MN can communicate directly with a DHCP server, or send requests through an emulated DHCP Relay Agent.

NOTE: During CSN Nodal testing, the DHCP Relay checkbox displays only when you select Simple IP Configuration from the Configuration drop-down list.

Data IPSec  

In the IP Application Node test case, data transmission begins when the client nodes are started unless you include Data IPSec. The Auto Stop Control Layer, Data Start Delay, and Traffic Start parameters are only available when IPSec and or NAS Emulation is selected on the Test Configuration tab and are not available when only Data Traffic tab is selected on the Test Configuration tab.

IPSec is always used in the PDG Micro-Mobility test case and cannot be disabled.

NAS Emulation

If your test system is also licensed for one of the AAA test applications, you can add the functionality of the AAA Server Nodal test case to the IP Application Node test case with the NAS Emulation checkbox. When you check the box, the NAS node sub-tabs are enabled, and the NAS tab is added to the test case. In the Mobile Node sub-tab, an option is available to include the MN's IP address in the Framed-IP-Address attribute.

SIP VOIP

Not available for Inter-PSDN test activity. Select to test the SIP VOIP feature which supports SIP and RTP-based Voice over in IP Application Node test case. Select either the GM or I2 interface- not both.

You are required to configure the following:

Pilot Packet

Not available for Inter-PSDN test activity. Select to indicate generation of Pilot Packets and configure the following events emulated on PCEF (PGW or HA).

  • PDN Session Establishment
  • PDN Session Teardown
  • NAT Port Chunk Allocation
  • NAT Port Chunk De-allocation
  • Reception of first user IPv4 data packet
WebDAV

Enable to Transfer the MPD to the BM-SC via WebDAV. Use the IP App Node as WebDAV Client. Use Two Tabs - Media and WebDAV Client to enter required data.

Ut Interface

Support for Ut Interface.

  • Ut interface runs over the XCAP protocol.
  • XCAP protocol runs over the HTTP1.1 protocol to modify/fetch the user specific XML data. In the Ut Interface, this data is used to enable/disable or modify supplementary services.  
  • Supplementary services are supported over the UT interface between UE and AS.

Tcl Parameter: UtEn

B-TrunC DC

Select to emulate the Dispatch Console (DC) Interface. Select for support of  D Interface between T-CN and DC which is based on SIP.

Tcl Parameter: DcInterfaceEn

DNS

Note : DnsEn variable and the DNS checkbox are no longer needed and are being removed in release 21.8. For one release cycle, if the value=true, the value will be maintained in the test case until the user edits and saves the test case. This will allow users to continue to use saved test sessions on older TSs versions. 

Select for a dedicated DMF for DNS testing. If enabled, DMF will be limited to DNS. Available when Data Traffic is enabled and Fireball is not enabled. This is a licensed feature.

See Data Message Flow - dns protocol.

Tcl Parameter: DnsEn

CSC-4 to Mission Critical CMS

Additional details located in Common section - CSC-4 to Mission Critical CMS.

MB2

Additional details located in eMBMS section - MB2.

WebRTC

Additional details located in Common section - WebRTC.

NAPT

Select for Network Address Port Translation (NAPT) functionality for SIP and RTP traffic. Only available when SIP VOIP GM is enabled.

Network topology : SIP UA <-> EDGE Router SIP's NAPT <-> (SIP over UDP) to SUT.

All SIP traffic will be routed to N (Number of ) NAPT Nodes. Enter Private IP Address for UAs in Client Test Node Parameters - Starting IP . Enter Public IP Address for UAs in NAPT Node (Auto Increase per NAPT Node). Enter Starting Public Port for UAs for each NAPT Node in Starting Global SIP Port Number in NAPT Tab.

SIP's NAPT Functionality:

  • Perform NAPT for IPv4 Source Address and UDP Source Port.
  • The same global IP Address is used for all SIP UAs behind Edge Router.
  • Different global port number is used for SIP for each SIP UA.
  • SIP header are intact. No modification to private IP address and Port number (No SIP ALG)

The following table show example of how UA will be mapped with the following settings:

  • 8 UEs,
    • 1 subscriber per UE
    • Signaling Port: 5060 (non-increase)
  • 2 NAPT Nodes
    • Starting Global IP: 10.10.40.1
    • Starting Global SIP Port: 3200

UA#

UA Private IP

UA Private Port

NAPT Node#

NAPT Node Global IP

NATP Node Global Port

1

26.0.0.1

5060

1

10.10.40.1

32000

2

26.0.0.2

5060

2

10.10.40.2

32000

3

26.0.0.3

5060

1

10.10.40.1

32001

4

26.0.0.4

5060

2

10.10.40.2

32001

5

26.0.0.5

5060

1

10.10.40.1

32002

6

26.0.0.6

5060

2

10.10.40.2

32002

7

26.0.0.7

5060

1

10.10.40.1

32003

8

26.0.0.8

5060

2

10.10.40.2

32003

 

The following table show example of how UA will be mapped with the following settings:

  • 4 UEs,
    • 2 subscriber per UE
    • Signaling Port: 5060 (auto-increase, #(N5060))
  • 2 NAPT Nodes
    • Starting Global IP: 10.10.40.1
    • Starting Global SIP Port: 3200

UA#

UA Private IP

UA Private Port

NAPT Node#

NAPT Node Global IP

NATP Node Global Port

1

26.0.0.1

5060

1

10.10.40.1

32000

2

26.0.0.1

5061

2

10.10.40.2

32000

3

26.0.0.2

5062

1

10.10.40.1

32001

4

26.0.0.2

5063

2

10.10.40.2

32001

5

26.0.0.3

5064

1

10.10.40.1

32002

6

26.0.0.3

5065

2

10.10.40.2

32002

7

26.0.0.4

5066

1

10.10.40.1

32003

8

26.0.0.4

5067

2

10.10.40.2

32003

 

Tcl Parameter: NaptEn

H248

Only available when SIP VOIP GM and NAPT are enabled in IP Application Node and IMS node (for back to back testing).

Reference : https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3525

SIP UA + SSE will be emulated by IP App Node. Interface H.248 becomes available for input. The H.248 tab is used to define the H.248 / Megaco stack (RadVision).

SSC - Subscriber Session Control, SSE - Subscriber Service Edge

The SUT is MGC SUT. The Node is MG Mgmt Node.

Tcl Parameter: H248En

Iq

Select the Iq Interface - 3GPP Reference Point between IMS-ALG and IMS-AGW. The Interface is fully described in 3GPP TS 29.334, and it is an edition of H.248 (MEGACO) protocol suited for IMS infrastructure. 

IMS-ALG or ATCF simulates MEGACO MGC functionality; while IMS-AGW or ATGW functions as MEGACO MGW. IMS-ALG controls over IMS-AGW, and IMS-AGW provides media path with NAT/NAPT capability in the middle.

The example shown below provides a flowchart for VoLTE to VoLTE call. It shows media and signaling path and Gm and Iq interaction and to show NAPT in-action.

 

Interface Iq with Tab H.248 over UDP become available for input. The H.248 tab is used to define the H.248 / Megaco stack (RadVision).

The SUT is MGC SUT. The Node is MG Mgmt Node and IMS-AGW Node.

Tcl Parameter: IqEn

 

^ Back to Top


IPV6 CN Node Testing

 

Route Optimization

Use the checkbox to simulate a CN that supports return routability and MN-CN bindings (selected), or simulate a CN that is not Mobile IPv6 compliant (cleared). When Route Optimization is enabled and successful, the CN sends packets directly to MS addresses; otherwise, the CN sends packets to MS home addresses.

Mobile IPv4 Testing

The Mobile IPv4 HA Nodal test case tests a standalone HA that you can define with the HA SUT drop-down list. Alternatively, you can enable dynamic Home Agent address resolution with the Enable Dynamic Home Agent checkbox. When this option is used, the Home Agent address in the initial RRQ is set to 0.0.0.0.

IMPORTANT: This option cannot be used when an FA node is used.

 

The Mobile IPV4 FA Nodal test case tests a standalone FA that you can define with the FA SUT drop-down list. Select the Agent Discovery check box to enable the ICMP agent discovery messages to be exchanged between the MN and FA.

NOTE: When you select the Agent Discovery check box, the IPV4 FA Nodal test will perform agent discovery message exchange even though the FA is provisioned.

 

 

The CDMA/WiFi Convergence test case can be used in a nodal configuration to test a PDIF-FA and emulate an HA or in an end-to-end configuration to test a PDIF FA and up to two HAs.

In the nodal configuration, you can include MIP IPSec to encrypt control plane traffic between the PDIF-FA and the HA node. Define the IKE settings on the MIP IPSec tab.

You can configure the test case for end-to-end testing by selecting the System Under Test radio button in the Home Agent pane. You can include a Secondary Home Agent in the test or enable Dynamic HA address resolution with the applicable checkboxes.

 

^ Back to Top


LNS Nodal Testing

The LNS Nodal test case tests one L2TP Network Server (LNS). You can select L2TP IPSec to encrypt the L2TP control plane messages between the LAC node and the LNS. Define the IKE configuration on the L2TP IPSec tab.

IMPORTANT: Whenever IPSec is used, your maximum Activation Rate is limited to 200 sessions/second.

Enable L2TP Failover

Select to enable Fail Over Extensions for Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol (L2TP) [RFC 4951]. The Alternate LNS Node is enabled and available for configuration when you select Enable L2TP Failover.

LNS Node Testing

In the LNS Node test case, you define the number of PPP sessions and L2TP tunnels that the node will support, the rates at which sessions are connected and disconnected, the server emulator, and Data Traffic options. See also LNS Node testing on the Network Devices tab.

L2TP IPSec

If your system is licensed for the L2TP Secure Network Server feature and you have defined an LAC SUT, you can use the L2TP IPSec checkbox to enable IPSec support for L2TP control plane traffic. Define the IPSec settings on the L2TP IPSec tab.

Data Traffic

Select the Data Traffic option allows LACs to forward data traffic to the LNS node, you can add Network Host functionality to the node and include DMFs that will respond to the incoming traffic. Refer to Network Host for definitions of the settings supported by the LNS node.

^ Back to Top


MME Testing

Initial Network

During MME Nodal testing, select the Initial Network from the dropdown list. This option is available only when you select the Inter Technology Mobility as the Test Activity.

Initial Network indicates where the UE will initially attach / register. 

Select the Handoff Protocol below to indicate the "Target" network.

For example: Initial Network = LTE , Handoff Protocol = UMTS (which is the Target). The UEs will initially attach / register to LTS then handoff to UMTS. 

The F2 Help key has been enhanced to indicate which network is the Target.

Options: LTE, UMTS, GPRS, eHRPD, 1xRTT, WiFi

(one of the Target Handoff Protocol options listed below)

Default: LTE

In MME Nodal TC, Inter-Tech Mobility, Gn Interface to MME with /SGWPGW Node Emulation enabled should allow Initial Network = LTE only

NOTES:

  • A message displays and the Initial Network is set to LTE, if Initial Network is selected as a Target Network such as "UMTS", when the selection is as follows on the MME Nodal Test Configuration tab:

  • The Test Activity is Inter Technology Mobility, or Session Loading with Mobility with Mobility Type = Inter Technology

  • UMTS Version = 7 , Gn Interface to MME is selected

  • SGW/PGW Node Emulation is selected

Handoff Protocol

In MME Nodal testing, the Handoff Protocol is available when Test Activity is Inter Technology Mobility, Command Mode, and Sequencer.

Tcl Parameter: HandoffProtocol

Options: UMTS (IuPS over IP, IuCS & IuPS over IP (Only available when Test Activity is Inter Technology Mobility), IuCS over IP (Not available when Test Activity is Inter Tech Mobility)) : iups_ip; iucs_ip;iucs_iups_ip

GPRS : gprs;

eHRPD : ehrpd;

1XRTT : 1xrtt

WiFi : wifi

Parameter Class: Basic: Custom Multiple Choice Values:

NAME: VALUE

Parameter Class: Basic: Boolean, T/F Values: true / false

  • For UMTS/UMTS (IuPS over IP), GPRS see UMTS Protocol Options.

  • For UMTS/UMTS (IuCS over IP), use Target Iu-CS Tab to define interface. Must enable Circuit Switched Fallback CSFB when Test Activity = Inter Technology Mobility and Handoff Protocol = UMTS (IuCS over IP).

  • For UMTS (IuCS & IuPS over IP) use Target Iu-PS and Target Iu-CS to define interfaces. When selected,  VoLTE and SRVCC are automatically enabled.

  • Dual Stack Network Host option is available when Test Activity is Inter Technology Mobility, Command Mode, and Sequencer with UMTS and GPRS. In addition, all three Home Address Type options, IPv6, IPv4, and Both are available on the Mobile subscriber pane.

  • When the Handoff Protocol is eHRPD, S2a interface testing uses IPSec protocols and an Ethernet physical layer. Use the PMIPv6 to define the interface. In addition, the following applies when eHRPD is the handoff protocol:

  • UMTS Version is not available and the Initial Network is LTE.  

  • The Optimized Handoff checkbox is available.

  • The SGW/PGW Node Emulation and Gn Interface to MME checkbox are not available.

  • When Handoff Protocol is None, Gn Interface to MME and S3 Interface to MME options are not available for selection.

  • When Handoff Protocol is 1xRTT, Circuit Switched Fallback is automatically selected to support CS fallback to 1xRTT. Configure S102 tab parameters,  1xCS IWS Node and MME S102 SUT. See also CS Fallback to 1xRTT.

  • When Handoff Protocol is WiFi, AP/SSID, AAA and SWu IPSec interfaces become available. Wifi Offload Node Emulation and ePDG Node Emulation must be disabled for Command Mode/Sequencer with Handoff Protocol is Wifi.

  • Initial Network is LTE.

  • AP Tunnel Type = NONE

  • WiFi Subscribers (on Mobile Subscribers section becomes available for input) 

NOTES:

  • When Test Option is Inter Technology Mobility, depending on the Handoff Protocol, the primary tab name corresponds to the UMTS Protocol selection and the target tab name to the interface receiving the handoff.

  • Handoff Protocol is UMTS/UMTS (IuPS over IP): Tabs displayed are S1-MME and Target Iu-PS

  • Handoff Protocol is GPRS: Tabs displayed are S1-MME and Target Gb

  • Inter Technology Mobility hands off to UMTS Iu-PS, Iu-PS/IP, Gb, or eHRPD are controlled by license and if your system is not licensed with UMTS, GPRS, or eHRPD, the options will not be visible.

See also MME Nodal Handoff Scenarios

Handoff Type

In MME Nodal testing, depending on the type of Handover test activity, the Handoff dropdown list displays different options.

  • Test Activity is Inter-technology mobility: the Handoff Type drop-down list is available for UMTS Version 7 and 8. The Options are Handover and TAU/RAU.
  • Test Activity is Intra-MME:  the Handoff Type drop-down list options are  X2, TAU/RAU and CP-CIoT-CpRelocation (available when CP-CIoT EPS Optimization Supported is enabled).
  • Test Activity is Inter-MME: the Handoff Type drop-down list options are  S1  and TAU/RAU.

In AMF Nodal (5G) testing, the type of Handover test activity supported:

  • Test Activity is Intra-AMF Mobility: the Handoff Type drop-down list options are  Xn, N2, Mobility Registration Update
  • Test Activity is Inter-AMF Mobility: the Handoff Type drop-down list options are  N2, Mobility Registration Update
  • Test Activity is Inter Technology Mobility : Handover , REG/TAU (Inter Technology Mobility)
  • Test Activity is Dual Connectivity : RAN Initiated QoS Flow Mobility

In SMF Nodal (5G) testing, the type of Handover test activity supported:

  • Test Activity is Intra-AMF Mobility: the Handoff Type drop-down list options are Xn, N2
  • Test Activity is Inter-AMF Mobility: the Handoff Type drop-down list options are Mobility Registration Update, N2
  • Test Activity is Inter Technology Mobility: the Handoff Type drop-down list options are Handover, REG/TAU

In UPF Nodal (5G) testing, the type of Handover test activity supported:

  • Test Activity is Mobility: the Handoff Type drop-down list options are  Xn

Tcl Parameter: HandoffType

NOTE: When you select TAU/RAU, the Perform TAU After Handoff checkbox is disabled.

SRVCC Handoff Type

Available when Sv Interface or SRVCC are enabled - Follow link for further details.

Perform TAU When Connected

Selecting the checkbox allows Tracking Area Update to be performed when connected.

Tcl Parameter: PeriodicTauUpdateEn

Perform TAU After Handoff

Selecting the checkbox allows Tracking Area Update to be performed immediately after the handover and enter TAU Delay in micro seconds to indicate the time before performing Tracking Area Update.

Tcl Parameter: MobTauEn

Tcl Parameter: MobTauDelay

UMTS Version

Use the drop-down list to select the UMTS version that will be used in the test.

Options:  7 or 8

Default: 7

Tcl Parameter: UmtsVersion

NOTES:

  • With version 7 a separate PDN GW Node is used to communicate with the SGSN; When the PGW is emulated with UMTS Version 7 the Gn interface must be configured.

  • With version 8 the SGW and PGW functionality is combined in the SGW Node.

UE Initiates Dedicated Bearers

In MME and gNB CU NSA testing the dedicated bearers can be established by either the UE or the PDN. Selecting the UE Initiates Dedicated Bearers, allows all the provisioned bearers be established by the UE. If not selected, the PDN will establish the dedicated bearers as needed based on the traffic activity and QOS.

  • In MME Nodal and gNB CU NSA Nodal test cases, the UE Initiates Dedicated Bearers is available only when Dedicated Bearer per Default is > 1.
  • In MME Node test case, UE Initiates Dedicated Bearers is independent of the value of Dedicated Bearer per Default or any other selection.

Tcl Parameter: UeInitBearerEn

Use Bearer Parameters From UE

In MME Node test case, Use Bearer Parameters From UE is available when you select  UE Initiates Dedicated Bearers.

Select to allow the UE Initiated Dedicated Bearers to either use the UE provided QoS value or use the Bearer parameters you configure (on Landslide).

The values defined applies only to UE initiated dedicated bearers and  not network initiated bearers.

NOTE: When Use Bearer Parameters is not selected, values you define are used for UE Initiated Dedicated Bearers regardless of what is requested by UE.

Tcl Parameter: UetBearerParamsEn

S1-MME IPSec

You can use the S1-MME IPSec checkbox to encapsulate control plane traffic between the eNodeB and MME.

The Target S1-MME IPSec checkbox is available when Test Activity is Session Loading with Mobility, Inter-MME, and Intra-MME.

In MME Nodal testing, the S1-MME IPSec is automatically disable if any of the Multiple MME parameters are selected on the Network Devices tab.

Tcl Parameter: EnbMmeIpsecEn

S1-U IPSec

In MME Nodal testing, select the S1-U IPSec option to encapsulate traffic between the eNodeB (User Plane) and the Serving Gateway (User Plane).

In HSGW Nodal testing, the S1-U IPSec option is available when Test Activity is Inter Technology Mobility. You can use the S1-U IPSec checkbox to encrypt traffic between the eNodeB and the Serving Gateway.

In gNB CU NSA Nodal testing, S1-U IPSec is not available when S1-MMS NAS (Dual Connectivity - Option)= 3a or 3x.

The Target S1-U IPSec checkbox is available when Test Activity is Session Loading with Mobility, Inter-MME, Intra-MME, Command Mode, and Sequencer.

Tcl Parameter: EnbSgwIpsecEn

S1-IPSec and  S1-U IPSec   S1/X2 IPSec

In MME Nodal testing and gNB CU NSA Nodal, you can now select a single tunnel to carry both  S1-IPSec control traffic and S1-U IPSec user traffic.

Tcl Parameter: EnbIpsecEn

In MME Nodal testing, when Test Activity is Intra-MME Mobility and the X2 Interface is selected, the S1-IPSEC checkbox is enabled and renamed to S1/X2 IPSec.

S1-IPSec

In MME Nodal testing, select the S1-IPSec option to encapsulate traffic between the eNodeB and MME, or between eNodeB (User Plane ) and the Serving Gateway (User Plane) per eNodeB. Configure parameters on S1-IPSec | S1-IPSec tab.

Also, when you select S1-IPSec, a separate Security Gateway (Network Devices | eNodeB Security Node) terminates the tunnel.

NOTE: S1-IPSec is mutually exclusive with S1-MME IPSec

 

The Target S1-IPSec checkbox is available when Test Activity is Session Loading with Mobility, Inter-MME, Intra-MME, Command Mode, and Sequencer. Configure parameters on Target S1-IPSec | Target S1-IPSec tab.

Target S1-IPSec is mutually exclusive with Target S1-MME IPSec and/or Target S1-U IPSec.

 

Control Plane SMS (Short Message Service) or SMSo5G (for 5G test cases)

Select the Control Plane SMS (Short Message Service) checkbox to enable, the device (mobile stations) to send or receive SMS messages (mobile originated or mobile terminated) selected in the SMS tab.

Since this is a licensed feature, the SMS tab will be visible only if your system is licensed for SMS.

NOTE: The SMS message is routed through MME node responsible for forwarding SMS to MSC.
  

The Control Plane SMS (Short Message Service) checkbox on the MME Nodal Test Configuration tab is not available under the following circumstances :

  • Test Activity is Inter-Technology Mobility
  • Test Activity is Session Loading With Mobility and the Mobility Type is Inter Technology
  • Command Mode and Sequencer with Handoff Protocol = 1xRTT.
  • ePDG Node emulation is enabled
  • X2 Interface is enabled
  • WiFi Handoff Type is selected.

The Control Plane SMS  (Short Message Service) checkbox on the MME Node Emulator Configuration tab is not available under the following circumstances :

  • If SGs Interface or Sv Interface or SRVCC are enabled

SMSo5G

The SMS Over 5G NAS feature provides support for sending and receiving SMS messages using 5G NAS signaling. The SMS messages are carried in 5G UL NAS Transport (UE to network) and DL NAS Transport (network to UE) messages with a payload container type of SMS. SMS is handled in the MM layer for 5G. SMS Over 5G is supported in 5G NAS version 15.2 and later.

During registration the UE indicates it is requesting SMS over NAS by including the 5GS Update Type information element in the Registration Request message. If the AMF supports SMS Over 5G NAS, it will set the SMS Allowed indicator in the 5GS Registration Result information element in the response it sends.

In the AMF Nodal test case the subscriber can originate MO SMS messages and receive MT SMS messages. Appropriate lower layer signaling (e.g. CP-Data, CP-Ack, RP-Data, etc) is performed as part of the SMS Over 5G NAS procedures. The AMF Node acts as a service center with respect to SMS messaging, it receives MO originated SMS messages and generates proper responses (CP, RP, and SMS reports if requested).  The AMF Node can generate MT messages towards a subscriber.  MO SMS messages terminate within the AMF Node, they are not forwarded to an SMSF. MT SMS messages originate within the AMF Node, they are not received from an SMSF.

The Landslide AMF Node currently does not support interworking with an SMSF.

SMS Over 5G is supported for the following types of Test Activity:  Capacity, Session Loading, Inter Technology Mobility, and Intra-AMF Mobility.

References : TS 23.040 – SMS , TS 24.501 – 5G NAS

Tcl Parameter: ShortMsgSvcEn

MMS Support

Available in MME Nodal when Control Plane SMS (Short Message Service) or Enable SMS-over-IP (on VoLTE) is enabled.

Select for MMS Load testing. The MMS Tab becomes available for input. 

Tcl Parameter: MmsDataEn

SGW/PGW Node Emulation

Select the SGW/PGW Node Emulation checkbox to enable the SGW GTP Node and PDN GW Node to emulate  Serving Gateway. As of release 17.5, the PDN GW SGi Node becomes available for input.

Tcl Parameter: SgwEmulationEn

NOTES:

  • The SGW/PGW Node Emulation checkbox is available when Vendor Variant is None.
  • When SGW/PGW Node Emulation checkbox is enabled and the UMTS Version is 7, the Gn to SGSN interface must be configured.
Same GTP-C TEID per MN on S11

Select to have the TEID on the S11 Interface be the same for all bearers per MN (PDNs per UE). Available for selection when SGW/PGW Node Emulation is enabled.

Also available on SGW Node test case - Same GTP-C TEID per MN on S11

Reference : 3GPP 29.274, Chapter 4.1 - "There shall be only one pair of TEID-C per UE over the S11 and the S4 interfaces. The same tunnel shall be shared for the control messages related to the same UE operation. A TEID-C on the S11/S4 interface shall be released after all its associated EPS bearers are deleted".

Tcl Parameter: SameGtpcTeidS11En

Load Control Information IE

Select to include the Load Control Information (LCI) IE in the Create Session Response sent to the MME. Available when SGW/PGW Node Emulation is enabled. Per 3GPP Spec 29.274 (rel 15.4.0) section 12.2.5

Tcl Parameter: LoadControlInfoIeEn

Data IPSec

Select to use IPSec to encrypt Data Traffic. Define IPSec parameters on the Data IPSec tab. The Data IPSec option is not available if Default Bearers per Session > 1.

Vendor Variant

Indicates the customer proprietary version of the application. Default value is None.

Gn Interface to MME

During MME Nodal testing, Gn Interface to MME is available only when Test Activity is Inter Technology Mobility, Handoff Protocol is UMTS (IuPS over IP) or GPRS and UMTS Version is 7. The checkbox is not available when Handoff Protocol is UMTS or eHRPD.

Tcl Parameter: GnToMmeEn

NOTE: When you select Gn Interface to MME, the Sessions Established OM pegs for each MN and supports multiple Default Bearers.

The Gn Interface to MME allows you to run a pre-release 8 Inter-Technology Mobility test and verify the operation of the Gn interface on the MME and PGW. The test uses either E-UTRAN (in case of Target = Target) or UTRAN (Target = LTE). When the mobility timer expires, the sessions will handoff between the E-UTRAN<->UTRAN until the test is stopped (assumes continuous handoffs is configured).

NOTES: The Gn Interface to MME checkbox:

Requires you to configure Gn to GGSN and Gn to MME interface

Enables PDN Gateway and MME Gn/S3 SUT and SGSN to MME GTP Node.

 

Gn Interface to SGSN

During MME Node testing, Gn Interface to SGSN is available only when Mobility is Inter-Tech, UMTS Version is 7 and Handoff Protocol is UMTS, UMTS (IuPS over IP), UMTS (IuCS over IP)or GPRS.

Tcl Parameter: GnToSgsnEn

NOTES: The Gn Interface to SGSN checkbox:

Requires you to configure Gn to SGSN interface

Enables Serving Gateway, PDN Gateway, and SGSN-Gn SUTs,  and MME S1 Node, MME GTP Node, and MME to SGSN GTP Node.

Optimized Handoff

The Optimized Handoff checkbox in MME Nodal testing is available only when Test Activity is Inter-Technology Mobility and Handoff Protocol is eHRPD.

Use the checkbox to select the SGW S103 SUT and configure the HSGW S103 Node on the Network Devices tab for optimized handoff.

Selecting Optimized Handoff allows you to configure only one eNodeB Control Node and Target HSGW Node.

The test also requires a MME-S101 SUT to be configured, which is not relevant or used in Non-Optimized configuration.

Tcl Parameter: OptimizedHandoffEn

S3 Interface to MME

During MME Nodal testing, The S3 Interface to MME checkbox is available only when Test Activity is Inter Technology Mobility, Handoff Protocol is UMTS (IuPS over IP) or GPRS and UMTS Version is 8 and Vendor Variant is NONE.

S3 Interface between MME and SGSN enables bearer information exchange for inter 3GPP access network mobility in idle and/or active mode.

Select the S3 Interface to MME checkbox to enable Direct Tunnel checkboxes.

Tcl Parameter: S3InterfaceEn

S3 Interface to SGSN

During MME Node testing, S3 Interface to SGSN is available when Mobility is None and SGW/PGW Node Emulation is not selected.

Tcl Parameter: S3EmulationEn

Circuit Switched Fallback

During MME Nodal testing, Select the Circuit Switched Fallback (CSFB) to enable the provisioning of CS-domain services. The CSFB checkbox is available when Test Activity is Inter Technology Mobility, Handoff Protocol is UMTS (luPS over IP, IuCS over IP or IuCS & IuPS over IP) or GPRS and Initial Network is LTE, or when Test Activity is Command Mode or Sequencer and Handoff Protocol is UMTS (luPS over IP) or GPRS.

Must enable Circuit Switched Fallback when Test Activity = Inter Technology Mobility and Handoff Protocol = UMTS (IuCS over IP).

During MME Node testing , the Circuit Switched Fallback (CSFB) checkbox is available when Mobility is Inter-Technology or Command Mode, or when Mobility is None and SGW/PGW Node Emulation is not selected.

The Sv Interface is used for SRVCC testing and is not available when Circuit Swift Fallback is enabled and vice versa.

If VoLTE is enabled, Circuit Switched Fallback is disabled and vice versa.

NOTE: The CSFB handoff is triggered in the idle state via a paging request from the MME or via a service request from the UE. To test UE terminated CSFB, you must configure the page to occur before the CSFB handoff timer expires. If not, the system performs a UE originated CSFB.

Landslide also supports CSFB supports UMTS Version 8 CSFB and UMTS Version 7 CSFB.

Value: True/False

Tcl parameter: EnbCsfbEn

Tcl parameter: MmeCsfbEn

DTM Support

During MME Nodal Testing, DTM (Dual Transfer Mode) Support is available when Circuit Switched Fallback is selected, Test Activity is Inter-Technology, Handoff Protocol is GPRS, and SI-AP Version is 8.7 or later

When the DTM Support is not selected the traffic data is not transferred after the session HO to GERAN.

Tcl Parameter: CsfbDTMSupportEn

Piggyback Simulation

In MME Node testing, selecting Piggyback Simulation allows the dedicated bearers to be established at the same time as the default bearer. Configure MME Node to do piggyback simulation by selecting the number of dedicated bearers you wish to establish.

The value in the Piggyback Simulation dropdown depends on the Number of Dedicated Bearers Configured. The value selected   by the Piggyback Simulation dropdown list indicates the number of Dedicated Bearers that establishes at the same time as the Default Bearer. If Number of Dedicated Bearers is 0, then all dedicated bearers will be established without piggy back simulation.

Tcl parameter: PiggybackSimulation

Direct Tunnel

During MME Nodal testing,  Direct Tunnel is available only when you select S3 Interface to MME.

Tcl parameter: DirectTunnelEn

Round Robin Handover

The Round Robin Handover checkbox is available only when the Test Activity is Inter-MME Mobility or Intra-MME Mobility or Session Loading with Mobility and the handover type is X2, S1 or TAU/RAU.

Selecting the checkbox supports executing X2, S1 and TAU/RAU1 Handovers to any number of eNBs, while UEs move back and forth between many eNBs.

Tcl Parameter: EnbRrHoSupport

Value: True / False

Default: False

HSS Interface

Available when Test Activity is Inter-MME Mobility and Session Loading with Mobility using Inter-MME  as Mobility Type, and when you select S10 Interface to MME.

In MME Node test case,

  • HSS Interface is available when you select S10 Interface to MME.
  • HSS Interface is allowed for Inter-tech mobility with CSFG (Circuit Switched Fallback) and SGs Interface as well as non-mobility configurations.
  • HSS Interface is enabled for Command Mode and Inter-Tech when Handoff Protocol = UMTS (IuCS & IuPS over IP). In this configuration, SRVCC is currently forced in a checked state. I2 and HSS Interface are enabled and can be checked.

Select HSS Interface to configure S6a interface tab parameters and HSS SUT controls (IP address, Host, Realm Port). In addition, configure the test nodes as  required, in MME Nodal test case Target MME S6a Node and in MME Node test case MME S6a Node.

Tcl Parameter: HssIfEn

VoLTE

Available when Test Activity is Capacity, Session Loading Test, Intra-MME Mobility, Inter-MME Mobility or Session Loading with Mobility when mobility type is Inter-MME, Intra-MME or Inter Technology Mobility and Handoff Protocol is not = 1xRTT or X2, ePDG node off and not UMTS (IuCS over IP).

Tcl Parameter: VolteEn

NOTES:
  • UE Initiates Dedicated Bearers is not available when VoLTE is selected during LTE Mobility test activity. That is, when you select VoLTE and test activity is Intra-MME Mobility, Inter-MME Mobility or Session Loading with Mobility when mobility type is Inter-MME or Intra-MME.
  • If VoLTE is enabled, Circuit Switched Fallback is disabled and vice versa.
  • When Session Loading test is selected, Traffic Start is restricted to "When Session Established" and "Calls Start After" to "When User Registered".

 

Select to test the IMS VoLTE feature which supports SIP and RTP-based Voice over in MME Nodal test case. You are required to configure the following:

Ut/Ub

Select for the Ut/Ub interface to NAF/BSF. The following diagram in 3GPP TS 33.804 shows the network diagram when Generic Bootstrapping Architecture (GBA) is used with the Authentication Proxy. Network Authentication Function (NAF) will be acting like AP to perform authentication between UE and AS using HTTP Digest. BootStrapping Function (BSF) will be used to prepare bootstrapped security association, which includes Bootstrapping Transaction ID (B-TID) and bootstrapping information, to be used for the authentication session over Ut interface. Bootstrapping over Ub interface is based on HTTP Digest AKA.

Type: True/False

Default: False.  

Tl Parameter: UaUbEn 

S10 Interface to MME

The S10 Interface on the MME Nodal allows handover between real MME and an emulated (Landslide) MME. You may select S10 Interface to MME when the Test Activity is Inter-MME.

Type: True/False

Default: False.  

Tcl Parameter: S10InterfaceEn 

NOTE:
  • When you select S10 Interface to MME, S10 > GTPv2 Interface becomes available.
  • If you have also select SGW/PGW Node Emulation, then S10/S11 > GTPv2 interface tab is enabled/renamed.

In MME Node test case, S10 Interface to MME is available when Mobility is None and SGW/PGW Node Emulation is not selected.

Sv Interface

In MME Nodal test case, Sv Interface allows you to indicate the SRVCC Handoff type.

NOTE: Sv Messages are used for the Inter-RAT handover from IMS based voice service over EPS to CS domain over 3GPP UTRAN/GERAN access. Currently, handover from 3GPP UTRAN/GERAN back to LTE is achieved through normal Inter-RAT handover or TAU.  

Sv Interface is available when Test Activity is Inter Technology Mobility, Handoff protocol is UMTS (IuPS Over IP) or UMTS (IuCS & Iups over IP) or GPRS, Initial Network is LTE, Handoff Type is Handover and UMTS Version is 8 on MME Nodal Test Configuration tab and the version number is  >= 10 on s1-MME| NAS / S1-AP and S3/S4 | GTPv2 tab if applicable.

When Sv Interface is selected - the SRVCC Handoff Type field is enabled

Tcl Parameter: SvHandoffType

 

When Handoff Protocol is UMTS (luPS Over IP) - SRVCC Handoff Types

With PS HO (0)

Supports SRVCC from E-UTRAN to UTRAN with PS HO - In this case, the MME deactivates the voice bearer and the voice traffic is handed over to the CS domain. At the same time, the remaining PS resources are handed over to the PS domain over 3GPP UTRAN access.

Without PS HO (1)

 

Supports SRVCC from E-UTRAN to UTRAN without PS HO - In this case, the MME deactivates the voice bearer and the voice traffic is handed over to the CS domain alone. At the end of voice handover, the remaining PS resources may be established in UTRAN when UE performs a Routing Area Update.

When Handoff Protocol is GPRS - SRVCC Handoff Types

With DTM HO (0)

Supports SRVCC from E-UTRAN to GERAN with DTM HO - In this case, the MME deactivates the voice bearer and the voice traffic is handed over to the CS domain. At the same time, the remaining PS resources are handed over to the PS domain over 3GPP GERAN access.

 

With DTM but w/o DTM HO (1)

Supports SRVCC from E-UTRAN to GERAN with DTM but without DTM HO - In this case, the MME deactivates the voice bearer and the voice traffic is handed over to the CS domain alone. At the end of voice handover, the remaining PS resources may be established in GERAN when UE performs a Routing Area Update.

Without DTM (2)

Supports SRVCC from E-UTRAN to GERAN without DTM HO - In this case, the MME deactivates the voice bearer and other GBR bearers and suspends non GBR bearers. The voice traffic is handed over to the CS domain alone.

 

In MME Node test case, Sv Interface is available when you select as follows.

On the Emulator Configuration tab   Mobility = Command Mode, Handoff Protocol = , , UMTS (luPS Over IP),Initial Network = LTE, UMTS Version = 8, Handoff Type = Handover, Or Mobility = None and S3 Interface to SGSN is selected
AND on S1-MME NAS / S1-AP Version >= 10

 

SRVCC

Select to enable SRVCC (Single Radio Voice Call Continuity). VoLTE  and SRVCC automatically enabled when Handoff Protocol = UMTS (IuCS & IuPS over IP) in MME Nodal Test Case.

Tcl Parameter: SrvccEn

NOTE: VoLTE Traffic start will be restricted to "When User Registered" for VoLTE with SRVCC.

 

See Sv Interface for further explanation.

SGs Interface

Available (in MME Nodal) only when you select Sv Interface or Circuit Switch Fallback and do not select S3 Interface to SGSN or Gn Interface to SGSN. Or when you select Short Message Service (SMS) which is available for all test configurations with the exception of Command Mode, Sequencer, Inter-Technology Mobility, Session Loading With Mobility and the Mobility Type is Inter Technology.

On MME Node, SGs interface is available for all test configurations.

Configure the SGs Interface tab parameters to define re-connection (between UE and MME).

Tcl Parameter: SgsInterfaceEn

I2 Interface

Enable the I2 Interface -  to/from the MSC to IMS for SIP portion of VoLTE calls after SRVCC handover.

I2 Control:  SIP , TCP 

Available on MME Nodal and MME Node test cases.

Available in MME Nodal only when Test Activity = Inter Technology Mobility and Handoff Protocol = GPRS or UMTS (IuPS over IP) and you select VoLTE and SRVCC and Sv Interface. 

Available in MME Node only when Mobility = Command Mode and Handoff Protocol = UMTS (IuCS and IuPS over IP) and you select SRVCC. 

MSC I2 Node becomes available for input.

Tcl Parameter: I2En

MAP-D

The MAP-D interface is used by the MSC/VLR to inform the HLR of the whereabouts of the mobile subscriber. See diagram above in I2.

Available in MME Nodal only when Test Activity = Inter Technology Mobility and Handoff Protocol = GPRS or UMTS (IuPS over IP) and you select VoLTE and SRVCC and Sv Interface. 

Interface MAP, MSC MAP Node and HLR SUT become available for input.

Tcl Parameter: MapDEn

Nc-ISUP

Available in MME Nodal and IMS Node test cases for supporting ISUP-based call handling to assist the handover of voice calls from E-UTRAN (PS domain) to UTRAN/GERAN (CS domain) in SRVCC.

Available in MME Nodal when Inter Technology Mobility test-activity for simulating handover procedure from LTE to UMTS (IuCS over IP), VoLTE, SRVCC, Sv Interface, MAP-D are enabled. NC-ISUP Interface becomes available : Control - ISUP , M3UA , SCTP as well as MSC Nc ISUP Node.

Available in IMS Node when Gm interface with Endpoint mode selected to support handover. NC-ISUP Interface becomes available : Control - ISUP AppISUP FLOW , M3UA , SCTP as well as MGCF Node.

 

The following diagram shows the component view of end-to-end call with the emphasis of non-ICS MSC server’s ISUP call handling for assisting the handover procedure from E-UTRAN to UTRAN/GERAN. The ISUP-based call handling is highlighted in red.

  • (1) Call is started between a MO and MT subscriber on LTE/E-UTRAN and anchored on IMS SCCAS
  • (2) MO subscriber moves out of LTE/E-UTRAN and into a new area UTRAN or GERAN belongs to an non-ICS MSC server
  • (3) MME send call info (i.e. STN-SR Session Transfer Number - SR) to MSC
  • (4) MSC server calls IMS uses ISUP protocol.
  • (5) IMS SCC AS accepts new call-leg and terminate old/initial call-leg

 

  

Perform the handover procedure specified in the session 6.2 of 3GPP TS 23.216:  This session 6.2 has multiple sub-sessions for various types of handover; however, our focus is on the sub-session involving CS domain.  One of the sample flows is shown below:

Specification Reference:

  • 3GPP TS 23.216: "Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC); Stage 2"
  • 3GPP TS 29.163: "Interworking between the IP Multimedia (IM) Core Network (CN) subsystem and Circuit Switched (CS) networks"
  • 3GPP TS 23.292: "IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) centralized services; Stage 2"
  • ITU Q.761-Q.764 ISDN User Part (ISUP) Protocol suite
  • IETF RFC 4666: SS7 MTP3 User Adaption Layer (M3UA).
  • 3GPP TS 23.232: "SIP-I based circuit-switched core network; Stage 2"
  • 3GPP TS 23.205: "Bearer-independent circuit-switched core network; Stage 2"

Tcl Parameter: NcIsupEn

Log eNodeB Status

In MME Nodal test case, select to ensure that the test run logs reports status of each eNodeB goes up or down.

You may use the available log, for example, to reset some values on the SUT, ignore the associated set of ALARMS, and so on. The log reports

Tcl Parameter: LogEnbStatusEn

NOTE: The log is available from about 20 seconds before a test starts, which you may call via the CLI. The log is available via the Test Results after the test completes.

 

SGW Relocation

In MME Nodal testing, the SGW Relocation checkbox is available for mobility test activities (Session Loading with Mobility,  Intra-MME Mobility, Inter-MME Mobility or Command Mode or Sequencer without 1xRTT, WiFi or ePDG Node Emulation). When selected, you are allowed to configure the Target SGW GTP Node in the Network Devices tab.

In SGW Nodal testing, the SGW Relocation checkbox is available with LTE Relay off Bearers and ( Inter Technology Mobility with UMTS Version 8, not eHRPD, not WiFi , Not SRVCC and not Inter-SGSN or not TAU/RAU Handover), or  Inter-MME Mobility or Intra-MME test activities). With these settings, you are also allowed to configure Target eNodeB User Node, Target SGSN Control Node and Target MME Control Node. When the Test Options are Inter Technology Mobility and you select the SGW Relocation checkbox, the SGSN connects to Target SGW and Direct Tunnel may be selected. The GTPv2 tab displays Target Bearer Settings with handoff settings for ULI and QOS.

Tcl Parameter: SgwRelocationEn

ePCF Node Emulation

Available Test Activity is Inter-Technology Mobility and Handoff is eHRPD (if licensed for eHRPD Handoff Protocol).  

Select ePCF Node Emulation to configure RP Interface parameters, Target ePCF Node and HSGW SUT.

Tcl Parameter: EpcfEmulationEn

When you select ePCF Node Emulation and if the number of Default Bearers is > 1, CDMA TFT Settings is available for configuration.  

NOTES:

  • ePCF Node Emulation only supports a maximum of 7 Default Bearers.
  • When you select ePCF Node Emulation, Optimized Handoff is not available for selection.

  • When you select ePCF Node Emulation, Dedicated Bearer per Default is set to 0 on the Mobile Subscribers pane (in MME Nodal test case).

LMA Node Emulation

Available when you select ePCF Node Emulation.

Select LMA Node Emulation for control node availability (S2a interface). The Bearer IP Address Pool on the Mobile Subscribers pane are available only when you select LMA Node Emulation.

Tcl Parameter: LmaNodeEn

NOTE: When LMA Node Emulation is not selected, PMIPv6 IPSec and PMIPv6 Transport are not available.

In MME Nodal test case, the eHRPD Handoff required you to configure Target HSGW SUT, LMA Node (emulated PDN GW) and Target ePCF Node on the Network Devices tab.

Cell Change Mode

Available when Test Activity is Inter Technology, the Handoff Protocol is eHRPD and either "ePCF Node Emulation" is checked or "optimized Handoff" is not checked. MME nodal will decide to initiate S1 Release procedure during Handover from LTE to eHRPD based on Cell change mode selection. When Cell Change Mode = Reselect, eNB will not initiate S1 release procedure (eNB will not send S1 ue context release request to MME)   When Cell Change Mode = Redirect, eNB will initiate S1 release procedure (eNB will send S1 ue context release request to MME and set the cause of ue context release to interrat-redirection).   Options: Reselect (default) or Redirect Tcl Parameter: CellChangeMode

PMIPv6 Transport

The PMIPv6 Transport is available only when you select the LMA Node Emulation. When you select Transport as IPv4, you must enter the PMIPv6 Source Address for LMA Node. Tcl Parameter: PmipTransport
PMIPv6 IPSec

Available only when you select the LMA Node Emulation.

Select to enable IPSec encapsulation between the UE/ePCF, HSGW and LMA Node (PDN GW). Define the IPSec settings on the PMIPv6 IPSec tab.

Tcl Parameter: LmaPmip6IpSecEn

X2 Interface

 

Available in MME Nodal test case, when Test Activity is Intra-MME Mobility and Handoff Type is X2.

Tcl Parameter: X2IfEn

AP Tunnel Type

Available when Handoff Protocol = WiFi and Test Activity = Inter Technology Mobility.  Used to support for WLAN AP emulation for Wi-Fi Calling test.

None indicated no tunnel between Access point and WOGW.

 ePDG Node Emulation  

 

ePDG Node Emulation is available only if your system is licensed and when Test Activity is Command Mode or Sequencer. When you select ePDG Node Emulation, you are required to configure the PGW S2b  SUT and Target ePDG Control and User Nodes on the Network Devices tab and GTPv2 tab on the S2b interface.

When you select ePDG Node Emulation, S2b interface is available.

Tcl Parameter: EpdgNodeEn

SWm Interface

SWm Interface is enabled when ePDG Node Emulation is enabled.

LCS Support

 

Reset UE Positioning Stored Info

Selecting LCS Support provides the Sls interface tab in MME Node/Nodal test cases for MME to request location information from the e-SMLC.

Available only when S1-AP Version is greater than 9.4.

LCS Support is now available in the 5G AMF Nodal , gNB CU SA Nodaland AMF Node test cases. Currently, we support UE Based and UE assisted A-GNSS method. If TDF file is used, only the A-GNSS related parameters need to be configured.

  • When enabled in AMF Nodal/gNB CU SA Nodal, the LCS Interface with LPP Tab is available for input.
  • When enabled in AMF Node, the LMF Interface with LPP Tab is available for input.

If Reset UE Positioning Stored Info is enabled (Per TS38.509 6.6.1), “NRPPa” command is triggered with the following messages;  

  • Reset UE positioning stored Info” message with NAS-PDU: 0x0f8800;

              Protocol discriminator: 1111  

              Skip indicator: 0000 = No indication of selected PLMN (0)

              Message type: Reset UE Positioning Stored Information (0x88)

              UE Position Technology: 0000 0000 = AGNSS (0)

  • e-CID Measurement Initiation with NRPPa-PDU

 

If Reset UE Positioning Stored Info is disabled, “NRPPa” command is triggered with the following message;

  • e-CID Measurement Initiation with NRPPa-PDU

Tcl Parameter: LcsEn

Tcl Parameter: LcsRstUePosInfoEn

S1-Flex (MME Pooling)

Selecting to send Service Request to specific MMEs (up to 10 MMEs) at a specific rate under the S1-Flex Configuration.  

Available in MME Nodal when Test Activity = Command Mode/Sequencer and Handoff Protocol = None. Disabled when ePDG Node Emulation is enabled.  Available in MME Node when Mobility = None.

This feature enables the Multiple SUTs selection on the Network Devices Tab/Systems Under Test/MME tab.  Enter the number of MME's In Network Devices - Number of SUTs.  

Tcl Parameter: MmePoolingEn

B-TrunC

Available only when S1-AP Version is = 10.5.0 or 10.6.0 or 11.1.0 and Test Activity = Capacity. Also available when Test Activity = Inter-MME Mobility and Handoff Type = S1.

Select for support of LTE based Broadband Trunking Communication (B-TrunC).

B-TrunC is mutually exclusive with VoLTE and SGW/PGW Node Emulation.   

Tcl Parameter: BtruncEn

Wifi Offload Node Emulation

Available only when Test Activity = Command Mode or Sequencer.

Select for support of WLAN AP emulation for Wi-Fi Calling test in Command Mode and Sequencer.

Enables AP Tunnel Type, WiFi Subscribers, Handover for OnDemandCommand, AP-WAN Node, SWu IPSec Tab, AP/SSID Tab on MME Nodal Test.

Tcl Parameter: WifiNodeEn

Init From Target eNodeB

Available on MME Nodal only when Test Activity = Inter-MME Mobility , Intra-MME Mobility, or Session Loading with Mobility where Mobility Type = Inter-MME or Intra-MME.

Select to disable the Source gNodeB to allow the simulation of mobility scenario's where the UE attaches to the 4G cell and then moves to the 5G cell.

Tcl Parameter: InitFromTargetEnbEn

 

ProSe

PC3/PC8/Ub

Available on MME Nodal.

In the Proximity-based Services (ProSe) network, PC3 is the reference point between the UE and ProSe Function. PC8 is the reference point between the UE and ProSe Key Management Function. The following diagram is from TS 33.303.

The SUT is ProSe Fn/BSF. Interface PC3 PC8 becomes available for input. Tabs PC3 PC8 APP, Ub App, PC3 PC8 Flows, Ub Flows.

 

Tcl Parameter: Pc3Pc8UbClnEn

 

NOTE: In MME Node test case, Mobility Command Mode is used to test the Command Mode options in MME Nodal Test Case.

 

Emergency PDNs

Available in MME and SGW Nodal test cases.

Indicates support for IMS Emergency Session (Emergency PDN) and is available if your system is licensed.

When enabled the Emergency PDN feature allows you to specify a subset of the UEs to be designated as emergency callers and may be identified by contiguous or non-contiguous IMSIs.

Note : "Enable 2-Way Live Audio Bridging" and "Emergency PDN Index" require separate licenses. If you are not licensed for both options, you will see a GUI tooltip for the checkboxes which includes a separate line : "Mutually exclusive with ..." referring to each other.

  • Emergency PDN Index: Select Emergency PDN Index and enter a value between 1 and 10 to indicate number of Default Bearers designated as emergency callers. Maximum value depends on the Default Bearers you select.

Type: True/False

Default: False

Tcl Parameters:

EmergencyPdnIndexEn

EmergencyPdnIndex

Range 0 - 10

Default: 0

NOTE: The value entered cannot be equal to or greater than the number of default bearers. In addition, Emergency PDN Index is not available when Test Activity is Command Mode.
 
  • Emergency Attach with IMEI: Select to indicate that emergency attach with International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI).

Type: True/False

Default: False

Tcl Parameter: EmergencyAttachWithImeiEn

  • Reattach with GUTI: Select to indicate that emergency reattach with Globally Unique Temporary UE Identity (GUTI).

Type: True/False

Default: False

Tcl Parameter: EmergencyReattachWithGutiEn

 
  • Emergency Attach Without Authentication: In SGW Nodal test case, use to the selection to indicate no authentication is required during emergency attach.

Type: True/False

Default: False

Tcl Parameter: EmergencyAttachWoAuthEn

 
  • Enable E911 Call Preemption: Available when Default Bearers per Session is > 1, VoLTE is enabled and Test Activity = Capacity or Command Mode/Sequencer. In SGW Nodal test case, select for preemption of 911 call over normal VoLTE call. When enabled a new tab called E911 VoLTE is enabled for 911 Call setup. All Tcl Variables for the E911 VoLTE tab begin with Ve911.

At the moment the user dials 911, LTE Bearer resources may have been pre-occupied by non-emergency services like VoLTE, Tethering service, or any other ones. The bearer resources allocated for non-emergency services are released to make the 911 call successful.

A general diagram of E911 Preemption is shown in Figure below: We assume two APNs with conventional names ims and sos.

Configuration setup tips:

  • Two IMS Nodes must be used. One Node for Normal Call (ims APN) and another for Emergency Call (sos APN).
  • PDN Connect Delay/PDN Activation Rate is used to trigger the time in which the 911 call is started which preempts the normal call.
  • If POLQA/PEVQ is configured, it will be applied to both calls (Normal and E911).
  • Functionality Pattern on E911 VoLTE is set to "All Originate".
  • IMS Node Type is always "Remote".
  • Phonebook - SIP Subscribers - Enter Emergency Phone Number to Emergency Service URN Translation.
  • The Measurement statistics on SGW Nodal are prepared Per Bearer on the S11 Tab and Per APN (ims and sos) on the GM Tab.

Type: True/False

Default: False

Tcl Parameter: E911CallPreemptEn

2-Way Live Audio Bridging

Available in MME Nodal test case when VoLTE is enabled, Default Bearers per Session > 1 and Test Activity is Capacity, Command Mode or Sequencer.

Enable 2-Way Live Audio Bridging for :

  • E911 2-Way Live Audio Bridging (Normal PDN + E911 PDN) (Tester talks to PSAP - Public-Safety Access Point Operator)
  • Normal 2-Way Live Audio Bridging (Normal PDN + Normal PDN)  (Tester talks to Operator)

Emulate: 

  • Originate side of CALL/1 (EPC to Tester)
  • Originate side of CALL/2  (EPC to PSAP Operator if E911 or just Operator if Normal PDN)

The minimal MME Nodal configuration consists of 2 subscribers, one calling the TESTER and another one to call PSAP operator. Multiple groups can be also created.

  1. The Tester will access the Landslide system which consists of the MME Nodal Test Session suited for 2-Way Live Audio Bridging Operations. (this checkbox)
  2. The MME Nodal as Subscriber1/APN0 makes a call towards the Tester.  
  3. Subscriber 2 will communicate with Operator(P-SAP) or an Operator if (Normal PDN Testing) 
  4. Subscriber 1 (Regular VOLTE) will be "Terminate UE". 
  5. Subscriber 2 (E911 PDN or Normal PDN) ) will be "Originate UE". 
  6. MME NODAL, will connect with Operator on one call leg and with 911 operator with other call leg. 
  7. MME Nodal will copy SDP from Operator and send INVITE towards. 
  8. MME Nodal will function as Media Bridge (Audio for now) between two PDNs (between Tester and Operator)

The following Calls notations used to describe this feature are : 

  • CALL/1  : MME Nodal' USER/A calling TESTER over normal PDN (APN/0).
  • CALL/2 :  USER/A is calling PSAP Operator via E-911 PDN (APN/1) or Operator via Normal PDN (APN/1)

Note : One audio codec is used for both sides (CALL/1 and CALL/2). 

  • The codec negotiated in CALL/1 procedure is used as the only codec being negotiated in CALL/2.

Signalling and Voice Data Flow Diagram : 

When 2-Way Live Audio Bridging and Emergency PDNs are both enabled, a second VoLTE tab labeled E911 VoLTE becomes available for input. 

When 2-Way Live Audio Bridging is enabled but Emergency PDNs is not enabled, a second VoLTE tab labeled VoLTE 2 becomes available for input.

Note : "Enable 2-Way Live Audio Bridging" and "Emergency PDN Index" require separate licenses. If you are not licensed for both options, you will see a GUI tooltip for the checkboxes which includes a separate line : "Mutually exclusive with ..." referring to each other.

APN Statistics are reported for Gm and L5-7 | Voice labeled "Totals / APN-0 / APN-1".

 

Tcl Parameter: Live2WayEn

MME Node

Mobility

In MME Node test cases, the options available are None, Inter-MMME, Intra-MME, Inter-Tech, and Command Mode.

The parameters descriptions are the same as those described above for MME Nodal test case.

Tcl Parameter: MobilityType

SGd Interface

Select the SGd Interface to communicate with an SMS-IWMSC or SMS-GMSC.  In the MME Node test case the SGd interface acts like the SGs interface – in that an SMS received over the NAS control plane (from an eNodeB) can be forwarded to the SMS-IWMSC over the SGd interface. 

SGd interface is a diameter interface that carries SMS messages between an MME and an SMS entity.  

An MME SGd Node tab also becomes active in the node definition section.

Tcl Parameter: SgdInterfaceEn

S102 Interface

Select to enable configuring S102 tab.

Tcl Parameter: S102InterfaceEn

APN DNS Lookup

Select to enable support for NAPTR Queries - Disabled if SGW/PGW Node Emulation is enabled.

Tcl Parameter: ApnDnsEn

ESMLC Node Emulation

Select to enable Emulate ESMLC server for Location Services.

Tcl Parameter: EsmlcServerEn

Slg Interface

Available when LCS Support is enabled. Selecting SLg Interface provides the Slg interface tab in MME Node for EPC location services between GMLC and MME.

Tcl Parameter: SlgEn

DC Interface

Select to emulate the Dispatch Console (DC) Interface (part of LTE based Broadband Trunking Communication (B-TrunC). Select for support of  D Interface between T-CN and DC which is based on SIP.

Available only when S1-AP Version is = 10.5.0 or 10.6.0 or 11.1.0 and B-TrunC is enabled.

Tcl Parameter: DcInterfaceEn

N26 Interface The N26 interface provides a reference point between Access and Mobility Management function (AMF) and the Mobility Management Entity function (MME). The S11/N26 (GTPv2) interface becomes available for input. Enter AMF N26 SUT. Available on AMF Node and MME Node test cases. Tcl Parameter: N26En
SBc Interface

Select for Warning Message Transmission procedure for EWTS test in MME Node. The CBC SUT and MME SBc Node become available for input.

Use the HSS Node test case to generate ETWS message via SBc Interface and MME Node will forward the message to the S1 Interface.

The S1-AP Warning Message Transmission Procedure is not available for input.

Tcl Parameter: SbcIfEn

 

T-ADS (Terminating Access Domain Selection) Information (MME Node and SGW Nodal)

Include Homogeneous IMS Voice over PS Sessions

Available when the HSS Interface is enabled.

If this option is selected, the HSS will include "Homogeneous-Support-of-IMS-Voice-Over-Ps-Sessions" AVP in Update-Location-Request (ULR) message to HSS. It is supported homogeneously in all TAs or RAs in the serving node.

Tcl Parameter: ImsVoiceOverPsSessionsEn

Include T-ADS Data Retrieval

Available when the HSS Interface is enabled.

If this option is selected, the HSS will include "Support-Features" AVP with bit 27 (T-ADS Data Retrieval) set in Update-Location-Request (ULR) message to HSS. Indicates the MMe/SGSN supports IMS Voice Over PS Sessions Data Retrieval.

When receiving "Insert-Subscriber-Data-Request (IDR") from HSS with" IDR-Flags" AVP bit 1 (T-ADS Data Request) set, the HSS shall include

"IMS-Voice-Over-PS-Sessions-Supported" AVP, "Rat-Type" AVP, and "Last-UE-Activity-Time" AVP in Insert-Subscriber-Data-Answer (IDA) message response.  

Tcl Parameter: TadsDataRetrievalEn

 

MSC Nodal / MSC Node

SGs Interface

SGs interface between MSC and MME. 

Available in MSC Nodal and MSC Node test cases.

Tcl Parameter: MscInterface

Gs Interface

Select to enable interface between SGSN and the MSc (VLR). Uses BSSAP+ protocol. The interface allows paging and station availability when it performs data transfer.

Available in MSC Nodal and MSC Node test cases.

Iu-CS

Enable the Voice over Iuh (Iu-CS) interface between RNC and MSC. When enabled, Number of MMEs is not available.

Available in MSC Node test case.

SGd

SGd interface between MSC and MME. SGd interface is a diameter interface that carries SMS messages between an MME and an SMS entity.  The SMS entity involved depends on the direction of the SMS.  When an SMS message is being sent to a mobile subscriber via the SGd interface, a SMS-GMSC sends a Diameter MT-Forward Short Message request (TFR) to the MME.

Reference : 3GPP TS 29.338.

SGd is mutually exclusive with Gs and/or Iu-CS but can be enabled with SGs.

Available in MSC Node test case.

Tcl Parameter: SgdEn

Mobility Support

Select Intra-MSC for the Target Iu-CS interface to become available.

Available in MSC Node test case.

Options: None or Intra-MSC

Tcl Parameter: MobilityType

Validate IMEIs and IMSIs

Available when Iu-CS is enabled. Enable to validate IMEIs and IMSIs.

Available in MSC Node test case.

Tcl Parameter: ValidateImeiImsiEn

UMTS Version

Available when Iu-CS is enabled. Select UMTS version. Options = 4,6,7,8. Default = 4.

Available in MSC Node test case.

Tcl Parameter: UmtsVersion

Intra-HNB GW

Available when Mobility Support Intra-MSC is enabled. When enabled, Target RNC SUT in Network Devices is not available.

Available in MSC Node test case.

Tcl Parameter: IntraHnbGwEn

Short Message Service

When enabled, the SMS becomes available for input on the SGs interface between MSC and MME. 

Available in MSC Nodal test case.

Tcl Parameter: SmsEn

 


Non 3GPP Access GW Node

Emulator Mode   N3IWF   TWIF   AGF

Select either Non-3GPP Interworking function (N3IWF) or Trusted WLAN Interworking Function (TWIF) or AGF (Access Gateway Function),  emulator mode. 

N3IWF provides the N2 (NGAP) , N3/N9 (GTPU Tab) and NWu (NWu IPSec) interfaces and N3IWF Node. See below.

TWIF provides the  NAS-5G (NAS-5G SM , MM), AAA (RADIUS), AP/SSIDGRE,

DHCP Relay Agent interfaces and TWIF Node, DHCP Relay Agent Node

AGF provides the PPP, N2 (NGAP) and  N3/N9 (GTPU Tab) interfaces and AGF Node

5G System Architecture: Reference : TS 23.501, 23.502, 24.502

AGF :

N2 to AMF The N2 interface to AMF is always enabled. AMF N2 Node SUT and N2 to AMF Node are available for input. For Non-3GPP InterWorking to route messages outside of 5G RAN.
  • N2 - NGAP  (over SCTP).

Tcl Parameter: N2ToAmfEn

N3 to UPF The N3/N9 interface to UPF is always enabled. UPF N3 Node SUT and N3 to UPF Node are available for input. For Non-3GPP InterWorking to route messages outside of 5G RAN. Tcl Parameter: N3ToUpfEn

Network Host Testing

Client Transport

  • IP/Ethernet
  • IP/PPPoE
Select the Transport protocol as IP/Ethernet or IP/PPPoE.

Depending on your selection the following options are available for configuration on the Mobile Subscriber pane:

Physical Interface, Number of Nodes, Starting IP Address, Mac Address, Default Routing address, Next Hop Address, and Outbound Traffic Port.

Dual Stack

Use the Dual Stack checkbox to enable the Network Host to operate concurrent IPv4 and IPv6 stacks. This displays the IPv4 and IPv6 nodes that must be configured. Define the IPv4/IPv6 stacks on the Network Host Node pane.

Not available when Client Transport is IP/PPPoE.

Rx Interface

Select Rx Interface to define the Rx interface between the PCRF and the Network Host. See also AF Node.  The Rx Interface is available only when you your system is licensed for PCRF function. See the parameter to be configured on the Mobile Subscriber pane when you select Rx Interface.

Data IPSec

Select to use IPSec to encrypt Data Traffic. Define IPSec parameters on the Data IPSec tab.

 


OFCS Nodal Testing

Affinity Mode

Select Affinity Mode to turn on performance improvement of Diameter Applications.

Significant performance impact can be achieved with Affinity Mode, especially, when running multiple test cases on the same process. A higher activation rate/throughput can be expected. 5 test cases are optimum as all cores will be used per one process on the C100 S2. Other systems may have a different number of cores per process and the recommended number of test cases should be adjusted accordingly.

NOTES:

  • Do not recommend enabling Affinity Mode when only running one test case per process.

  • All test cases running on a specific process should enable Affinity Mode.

  • A mix of Test cases with Affinity Mode on (supported) and off (not supported) may have unpredictable performance results.  

Node Functionality - PGW  SGW

In OFCS Nodal Testing, select PGW and/or SGW to simulate diameter accounting request via the Rf Interface to OFCS Node.

Tcl Parameter: PgwNodeEn

Tcl Parameter: SgwNodeEn

OFCS Node Testing

LTE Release

Indicates the 3GPP LTE Spec Release version. Select the as required:

Option: R10, R11

Default: R11

 

Affinity Mode

Select Affinity Mode to turn on performance improvement of Diameter Applications.

Significant performance impact can be achieved with Affinity Mode, especially, when running multiple test cases on the same process. A higher activation rate/throughput can be expected. 5 test cases are optimum as all cores will be used per one process on the C100 S2. Other systems may have a different number of cores per process and the recommended number of test cases should be adjusted accordingly.

NOTES:

  • Do not recommend enabling Affinity Mode when only running one test case per process.

  • All test cases running on a specific process should enable Affinity Mode.

  • A mix of Test cases with Affinity Mode on (supported) and off (not supported) may have unpredictable performance results.  

Diameter IPSec

In OFCS Node Testing, use the Diameter IPSec checkbox to encrypt traffic between the OFCS Node and PDN Gw and/or Srv GW SUTs. Define the IKE settings on the IPSec tab.

Tcl Parameter: DiaSrvIpSecEn

NOTE: For OFCS Node testing, if the Number of Peers on the Diameter tab is > 1, the Diameter IPSec is disabled and if selected, de-selected.

Multiple SUT Types

Select Multiple SUT Types to report separate statistics SGW and PGW. Separate statistics helps monitor PGW and SGW individually within the same test session. For example, per Rating Group monitoring, available for PGW only, is more helpful than per Bearer for PGW monitoring.

Tcl Parameter: MultipleNodesEn

Secondary OFCS Node

Use Secondary OFCS Node to allow definition of both the Primary and Secondary Server Nodes to simulate Communication Loss Failover. See also OFCS Node. This is part of the Command Mode License feature.

Tcl Parameter: SecondaryOfcsEn

Command Mode

  • Off
  • Enabled
  • Sequencer

In OFCS Node testing, select Enabled to indicate Command Mode selection or select Sequencer. By default the Command Mode selection is Off.

Select Command Mode Enabled to indicate that the test runs/executes in the Command Mode, where you can configure for Failover Recovery.

Failover Simulation

Available when Secondary OFCS Node is enabled.

When the Node Configuration supports primary and secondary servers or proxies, you can enable or disable failover support. Transport layer failure on the primary node can be simulated at a time that you define. The node notifies the client whether failover is supported or not with the CC-Session-Failover AVP

Options: Not Supported or Supported

Default: Supported

Tcl Parameter: DiaSrvCcFailover

Simulate Failover

Use the drop-down list to enable failure simulation.

Options: No , Communication Loss, Transport Loss

Default: No

Tcl Parameter: DiaSrvCcFailoverType

Duration

 

Indicates the length for time for which the failover simulation process is active. After the specified time expires, the failover simulation process stops.

Range: 0 to 100000

Default: 1000

Tcl Parameter: DiaSrvCcFailoverDuration

Start Failover

Use the drop-down list to select the simulated failure trigger.

Options:

  • Before Any Sessions Established — The node will stop responding after the Capabilities Exchange.

  • After X Sessions Established — The node will stop responding after the number of sessions provisioned in X have been established.

  • X Seconds After All Sessions Established — The node will wait for X seconds after the maximum Number of Sessions have been established and then stop responding. If all sessions are not successfully established, the failure will not be triggered.

Default: Before Any Sessions Established

X: Indicates either the number of Sessions or number of seconds depending on your selection of Start Failover.

The parameter is available when you select Secondary OFCS Node, Simulate Failover is not No and Start Failover is not Before Any Sessions Established.

Range is 1 - 400000

Default: 1

Tcl Parameter: DiaSrvCcFailoverDelay

Tcl Parameter: DiaSrvCcFailoverDelay

 

^ Back to Top


OCS Node Testing

LTE Release

Indicates the 3GPP LTE Spec Release version. Select the as required:

Option: R9, R10, R11

Default: R11

Type of AVP included in the RAR message depends on the LTE Release version you select. See OCS App tab.

Affinity Mode

Select Affinity Mode to turn on performance improvement of Diameter Applications.

Significant performance impact can be achieved with Affinity Mode, especially, when running multiple test cases on the same process. A higher activation rate/throughput can be expected. 5 test cases are optimum as all cores will be used per one process on the C100 S2. Other systems may have a different number of cores per process and the recommended number of test cases should be adjusted accordingly.

NOTES:

  • Do not recommend enabling Affinity Mode when only running one test case per process.

  • All test cases running on a specific process should enable Affinity Mode.

  • A mix of Test cases with Affinity Mode on (supported) and off (not supported) may have unpredictable performance results.  

Re-Authorization Test

Use the drop-down list to force the OCS node to send Re-Auth-Requests to the client for all active CC sessions. The client must respond with a Re-Auth-Answer and follow up with an update CCR for that CC session. You can define the starting time and transmission rate for the RAR messages, and choose whether the server node will respond in a positive or negative manner.

Options:

  • None — Re-Auth-Requests are only sent when the validity time expires.

  • Re-Auth — Requests are sent for all MN sessions. The server responds to update CCR messages with result code 2001, DIAMETER_SUCCESS, assuming that no other reason prevents the session from continuing.

  • Re-Auth-Reject — Requests are sent for all MN sessions. The server always responds to update CCR messages with result code 5003, DIAMETER_AUTHORIZATION_REJECTED.

Default: None

Re-Auth Rate

The rate at which the test attempts to deactivate any active sessions with an ASR message when the test case is stopped.

Range: 1 — Variable1

Default: 1

Start Re-Auth

The number of seconds the node will wait, after all CC sessions are established, before beginning to transmit Re-Auth-Requests.

Range: 10 — 65535

Default: 10

1 Maximum rates, number of sessions, and number of emulated nodes vary depending on the test application and the test system's licensed capacity.

Primary Proxy

Secondary Proxy

Use the Primary Proxy and Secondary Proxy checkboxes to indicate whether proxies will be emulated.

NOTE: The Secondary Proxy checkbox becomes available only when you select the Primary Proxy checkbox.

When you select Primary and Secondary proxy servers, Failover support (simulate Transport Loss failover) is available and the settings for the secondary server emulator are enabled.

NOTE: When you select either Primary or Secondary proxy servers, the Route-Record AVP is included in the messages sent by a Node.

Secondary OCS Node

Use Secondary OCS Node to allow definition of both the Primary and Secondary Server Nodes to simulate Communication Loss Failover. See also OCS Node.

Ro Diameter IPSec

In OCS Node Testing, use the Diameter IPSec checkbox to encrypt traffic between the OCS Node and PDN GW SUT. Define the IKE settings on the IPSec tab.

Tcl Parameter: DiaSrvIpSecEn

NOTE: For OCS Node testing, if the Number of Peers on the Diameter tab is > 1, the Diameter IPSec is disabled and if selected, de-selected.

 

Sy Interface

The Sy Interface between OCS Node and PCRF supports the Spending-Status-Notification-Request/Answer (SNR/SNA) message, and allows you to:

  • Report policy counter status values for a subscriber to your PCRF
  • Report policy counter status changes to your PCRF.

Tcl Parameter: DiaSrvSyEn

Sy Linked with Ro

Select to enable Sy link with Ro interface.

Tcl Parameter: DiaSrvSyLinkedToRoEn

Command Mode

  • Off
  • Enabled
  • Sequencer

In OCS Node testing, select Enabled to indicate Command Mode selection or select Sequencer. By default the Command Mode selection is Off.

Select Command Mode Enabled to indicate that the test runs/executes in the Command Mode, where all Rating Group IDs and Service Ids associated with Multiple Services Credit Control are inactive and you manually configure values using the on-demand Command interface.  

^ Back to Top


PCRF Testing

LTE Spec Version

Select the required LTE Spec Version from the dropdown list.

Options: 8.4.0, 8.5.0, 8.6.0, 8.7.0, 8.8.0, 9.4.0, 9.5.0, 9.6.0, 9.7.0, 9.8.0, 9.9.0, 10.6.0, 10.7.0, 10.8.0, 11.4.0, 11.6.0, 12.X.0 (Node only)

Tcl Parameter: LteVersion

  • LTE Spec versions 8.4.0: M-bit flag is set for the ARP related QOS AVPs (ARP, Pre-emption-Capability, and Pre-emption-Vulnerability).
  • LTE Spec version 8.5.0 - 8.8.0: Only the V-bit flag is set and M-bit flag is cleared for the ARP related QOS AVPs (ARP, Pre-emption-Capability, and Pre-emption-Vulnerability).
  • LTE Spec version 9.4.0: Only the V-bit flag is set and M-bit flag is cleared for the Flow-Information AVPs. 
Affinity Mode

Select Affinity Mode to turn on performance improvement of Diameter Applications.

Significant performance impact can be achieved with Affinity Mode, especially, when running multiple test cases on the same process. A higher activation rate/throughput can be expected. 5 test cases are optimum as all cores will be used per one process on the C100 S2. Other systems may have a different number of cores per process and the recommended number of test cases should be adjusted accordingly.

NOTES:

  • Do not recommend enabling Affinity Mode when only running one test case per process.

  • All test cases running on a specific process should enable Affinity Mode.

  • A mix of Test cases with Affinity Mode on (supported) and off (not supported) may have unpredictable performance results.  

Roaming Select to enable the S9 tab and configure Diameter and TCP parameters.  Also enable AGW I/F | Gx to configure PCC Rules parameters.  Allows you to test the S9 interface between the emulated H-PCRF and V-PCRF. (See also PCRF Testing).
AGW I/F Use the AGW I/F checkbox to define Ty Diameter, Gx, or R3 (Diameter) interface to the PCRF. See also AGW Node
AF I/F

Use the AF I/F checkbox to define the Tx and Rx interface to the PCRF. See also AF Node.  AF/IF check box is available only when you select AGW I/F check box with Ty Diameter or GX radio buttons.

In PCRF Node testing, when you select the AF I/F, the Session Stop From parameter becomes available. Select the server to stop the session from the dropdown list. Options for Session Stop From are AF Server and AGW Server.

BBERF I/F

Use the BBERF I/F checkbox to define the Gxc interface between AGW and PCRF.

When you select BBERF I/F checkbox, the AF I/F checkbox is disabled and if you have AGW I/F check box, the Gx radio button is automatically selected for you (Ty Diameter, Ty RADIUS, and R3 are disabled). See also BBERF Node.

OCS I/F Use the OCS I/F checkbox to define the Sy interface between the OCS and PCRF. When Sy and Gx are enabled, the Sy session is initiated when the first Gx session of the subscriber is established with the PGW. The Sy session is initiated by the PCRF by sending SLR to OCS.
Session Control The session control parameters are available only when you select AGW I/F check box with Ty Diameter or GX and AF I/F checkbox with Tx or RX radio buttons.
Session Start

Select the node to start the session first from the drop-down list.

Options: AF Start First or AGW Start First

Session Stop

Select the node to stop the session from the drop-down list.

Options: AF Stop First or AGW Stop First

Wait Enter the number of seconds to wait for the Server to stop the AGW.
LTE Mobility

In PCRF Node testing, selecting LTE Mobility allows handling of the messages exchanged during Hand Off. Some LTE handover may need to update the PCRF rules in the same Gx/Gxc sessions and others cause the PCRF Gxc/Gx session establishment or termination.

NOTE: When The LTE Mobility checkbox is enabled, all other options on the Emulator Configuration tab is disabled.

Select Inter SGW or Intra PGW from the dropdown list.

  • Inter-SGW:  The Gxc Interface tab is enabled, BBERF I/F Node requires configuration, and PCRF Terminates Source Session checkbox is enabled.

Use the PCRF Terminates Source Session checkbox to terminate UE initiated or PCRF initiated session.

  • Intra-PGW:  Both the Gx and Gxc Interface tabs RE enabled. Also, BBERF I/F Node and AGW I/F Node requires configuration

Command Mode

In PCRF Node testing, select Enabled to indicate Command Mode selection or select Sequencer. By default the Command Mode selection is Off.

Select Command Mode Enabled to indicate that the test runs/executes in the Command Mode, where all timers associated with PCC rules are inactive and you manually install or remove configured rules using the on-demand Command interface.  

Enable NetLoc Mode

In PCRF Node testing, enabled when both Gx and Rx interfaces are enabled. Support for Network Location.

Tcl Parameter: NetLocEn

Secondary PCRF Node

Available only when you select AGW I/F with Gx.

Use Secondary PCRF Node to allow definition of both the Secondary Server Nodes for failover purposes.

Failover

Available only when you select Secondary PCRF Node.

When the Node Configuration supports secondary servers, you can enable or disable failover support. Transport layer failure on the primary node can be simulated. The node notifies the client whether failover is supported or not with the CC-Session-Failover AVP

Options: Not Supported or Supported

Default: Supported

Simulate Failover

Use the drop-down list to enable failure simulation.

Options: No , Communication Loss, Transport Loss

Default: No

Duration

Indicates the length for time for which the failover simulation process is active. After the specified time expires, the failover simulation process stops.

Tcl Parameter: TyCcSrvFailoverDuration

Start Failover

Use the drop-down list to select the simulated failure trigger.

Options:

  • Before Any Sessions Established — The node will stop responding after the Capabilities Exchange.

  • After X Sessions Established — The node will stop responding after the number of sessions provisioned in X have been established.

  • X Seconds After All Sessions Established — The node will wait for X seconds after the maximum Number of Sessions have been established and then stop responding. If all sessions are not successfully established, the failure will not be triggered.

Default: Before Any Sessions Established

X: Indicates either the number of Sessions or number of seconds depending on your selection of Start Failover.

The parameter is available when you select Secondary PCRF Node, Simulate Failover is not No and Start Failover is not Before Any Sessions Established.

Range is 1 - 400000

Default: 1

Tcl Parameter: TyCcSrvFailoverDelay

  

 

^ Back to Top


PDF Nodal Testing

R3 Protocol

PCC-R3 protocol includes PCC-R3-P interface, defined between PDF and AGW running  R3. This interface carries extensions of the Gx (Ty) interface and enables the PCC policies to be proxied for the PDF.

Select the type of testing used by the R3 protocol: RADIUS or Diameter

PCRF Interface Select the type of interface for policy control decision and flow based charging control functionalities.

 

^ Back to Top


PGW Testing

Network Interface

In PGW Node test case, the label displays as PMIPv6 Network Interface.

Select S5/S8 interface to display GTPv2 and  PMIPv6 protocols.

Select S2a or S2b network interface to display GTPv2 and PMIPv6 protocol.

Select PI-MIP interface to display only MIP protocol.

Tcl Parameter: NtwkInterface

Select the GTPv2 Protocol to enable S5/S8 interface or S2a or S2b with GTPv2 protocol layer between the emulated Serving gateway and the PDN GW SUT. Define GTPV2 settings on the GTPv2 Tab.

Select the PMIPv6 protocol to enable IPv4 or IPv6 transport between the UE, MAG and LMA via the S5/S8 or the S2a/S2b interface. Define PMIPv6 settings on the PMIPv6 Tab.

For PMIPv6 with IPv4 transport, you must enter the PMIPv6 Destination Address for LMA SUT on the Network Devices tab.

In PGW Node test case, When Mobility = None, you may select Protocol as either GTPv2 or PMIPv6.

  • Select GTPv2, the PMIPv6 Network Interface is not available and the GTPv2 interface tab label is S2a/S2b/S5/S8.  
  • Select PMIPv6, the PMIPv6 Network Interface selection is available: S2a/S2b or S5/S8

In PGW Node test case, select VLAN and enter the ID.

NEMO Tunnel Mode Enabled when NEMO Emulation is selected. Select PMIPv6 (under NEMO Interface) to enable a GTP-U Tunnel and use it to tunnel PMIPv6 Control Messaging. Use NEMO LMA (SUT).      Default = Pi-MIP (Use NEMO HA SUT) or PMIPv6 (NEMO LMA (SUT).   Available in PGW Nodal and SGW Nodal test cases. IN SGW Nodal, only PMIPv6 is supported. Tcl Parameter: NemoTunnelMode
Serving Node In PGW Nodal testing, use the dropdown list to emulate SGSN or MME as from the Serving Node. For mobility tests, the Serving Node selection is forced to MME.
Handoff Type

In PGW Nodal testing, Handoff type is available only when the Test Activity Session Loading with Mobility and SGW Relocation. When either of these two Test Activities is selected:

  • S5/S8 Protocol is GTPv2 only
  • The Target Bearer tab becomes available along with the Target SGW Control/User test nodes on the Network Devices tab
  • The Handoff Type determines signaling.

Options:  S1, X2, TAU

Default: S1

Tcl Parameter: HandoffType

NOTE: The TAU handoff type supports support TAU handoff in idle mode. (Handoff type TAU simulates a UE connecting to the network/eNodeB, going idle for the specified time, moving from one Tracking Area to another, and re-establishing with the network to a different eNodeB with a different TA.)

Initial Network

Select the Initial Network from the dropdown list.

Options = Source or Target

Default = Source

Tcl Parameter: InitiateType

Sxb Interface to UP

Select for the Sxb Interface to the Control and User Plane function in a split PGW Architecture. The Sxb Interface with the PFCP (Packet Forwarding Control Protocol) tab becomes available for input.  The Sxb Control GTP Node and Sxb Control Node become available.

Sxb to UP becomes available in Network Devices SUT for input. Enter the: Sxb User Node SUT, Sxb User GTP Node SUT, PGW User Node SUT. Up to 10 SUTs are supported.

GTPv2 Version must be > 8.0.0 and Mobility not Inter Technology.

See TS 23.214 for Architecture enhancements for Control and User plane separation of EPC Nodes.

See TS 29.244 for Interface specifications between the Control plane and User plane of EPC Nodes.

Tcl Parameter: SxbToPgwUEn

Sxb Interface to CP

Select for the Sxb Interface to the Control and User Plane function in a split PGW Architecture. The Sxb Interface with the PFCP (Packet Forwarding Control Protocol) tab becomes available for input. The Sxb User GTP Node and Sxb User Node become available.

Sxb to CP becomes available in Network Devices SUT for input. Enter the: Sxb Control Node SUT. Up to 10 SUTs are supported.

 

See TS 23.214 for Architecture enhancements for Control and User plane separation of EPC Nodes.

See TS 29.244 for Interface specifications between the Control plane and User plane of EPC Nodes.

Tcl Parameter: SxbToPgwCEn

Mobility Target

Available when test activity is = Session Loading With Mobility, Command Mode, SGW Relocation and Sequencer.

Network Interface = Select S5/S8 or S2a or S2b interface to display GTPv2 and  PMIPv6 protocols. (Use Target S5/S8 or Target S2a/S2b or Target PMIPV6 Interface )

Tcl Parameter: MobNtwkInterface

Support for Inter-tech mobility across GTPv2, PMIPv6 and MIPv4 with inner NEMO sessions.

UE Initiates Dedicated Bearers

In LTE testing the dedicated bearers can be established by either the UE or the PDN. Selecting the UE Initiates Dedicated Bearers, allows all the provisioned bearers be established by the UE. If not selected, the PDN will establish the dedicated bearers as needed based on the traffic activity and QOS.

NOTE: In PGW Nodal test case, UE Initiates Dedicated Bearers is not available when Test Activity is command Mode.

  • In PGW Nodal testing, The UE Initiates Dedicated Bearers checkbox is available for both Capacity and Session Loading test.
  • In PGW Nodal and SGW Nodal testing TFT Settings are enabled when you select the UE Initiates Dedicated Bearers checkbox. The TFT Settings are required for GTPv2 when Dedicated Bearer per Default is > 1.
Perform Revocation on Stop

Available in PGW Node TC when Mobility is None and Protocol is PMIPv6. Select to indicate revocation occurs on stop and then trigger that invokes revocation.

  • Reserved : 0
  • Unspecified : 1
  • Administrative Reason : 2
  • Inter-MAG Handoff - same Access Type : 3
  • Inter-MAG Handoff - different Access Type : 4
  • Inter-MAG - Unknown Handoff : 5
  • Per-Peer Policy : 6
  • Revoking Node Local Policy : 7
  • User Initiated Session(s) Termination : 8
  • Access Network Session(s) Termination : 9
  • IPv4 HoA Binding ONLY : 10
  • Possible Out-of Sync BCE State : 11

Tcl Parameter: PmipRevocationTrigger

Direct Tunnel

Use Direct Tunnel to enable the PGW to by-pass the SGSN and establish a direct connection to the GTP User Plane.

In PGW Node TC, Direct Tunnel is available Mobility is Inter-Technology, Protocol is GTPv2, and UMTS Version is 7.

Billing (PGW)

In PGW Nodal test case, The Billing checkbox is enabled only when Network Interface = S5/S8 and Protocol = GTPV2.

In PGW Node test case, The Billing checkbox is enabled only when Protocol = GTPV2.

Select Billing and then Ga, RF or Ro:

  • Select Ga to define the Ga>GTP' billing data record information
  • Select Rf (Offline Charging Reference Point between a 3G network element and the CDF) to define Rf>CTF account settings triggered via charging function.
  • Select R0 (Session charging with Unit Reservation (SCUR), with Centralized Unit and Rating Control) to define R0>CTF account settings triggered via charging function.
Gx Interface

In PGE Node test case, select to include Gx interface configurations. Gx, S6b and SGi NAS interfaces are mutually exclusive.

(An example usage: You may use to test MME Nodal with VoLTE (capacity and Mobility) on one side and then IMS Node, MME Node, SGW Node, PGW Node with Gx and PCRF Node on the network side.)

S6b Interface

In PGW Node test case, select to include S6b interface configurations. Provide linkage between PGW and AAA (S6b).

Gx, S6b and SGi NAS interfaces are mutually exclusive.

Tcl Parameter : S6bIfEn

Enable NetLoc Mode

Select to enable Network Location. Available when Gx Interface is selected.

Tcl Parameter: NetLocEn

SGi NAS Interface

In PGW Node test case, select to include the SGi NAS interface (RADIUS Tab). Provides support for Radius query for authentication.

Gx, S6b and SGi NAS interfaces are mutually exclusive.

Tcl Parameter : SgiNasIfEn

NEMO Emulation  

Select to enable NEMO (Network Mobility) emulation, where groups of routers and UEs attached move homogeneously (as a whole).

NEMO Interface will be Enabled.

The option is not available when test activity is Session Loading with Mobility or when you select SGW Relocation.

Available in PGW and SGW Nodal test cases.

Tcl Parameter: MipNemoEn

Pi-MIP IPSEC

Select to enable Pi-MIP- MIP NEMO tab.

The option is not available when test activity is Session Loading with Mobility or when you select SGW Relocation.

VoLTE

Available when test Activity is Capacity (except when Network Interface = Pi-MIP), Command Mode or Sequencer.

Select to test the IMS VoLTE feature which supports SIP and RTP-based Voice over in PGW Nodal test case. You are required to configure the following:

 

 

^ Back to Top


PDP Type

Use the radio buttons to select the Packet Data Protocol type that is requested by the SGSN nodes or supported by a GGSN node. The applicable parameters will be displayed on the IPv4/IPv6 or PPP tabs depending on your selection.

Options: IPV4, IPV6, IPv4/IPv6, PPP

Default: IPV4

IMPORTANT:

  • In SGW Nodal testing, PDP Type is available only when UMTS Version is 8.

  • In PGW Node TC, PDP Type is available only when UMTS Version is 7.

  • When testing in an L2TP VPN configuration, the protocol type must be PPP.

  • When PPP is selected, only primary PDP contexts can be used. Secondary contexts are only available with IPv4 and IPv6.

 

^ Back to Top


PSAP Node Testing

PSAP Node

Public Safety Answering Point (PSAP) testing to generate and answer emergency calls.

  • Emulate Public Safety Answering Points (PSAP) which are capable of answering SIP emergency calls and validate routing decision.
  • Emulate SIP emergency calls generated from different locations.
  • Emulate Location services and routing capability of device under tests for in-house back to back tests.

The following interfaces are available for testing :

SIP VoIP

Automatically enabled.

Select to test the IMS VoLTE feature which supports SIP and RTP-based Voice over in PSAP Node test case. You are required to configure the following:

Le Interface  

PSAP uses this interface for querying intermediate/final location of mobile subscriber. The Le Client and Le Interfaces become available for input.

Tcl Parameter : LeEn

E2 Interface

Available in PSAP Node and LCS Node test cases - The E2 interface is located between GMLC and PSAP and is used for querying location using Emergency Service Protocol (ESP). The E2 Interface - ESP Tab and Mm Interface become available for input. Per reference docs : NENA-05-001 December 2003 (NENA Standard for the Implementation of the Wireless Emergency Service Protocol E2 Interface) and J-STD-036-A - Enhanced Wireless 9-1-1 Phase 2

Tcl Parameter : E2En

 

^ Back to Top


RIC Node / RIC Nodal Test Cases

 

 

RAN Intelligent Controller (RIC) is a network function in the disaggregated ORAN architecture that is responsible for control and optimization of the O-RAN elements with the goal of optimizing overall O-RAN performance. This is achieved through applications called xApps and rApps onboarded onto the near-RT and non-RT RIC respectively. xApps and rApps are geared towards specific use cases which represent specific aspects of the O-RAN to be optimized. Examples include Traffic Steering, Energy Savings, QoE optimization, etc. xApps and rApps rely on AI/ML models to ingest network data and make predictions and recommendations to optimize network performance.

 

Mode

Non-RT

Near-RT

Select to emulate Non-RT RIC Node (default) or Near-RT RIC Node over the A1 interface. Mutually exclusive with E2 Interface.

When Mode = Non-RT : 

When Mode = Near-RT : 

 

Specification reference :

  • 3GPP TS 23.501
  • 3GPP TS 29.501
  • O-RAN.WG2.A1AP-v03.02
  • O-RAN.WG2.A1GAP-v03.00
  • O-RAN.WG2.A1TD-v04.00
  • O-RAN.WG2.A1TP_v02.00
  • O-RAN.WG2.A1TS-v02.00
  • O-RAN.WG2.A1UCR-v01.00
  • O-RAN.WG2.Non-RT-RIC-ARCH-TS-v02.01

A1 Interface

Test A1EI

Select for A1 Interface between Non-RT RIC and Near-RT RIC. Currently, it is always enabled.

Select Test A1EI to test the Enrichment Information Service. For A1-EI service, Near-RT RIC is consumer and Non-RT RIC is producer.

Tcl Parameter: A1En

Tcl Parameter: A1EiEn

E2 Interface

Select to emulate the E2 Interface in RIC Node. Available when Near-RT is enabled. Mutually exclusive with A1 Interface. 

The interface that is designed for communication between DU/CU and Near-Real Time RIC is called E2. When E2 is enabled, there are two interfaces that become available for input :

  • E2 which contains E2AP (E2 Ap Tab) over SCTP. The protocol for the communication over E2 interface is called E2AP.
  • E2SM which contains E2sm Rc Tab , E2sm KPM tab . There are 3 E2 Service Models implemented as xApps in the Near-RT RECs: E2SM RAN Control (RC), E2SM Key Performance Matrix (KPM) and E2SM Network Interfaces (NI).
  • When Enable Cell Configuration and Control is enabled, E2SM also contains E2sm Ccc Tab for Cell Configuration and Control.
  • F1 (F1-AP - F1-AP DU , F1-AP CU), AS-5G (RRC), N2 NGAP (gNB , AMF Node)

 

When Mode = Near-RT, select the E2 Interface : 

RIC Nodal Test Configuration can emulate gNB-CU (O-CU-CP and O-CU-UP together) and gNB-DU (O-DU). gNB-CU E2 NodegNB-DU E2 NodeNear-RT RIC E2 Node SUTE2AP MeasurementsE2SM Measurements

 

Spec Reference:

  • O-RAN.WG3.RICARCH-v03.00
  • O-RAN.WG3.E2AP-v02.03
  • O-RAN.WG3.E2GAP-v02.02
  • O-RAN.WG3.UCR-v02.00
  • O-RAN.WG3.E2SM-v02.01
  • O-RAN.WG3.E2SM-RC-v01.03
  • O-RAN.WG3.E2SM-KPM-v02.03
  • O-RAN.WG3.E2SM-NI-v01.00.00
  • 3GPP TS 28.552

  • 3GPP TS 38.413
  • 3GPP TS 38.423
  • 3GPP TS 38.473

Tcl Parameter: E2En

Tcl Parameter: E2CccEn

O1 Interface

Select for O1 interface for non-RT RIC testing from emulated CUs and DUs as part of non-RT RIC Nodal and RIC Node. The O1 interface supports the management entities within the SMO framework and includes the O-RAN managed elements such as the operation and maintenance (OAM), related to function of multi-vendor including FCAPS (fault, configuration, accounting, performance management, security management), and software. 

When Mode = Near-RT (RIC Node TC), select the O1 Interface : 

 

RIC Nodal Test Configuration can emulate gNB-CU (O-CU-CP and O-CU-UP together) and gNB-DU (O-DU). 

gNB-CU O1 NodegNB-DU O1 NodeNon-RT RIC O1 HTTP SUT, O1-NETCONF (Service, SSH, TCP), O1-HTTP (Http/2 Client, TLSTCP ) become available for input. NETCONF Measurements and O1 Service Measurements.

  1. CUs and DUs can be emulated within test case RIC Nodal to support O1 interface. And SMO (Non-RT RIC) will be emulated within test case RIC Node to support O1 interface.
  2. Only the O1 interface between SMO (Non-RT RIC) and CU/DU is supported.
  3. NETCONF based on SSH protocol is supported for O1 interface.
  4. For notifications from CU/DU to SMO (Non-RT RIC), HTTP/TLS protocol is supported.
  5. Performance data file reporting is supported, SFTP protocol is used for file transfer. Performance data streaming will not be supported in this feature.
  6. Running data store is supported, candidate data store will not be supported.

The following procedures are supported: 

  1. Provisioning Management Services
    1. Create Managed Object Instance
    2. Modify Managed Object Instance Attributes
    3. Delete Managed Object Instance
    4. Read Managed Object Instance Attributes
    5. Subscription Control
    6. NETCONF Session Establishment
    7. NETCONF Session Termination
    8. Lock Data Store
    9. Unlock Data Store
  2. Performance Assurance Management Services
    1. Performance Data File Reporting
    2. Measurement Job Control
  3. PNF Registration

Spec Reference :

  • O-RAN.WG10.OAM-Architecture-R003-v09.00
  • O-RAN.WG10.O1-Interface.0-R003-v10.00
  • O-RAN.WG10.Information Model and Data Models.0-R003-v05.00
  • O-RAN.WG5.O-CU-O1.0-R003-v05.00
  • O-RAN.WG5.O-DU-O1.0-R003-v07.00
  • 3GPP 28.532-h30
  • 3GPP 28.622-h11
  • 3GPP 28.623-h61
  • 3GPP 28.552-h80

Tcl Parameter: O1En

Command Mode 

Sequencer

Command Mode is be visible when Mode = "Non-RT" and A1 Interface is checked or when Mode = "Near-RT" and A1 Interface plus TestA1EI are checked. Sequencer is the only option visible and cannot be un-selected. 

Click the Command / Sequencer button on the RIC Node Emulator Configuration to execute :

For A1P:  Query Policy Type IdentifiersQuery All Policy Identifiers, Query Policy TypeCreate Policy, Update Single Policy, Query Single Policy, Query Policy Status, Delete Policy Commands. 

For A1EI:  Query Type IdentifiersQuery Type, Query Job IdentifiersCreate Job, Query  Job, Update Job, Delete Job, Query Job Status, Notify Job Status, Deliver Job Result Commands

For E2 (RIC):  RIC SubscriptionRIC Subscription Delete, RIC Control Commands

For O1:  Create MOI, Modify MOI, Delete MOI, Read MOI, Lock Data Store, Unlock Data Store Commands

Additional details in RIC Node Test Case.

 

^ Back to Top

 

Security Gateway Node Test Case

Site to Site VPN Support

Site to Site VPN enabler Default = False

Tcl Parameter: SitetoSiteEnabler

Unprotected Interface

Select to add an Unsecured Gateway node. If enabled, the Security Gateway Node will forward decrypted packets towards the Network Host without any VLAN Id. See Security Gateway Node.

Tcl Parameter: UnprotectedIfEn

Border Gateway Protocol

Number of Router Interfaces

Select for Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). 

BGP is a standardized exterior gateway protocol used to exchange routing and reachability information among different autonomous systems (ASes) on the internet.

ISPs use BGP to "announce" or share information about the IP addresses and network routes they can reach. This is crucial for the proper functioning of the internet, as it allows routers across the internet to know how to forward traffic to reach destinations within an ISP's network. Each AS is assigned a unique identifier called an Autonomous System Number (ASN).

When enabled, you can add up to 5 BGP Router Interfaces.

Select Number of Router Interfaces.

Range: 1 to 5.

Default : 1

For each interface, add the parameters in Bgp Tab and BGP Router Node

Measurements collected for BGP related processing are reported on the BGP Router Node tabs.

Spec Reference :

  1. RFC 4271 - Border Gateway Protocol 4 (BGP-4)
  2. RFC 5492 - Capabilities Advertisement with BGP-4
  3. RFC 4760 - Multiprotocol Extensions for BGP-4
  4. RFC 2918 - Route Refresh Capability for BGP-4
  5. RFC 6793 - BGP Support for Four-Octet Autonomous System (AS) Number Space
  6. RFC 4724 - Graceful Restart Mechanism for BGP
  7. RFC 7911 - Advertisement of Multiple Paths in BGP 

Overview of BGP States -

  • Six states are involved in the BGP process as defined by the BGP finite state machine (FSM). The FSM illustrates what actions play a role at each stage of BGP session establishment. The diagram below shows how the transition between the states might occur.

                                                                   

 BGP States

IDLE

  • Initiates a TCP connection to its configured BGP peers.
  • Listens for incoming TCP connections.
  • ConnectRetry timer starts (120 seconds — cannot be changed).

Connect

  • Waits for the TCP connection to complete.
  • If TCP is successful:
    • Sends an OPEN message to its peers.
    • Changes the state to OpenSent and clears the CR timer.
  • If TCP is unsuccessful:
    • ConnectRetry timer is reset.
    • BGP goes into the Active state.

Active

  • The BGP speaker tries to acquire its peer by initiating another TCP connection.
  • If TCP is successful:
    • ConnectRetry timer is cleared.
    • Sends an OPEN message to peer and changes state to OpenSent.
  • If TCP is unsuccessful:
    • ConnectRetry timer is reset.
    • BGP goes into Idle state.

OpenSent

  • Waits to receive an OPEN message from its peer and verifies all the fields. The message contains the BGP version, AS number, Hold time, and BGP ID.
  • If successful:
    • BGP starts sending keepalives and sets its hold and keepalive timers.
  • If unsuccessful:
    • ConnectRetry timer is reset.
    • BGP goes into Idle state.

OpenConfirm

  • BGP waits to receive keepalives from its peer.
  • If successful:
    • State is changed to established.
  • If unsuccessful:
    • ConnectRetry timer is reset.
    • BGP goes into Idle state.

Established

  • Exchange of update, notification, and keepalive messages take place with the peer.
  • Each update or keepalive results in hold time reset. Default keepalive is 60 seconds, and the hold time is 180 seconds.

Tcl Parameter: RoutingProtocolBgpEn

Tcl Parameter: RoutingNumInterfaces

IPSec Peers - Number of Peers

Number of IPSec Peers. 

Range from 1 to 300000 Default = 1

Note : The Tcl Parameter NumIpAddr can also be found on the Network Host Node. It is labeled as Number of Client IP Addresses which indicates the maximum number of client IP address supported by the node.

Tcl Parameter: NumIpAddr

IPSec Peers - Number of APNs Number of APNs - Only available if Site to Site VPN is NOT checked. Range from 1 to 11 Default = 1 Tcl Parameter: NumApns

 

^ Back to Top


SCEF (Service Capability Exposure Function) Node Test Case - About SCEF Testing

 

S6t Select to enable the S6t Interface towards HSS.

S6t reference point is used for:

  • Connect the SCEF to HSS containing subscription and UE related information
  • Monitoring event configuration/deletion by the SCEF at the HSS
  • Monitoring event reporting by the HSS to the SCEF
  • Configuration/deletion of communication pattern parameters by the SCEF to HSS
Default = True Tcl Parameter: S6tEn
T6a Select to enable the T6a Interface towards MME.

T6a reference point is used for:

  • Monitoring event configuration by the SCEF at the serving MME

  • Monitoring event reporting by the serving MME to the SCEF

  • To manage connection between MME and the SCEF on T6a

  • To send MT data on T6a

  • To receive MO data on T6a

Default = False Tcl Parameter: T6aEn
T6b Select to enable the T6b Interface towards SGSN.

T6b reference point is used for:

  • Monitoring event configuration by the SCEF at the serving SGSN

  • Monitoring event reporting by the serving SGSN to the SCEF

  • To manage connection between SGSN and the SCEF on T6b

Default = False Tcl Parameter: T6bEn

^ Back to Top

Service Based Nodal

Test UDM (Nudm)

Select to test the Unified Data Management function (Nudm).  The SUT is UDM SBI, select to emulate AMF (N8), SMF (N10), AUSF (N13), SMSF (N21), and NEF (N52). NRF Interface is optional to be emulated.

Tcl Parameter: TestUdmEn

From AMF (N8)   UDM (N8) On SMF Nodal test case UDM (N8) On AMF Node test case The SUT is UDM SBI, select From AMF (N8)- Access and Mobility Function. Interface Namf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and AMF-UDM (NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. AMF SBI Node is available for input.  

The UDM (N8) interface is also enabled on SMF Nodal test Configuration. The SUT is UDM SBI. Interface AMF-UDM (NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. AMF SBI Node is available for input. NRF Interface and UDM (N8) interface are mutually exclusive on SMF Nodal Test case.

The UDM (N8) interface is also enabled on AMF Node Emulator Configuration. The SUT is UDM SBI. Interfaces AMF-UDM (NF Tab - NF Consumer) and Namf (NF Tab - NF Producer) become available for input. AMF SBI Node is available for input.  

Tcl Parameter: N8En

From SMF (N10)

The SUT is UDM SBI, select From SMF (N10) - Session Management Function. Interface Nsmf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and SMF-UDM (NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. SMF SBI Node is available for input. Also available on SMF Node Emulator Cnfg when N10 Interface is selected.

Tcl Parameter: N10En

From AUSF (N13)

The SUT is UDM SBI, select From AUSF (N13) - Authentication Server Function. Interface Nausf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and AUSF-UDM (NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. AUSF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: N13En

From SMSF (N21)

The SUT is UDM SBI, select From SMSF (N21) - Short Message Service Function. Interface Nsmsf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and SMSF-UDM (NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. SMSF SBI Node is available for input. Reference 23.502 Chapter 4.13.3.6

Tcl Parameter: N21En

From NEF (N52)

The SUT is UDM SBI, select From NEF (N52) - Network Exposure Function. Interface Nnef (NF Tab - NF Producer) and NEF-UDM (NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. NEF SBI Node is available for input. 

The N52 interface is also available when Test NEF (Nnef) and Emulate UDM (N52) are enabled.

Tcl Parameter: N52En

 

Test AUSF (Nausf)

Select to test the Authentication Server Function (Nausf).  The SUT is AUSF SBI, select From AMF (N12), or Emulate UDM (N13). NRF Interface is optional to be emulated.

Tcl Parameter: TestAusfEn

From AMF (N12)

The SUT is AUSF SBI, select From AMF (N8)- Access and Mobility Function. Interface Namf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and AMF-AUSF (NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. AMF SBI Node is available for input. The N12 interface is also enabled on AMF Node Emulator Configuration. The SUT is AUSF SBI, select From AMF (N8)- Access and Mobility Function. Interface Namf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and AMF-AUSF (NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. AMF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: N12En

Emulate UDM (N13)

The SUT is AUSF SBI, select to emulate UDM (N13)- Unified Data Management Function. Interface Nudm (NF Tab - NF Producer becomes available for input. UDM SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: UdmNodeEn

   
Test PCF (Npcf)

Select to test the Policy Control Function (Npcf).  The SUT is PCF SBI, select From AMF (N15), or From SMF (N7). NRF Interface is optional to be emulated.

Tcl Parameter: TestPcfEn

From AMF (N15)

The SUT is PCF SBI, select From AMF (N15)- Access and Mobility Function. Interface Namf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and AMF-PCF (Amf to Pcf NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. AMF SBI Node is available for input.

Also available on AMF Node test case when N15 Interface is enabled.

Tcl Parameter: N15En

From SMF (N7)

The SUT is PCF SBI, select From SMF (N15)- Session and Mobility Function. Interface Nsmf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and SMF-PCF (Smf to Pcf NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. SMF SBI Node is available for input. Also available on SMF Node Emulator Cnfg when N7 Interface is selected.

Additional details for 5G side for N11/N7/N4 interworking and 4G side for S11/S5/S8/N7/N4 interworking can be found in this section - N7 Interface.

Tcl Parameter: N7En

From NEF (N30)

The SUT is PCF SBI, select From NEF (N30)- Network Exposure Function. Interface Nnef (NF Tab - NF Producer) and NEF-PCF (Nef to Pcf NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. NEF SBI Node is available for input. 

Available when SMF (N7) is enabled.

Tcl Parameter: N30En

From AF (N5)

Select N5 Interface to define the N5 interface between the PCF and an Application Function.

Interface Naf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and Interface AF-PCFAF-PCF ) are available for input. See also AF SBI Node.  SUT is PCF SBI.

Tcl Parameter: N5En

Test CHF (Nchf)

Select to test the Charging Function (Nchf).  The SUT is CHF SBI, select From SMF (N40), From PCF (N28) or From SMSF. NRF Interface is optional to be emulated.

Tcl Parameter: TestChfEn

From SMF (N40)

The SUT is CHF SBI, select From SMF (N40)- Session and Mobility Function. Interface Nsmf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and SMF-CHF (Smf to Chf NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. SMF SBI Node is available for input.

Available on SMF Node Emulator Configuration when N7 Interface is enabled.

Tcl Parameter: N40En

From PCF (N28) The SUT is CHF SBI, select From PCF (N28)- Policy Control Function. Interface Npcf (Npcf NF Tab - NF Producer) and PCF-CHF (Pcf to Chf NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. PCF SBI Node is available for input. From PCF (N28) is not available when Test PCF (Npcf) is enabled. Tcl Parameter: N28En
From SMSF

The SUT is CHF SBI, select From SMSF - Short Message Service Function. Interface Nsmsf ( NF Tab - NF Producer) and SMSF-CHF (Smsf to Chf NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. SMSF SBI Node is available for input. From SMSF is not available when Test SMSF (Nsmsf) is enabled.

Tcl Parameter: NsmsfNchfEn

 

Test NSSF (Nnssf)

Select to test the Network Slice Selection Function (NSSF).  The SUT is NSSF SBI, select From AMF (N22). NRF Interface is optional to be emulated.

Tcl Parameter: TestNssfEn

From AMF (N22)

The SUT is NSSF SBI, select From AMF (N22)- Access and Mobility Function. Interface Namf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and AMF-NSSF (Amf to Nssf NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. AMF SBI Node and Target AMF SBI Node is available for input. Also available when N22 interface is enabled on AMF Node Emulator Configuration.

Tcl Parameter: N22En

Test NEF (Nnef)

Select to test the Network Exposure Function (Nnef). The SUT is NEF SBI, select to Emulate AMF (N51) and / or to Emulate SMF (N29). NRF Interface is optional to be emulated.

Tcl Parameter: TestNefEn

Emulate AMF (N51)

The SUT is NEF SBI, select Emulate AMF (N51) - Access and Mobility Function. Interface Namf (NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. AMF SBI Node is available for input. Per 3GPP TS 29.518 V15.4.

Tcl Parameter: N51En

Emulate SMF (N29)

The SUT is NEF SBI, select Emulate SMF (N29) - Session and Mobility Function. Interface Nsmf (NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. SMF SBI Node is available for input. Per 3GPP TS 29.508 V15.4.

Tcl Parameter: N29En

Emulate UDM (N52)

The SUT is NEF SBI, select Emulate UDM (N52) - Unified Data Management function. Interface Nudm ((Nudm NF Tab - NF Producer), NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. UDM SBI Node is available for input. Per 3GPP spec 23.502 release 16.

The N52 interface is also available when Test UDM (Nudm) and From NEF (N52) are enabled.

Limitation : We support Nudm_EventExposure service on N52 interface, we do not support Nudm_UECM service on N52 interface yet.

Tcl Parameter: N52En

From AF (N33)

The SUT is NEF SBI, select From AF (N33) - Access and Mobility Function. Interface Naf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and Interface AF-NEF (Af to Nef NF Tab - NF Consumerbecome available for input. AF SBI Node is available for input.

Support of the T8 reference point (NEF / AF). This reference point requires CAPIF support using HTTP/1.1 as defined in 3GPP TS 29.122 (Change Chargeable Party) v15.3.0.

Select Emulate PCF (N30) which provides a reference point between Network Exposure function (NEF) and the Policy Control Function (PCF).

The N30 interface is also available when Test PCF (Npcf)From SMF (N7)From NEF (N30) is enabled on Service Based Nodal test case.

Select Enable Http 1.1 for N33 interface.  

Per SPEC is 3GPP TS 29.122 v15.3.0.

Tcl Parameter: N33En

Tcl Parameter: N30En

Tcl Parameter: N33HttpEn

Test LMF (Nlmf)

Select to test the Location Management (Nlmf).  The SUT is LMF SBI, select From AMF (NLs). NRF Interface is optional to be emulated.

Tcl Parameter: TestLmfEn

From AMF (NLs)

The SUT is LMF SBI, select From AMF (NLs)- Access and Mobility Function. Interface Namf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and AMF-LMF (Amf to Lmf NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. AMF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: NlsEn

Test SLF (Nudr)

Select to test the Subscription Location Function (Nudr).  The SUT is SLF SBI, select From NRF. NRF Interface is optional to be emulated.

Indirect Communication is disabled if Test SLF is enabled.

Tcl Parameter: TestSlfEn

From NRF

The SUT is SLF SBI, select From NRF - NF Repository Function. Interface Nnrf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and NRF-SLF (Nudr NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. NRF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: SlfEn

Test SMSF (Nsmsf)

Select to test the Short Message Service function (SMSF).  The SUT is SMSF SBI, select From AMF (N20). NRF Interface is optional to be emulated.

Tcl Parameter: TestSmsfEn

From AMF (N20)

The SUT is SMSF SBI, select From AMF - Access and Mobility Function.. Interface Namf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and AMF-SMSF (NF Tab - NF Consumer, SMS Tab) become available for input. AMF SBI Node is available for input.

The N20 interface is also enabled on AMF Node Emulator Configuration.

Tcl Parameter: N20En

Test UDR (Nudr)

Select to test the Unified Data Repository (Nudr). Select From UDM (N35), From PCF (N36) or From NEF (N37).

The SUT is UDR SBI, select From UDM (N35). NRF Interface is optional to be emulated.

Tcl Parameter: TestUdrEn

From UDM (N35)

The SUT is UDR SBI, select From UDM - Unified Data Management Function. Interface Nudm (NF Tab - NF Producer) and UDM-UDR (Udm to Udr NF Consumer) become available for input. UDM SBI Node is available for input. Not available if Test UDM (Nudm) or if Test AUSF (Nausf), Emulate UDM N13 are enabled.

Tcl Parameter: N35En

From PCF (N36)

The SUT is UDR SBI, select From PCF - Policy Control Function. Interface Npcf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and PCF-UDR (Pcf to Udr NF Consumer) become available for input. PCF SBI Node is available for input. Not available if Test PCF (Npcf) or if (Test CHF (Nchf) and From PCF (N28)) are enabled.

Also availabel on Service Based Node test case when PCF (Npcf) is enabled, To UDR (N36) becomes available to enable. 

Tcl Parameter: N36En

From NEF (N37)

The SUT is UDR SBI, select From NEF - Network Exposure Function. Interface Nnef (NF Tab - NF Producer) and NEF-UDR (Nef to Udr NF Consumer) become available for input. NEF SBI Node is available for input. Not available if Test NEF (Nnef) is enabled.

Tcl Parameter: N37En

Test BSF (Nbsf)

Select to test the Binding Support Function (Nbsf).  The SUT is BSF SBI, select From PCF or select From AF. NRF Interface is optional to be emulated.

Services to be supported:  Per 3GPP TS 29.521 version 15.4.0 section 4.2 Service Operations.

BSF provides a PDU session binding functionality, which ensures that an AF request for a certain PDU Session reaches the relevant PCF holding the PDU Session information.

This service:

 *  Allows PCF consumers to register, update and remove the binding information;

  * our PCF Consumer update function, need to deregister first and then register with choose flag “update session binding” on message flow “Body Argument”.

  * Allows NF consumers to retrieve the binding information.

We achieve PCF register, update, remove on BSF, AF discover PCF on BSF, and BSF Rx Proxy/Redirect between AF-PCF.

Click to see Call flow.

Tcl Parameter: TestBsfEn

From PCF

The SUT is BSF SBI, select From PCF - Policy Control Function. Interface Npcf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and PCF-BSF (NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. PCF SBI Node  is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: NpcfNbsfEn

From AF

The SUT is BSF SBI, select From AF - Application Function. Interface Naf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and AF-BSF (NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. AF SBI Node  is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: NafNbsfEn

From NEF

Available when Test PCF (Npcf)From SMF (N7) , From NEF (N30) is enabled.

The SUT is BSF SBI, select From AF - Application Function. Interface Nnef (NF Tab - NF Producer) and NEF-BSF (NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. NEF SBI Node  is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: NnefNbsfEn

Test 5G-EIR (N5g-eir)

Select to test the Equipment Identity Register Services (5G-EIR). The SUT is EIR SBI, select From AMF (N17). N17 provides a Reference point between AMF and 5G-EIR.

NRF Interface is optional to be emulated.

Services to be supported:  Per spec 3GPP TS 23.502 section 5.2.4 5G-EIR

5.2.4.2 N5g-eir_EquipmentIdentityCheck service

5.2.4.2.1 General
√ Service Description: This service is provided by the 5G-EIR to check the PEI and check whether the PEI is in the black list or not. The service can be consumed by AMF. 


5.2.4.2.2 N5g-eir_EquipmentIdentityCheck_Get service operation
√ Service operation name: N5g-eir_EquipmentIdentityCheck_Get
√ Description: Check the PEI and determine whether the subscriber is allowed to use the equipment.
√ Inputs, Required: PEI, SUPI.
√ Inputs, Optional: none
√ Outputs, Required: PEI checking result
√ Outputs, Optional: none

Additional details also available in 3GPP TS 29.511.

5G-EIR to check on PEI if its black listed as per 5.2.2.2.2 Procedure using CheckEquipmentIdentity Operation

Tcl Parameter: TestEirEn

From AMF

The SUT is EIR SBI, select From AMF - Access and Mobility Function. Interface Namf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and AMF-5G-EIR (NF Tab - NF Consumer ) become available for input. AMF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: N17En

Test H-SMF

Select to test the N16 interface (V-SMF to H-SMF) for SEPP testing. Either Indirect Communication or Roaming Scenario with SEPP should be enabled when Test H-SMF is enabled. 

N16 testing is supported via SEPP and SCP.

For V-SMF to discover the correct SMF via NRF, add the additional NF Discovery Query Parameter “target-plmn-list” for NRF client function.

Spec reference: 3GPP TS 29.502 release 16.6.0 (2020-12).

The SUT is SMF SBI, select From V-SMF (N16). 

NRF Interface is optional to be emulated.

Tcl Parameter: TestHsmfEn

From V-SMF (N16)

The SUT is SMF SBI, select From V-SMF (N16) - Session Management Function. Interface Nsmf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and SMF-SMF (Smf To Smf NF Tab - NF Consumer ) become available for input. SMF SBI Node is available for input. 

Available on SMF Node test case when N16 Interface  is enabled and Emulate = V-SMF. 

Tcl Parameter: N16En

Emulate H-SMF / V-SMF

Interface Nsmf (NF Tab - NF Producer)  become available for input. SMF SBI Node is available for input. 

Available on SMF Node test case only when N16 Interface  is enabled and Emulate = H-SMF.

Tcl Parameter: N16Emulate

Test NWDAF (Nnwdaf)

Select to test the Network Data Analytics Function (NWDAF). Spec reference : 3GPP TS 29.520, 3GPP TS 29.510, 3GPP TS 23.288 (release 16.6.0 (2020-12)).

NRF Interface should be enabled with NWDAF. 

 

Tcl Parameter: TestNwdafEn

From AMF

The SUT is NWDAF SBI, select From AMF - Access and Mobility Management Function. Interface Namf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and AMF-NWDAF (Amf to Nwdaf NF Consumer ) become available for input. AMF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: NamfNnwdafEn

From SMF

The SUT is NWDAF SBI, select From SMF - Session Management Function. Interface Nsmf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and AMF-NWDAF (Amf to Nwdaf NF Consumer ) become available for input. SMF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: NsmfNnwdafEn

 

Test CBCF

Select to test wireless emergency alert messages, where the system under test is CBCF and AMF is emulated by landslide. all the messages between CBCF and AMF. The messages for N50 interface are supported per 3GPP TS 23.041.

Emulate AMF

The N50 interface is also enabled on interface Namf (NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. AMF SBI Node is available for input.

N50 provides a reference point between Cell Broadcast Center Function (CBCF) and the Access and Mobility Management function (AMF).

AMF forwarding logic for CMAS warning messages has been added based on 

3GPP Spec in section 9.1.3.5.2 of 23.041:  

The AMF forwards Write-Replace Warning Message Request NG-RAN to NG-RAN nodes. The AMF shall use the list of NG-RAN TAIs to determine the NG-RAN nodes in the delivery area. If the list of NG-RAN TAIs is not included and no Global RAN Node ID has been received from the CBCF, the message is forwarded to all NG-RAN nodes that are connected to the AMF. If a Global RAN Node ID has been received from the CBCF, the AMF shall forward the message only to the NG-RAN node indicated by the Global RAN Node ID IE. Ngap Tab (PWS Configuration).

Tcl Parameter: N50En

Tcl Parameter: TestCbcfEn

NRF Interface Select to test the NF Repository Function (NRF).  The SUT is NRF SBI. Interface Nnrf Client.   

When NRF interface is enabled, the SUT addresses is obtained by NF dynamic discovery procedure instead of static configuration. Thus, only NRF SBI SUT is editable for users to configure an address for NRF node, other SUT types (UDM SBI, AUSF SBI, PCF SBI) are only allowed to configure Number of SUTs.

Currently, we support only one NRF node.

For SB Nodal side, currently only UDM (as a NF service producer) needs to register itself (NF Type, NF services it provides) to the pre-configured NRF nodes via NF service registration procedure, other emulated NF s(AMF, SMF, AUSF, AF) act as NF service consumer role so needn’t to register on NRF.

For SB Node side, all the emulated NF nodes (as NF service producer role) need to register themselves to the pre- configured NRF nodes via NF service registration procedure.

Also available on AMF Node, SMF Nodal / SMF Node test cases.

NRF Interface and UDM (N8) interface are mutually exclusive on SMF Nodal Test case.

If Test UDM (Nudm) is checked:

  • If From AMF (N8) is checked, AMF will query NRF to get available UDM’ addresses

  • If From SMF (N10) is checked, SMF will query NRF to get available UDM’ addresses

  • If From AUSF (N13) is checked, AUSF will query NRF to get available UDM’ addresses

 

If Test AUSF (Nausf) is checked:

  • If From AMF (N12) is checked, AMF will query NRF to get available AUSF’ addresses

 

If Test PCF (Npcf) is checked:

  • If From AMF (N15) is checked, AMF will query NRF to get available PCF’ addresses

  • If From SMF (N7) is checked, SMF will query NRF to get available PCF’ addresses

  • If From AF (N5) is checked, AF will query NRF to get available PCF’ addresses

Tcl Parameter: NrfIntfEn
Test NRF (Nnrf)   Emulate   AMF    AUSF  BSF    CHF                 NSSF  PCF    SMF    SMSF                   UDM   UDR    UPF    vNRF                  Available when NRF Interface is enabled and all other interfaces are disabled.

AMF, AUSF, BSF, CHF,  NSSF, PCF, SMF, SMSF, UDM, UDR, UPF and vNRF will be emulated in Service Based Nodal to support NRF Nodal test.

 

Tcl Parameter: TestNrfEn  

Emulate :   

AMF

The SUT is NRF SBI. Select to test NRF with the emulated AMF - Access and Mobility Function. Interface Namf (NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. AMF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: NrfClnAmfEn

AUSF

The SUT is NRF SBI. Select to test NRF with the emulated AUSF - Authentication Server Function. Interface Nausf (NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. AUSF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: NrfClnAusfEn

BSF

The SUT is NRF SBI. Select to test NRF with the emulated BSF (Nbsf)- Binding Support Function (BSF). Interface Nbsf (NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. BSF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: NrfClnBsfEn

CHF

The SUT is NRF SBI. Select to test NRF with the emulated CHF - Charging function. Interface Nchf (NF Tab - NF Producer becomes available for input. CHF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: NrfClnChfEn

NSSF

The SUT is NRF SBI. Select to test NRF with the emulated NSSF (Nnssf)- Network Slice Selection Function (NSSF). Interface Nnssf (NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. NSSF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: NrfClnNssfEn

PCF

The SUT is NRF SBI. Select to test NRF with the emulated PCF - Policy Control Function. Interface Npcf (NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. PCF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: NrfClnPcfEn

SMF

The SUT is NRF SBI. Select to test NRF with the emulated SMF - Session and Mobility Function. Interface Nsmf (NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. SMF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: NrfClnSmfEn

SMSF

The SUT is NRF SBI. Select to test NRF with the emulated NSSF (Nnssf)- Short Message Service Function (NSSF). Interface Nsmsf (NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. SMSF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: NrfClnSmsfEn

UDM

The SUT is NRF SBI. Select to test NRF with the emulated UDM - Unified Data Management Function. Interface Nudm (NF Tab - NF Producer becomes available for input. UDM SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: NrfClnUdmEn

UDR

The SUT is NRF SBI. Select to test NRF with the emulated UDR (Nudr)- Unified Data Repository (UDR). Interface Nudr ( NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. UDR SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: NrfClnUdrEn

UPF

The SUT is NRF SBI. Select to test NRF with the emulated UPF (UPF)- User Plane Function. Interface UPF (NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. UPF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: NrfClnUpfEn

vNRF

The SUT is NRF SBI. Select to test NRF with the emulated vNRF (Nnrf)- NF Repository Function (NRF). Interface Nnrf (NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. NRF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: NrfClnVnrfEn

 

NF Register/Deregister Only

Available when Test Activity = Session loading Test with "Test NRF" enabled. NF Register/Deregister Only is mutually exclusive with Message Flow.

Select for Node Registration and De-registration without using Message Flows. When using Message Flow in SBI Nodal Session Loading when test NRF, Node Registration only happens during Test Case STARTING and Node De-Registration only happens during Test Case STOPPING. 

The Session loading mechanism was used to implement the NF nodes Register / De-Register actions. Using this approach, you can have an activation rate for NF nodes Reg, a deactivation rate for NF nodes De-reg, and ensure a constant rate like session loading. 

NOTE: The original Session loading was designed for session level message / command, this feature NF Register/Deregister Only is for node level messages, thus the new calculation logic for "Activation Time" is : Activation Time = "Total number of nodes" / "Activation Rate".

"Total number of nodes" equals the SUM of the number (# of Nodes) ) of all the of nodes that are enabled on "Network Devices" as shown in the image below.

This NF Register/Deregister only checkbox is only available for selection in the Session loading Settings Tab when the "Test NRF" is checked; for other "Test XXX", it's not available.

When enabled, Number of Subscribers,  Starting SUPI, Starting GPSI, Emulate vNRF are not available for selection.

Tcl Parameter: NfRegDeregOnlyEn

Indirect Communication Select for indirect communication via Service Communication Proxy (SCP) as specified in 3GPP TS 29.500 Section 6.10.3. In Indirect Communication, the NF Service consumer communicates with the target NF Service producer via a SCP. Landslide will emulate SCP in the Service Based Node test case. The SBI Interfaces have been enhanced to support SCP. Available in both Service Based Nodal (disabled if Test SLF (Nudr) is enabled) and Service Based Node (requires at least one emulation mode other than SCP or NRF (Nnrf), disabled if SLF (Nudr) is selected) test cases. Also available in SMF Nodal and SMF Node test cases. When enabled, interface SCP Client and SCP Sut become available for Input. Figure 4-2 gives more details about the Communication model for NF/NF services interaction. For more information, please refer to 3GPP 23.501. Landslide was enhanced to support model C, except that SCP will not be delegated to perform selection for specific NF Service instance from the NF Service Set and will not interact with NRF.  

Figure 4-2 Communication model C for NF/NF services interaction.

Model D - Indirect communication with delegated discovery: Consumers do not do any discovery or selection. The consumer adds any necessary discovery and selection parameters required to find a suitable producer to the service request. The SCP uses the request address and the discovery and selection parameters in the request message to route the request to a suitable producer instance. The SCP can perform discovery with an NRF and obtain a discovery result.

The following figure depicts the communication models for Model D.

In SCP Client , select the 29.500 version to support :

  • In 29.500 version 16.0.0/Jun2019 (default), NF consumer convey these NF service discovery factors using the "nf-disc-factors" query parameter.
  • In 29.500 version  16.2.0/Dec2019 NF consumer convey these NF service discovery factors using the "3gpp-sbi-discovery-*" headers.

Select the SCP version configuration in SCP Client tab to switch between these two different conveyances of NF discovery factors.

By default, we only convey 3gpp-sbi-discovery-target-nf-type, 3gpp-sbi-discovery-requester-nf-type and 3gpp-sbi-discovery-service-names. We also provide the NF Discovery tab to append or overwrite NF discovery query parameters used in 3gpp-sbi-discovery-* headers.

 

Figure 4-3 illustrates the overall procedure for indirect communication without delegated discovery. In a successful discovery the NF service consumer gets the NF profile (s) matching the search criteria provided in the Nnrf_NFDiscovery_Request message. Then subsequence message flows between NF service consumer and NF service producer will be routed by SCP.

1.  When the NF Service Consumer needs to send a Service Request and has stored results from the Discovery Procedure, the NF Service Consumer selects an appropriate NF Producer / NF Service Producer instance from the list of NF profiles provided by the NRF. The NF Service Consumer considers the NF and NF service parameters (e.g. TAI, S-NSSAI, locality, priority etc) in the NF profiles. The NF Service consumer requests service from the NF Service producer by sending a service request message to the NF service producer via the SCP. The address of a NF Service/NF producer instance may be unique per NF service/NF producer instance or may be shared by multiple NF service producers. i.e. the address used by the NF service consumer may point to multiple NF service/NF producer instances, or a single NF service producer instance.

2.  If the NF Service consumer provides an End Point address pointing to multiple producer instances, the SCP performs selection of NF Service/NF Producer instance from the set of NF services that the address is pointing to. Otherwise the SCP uses the NF Service/NF producer Instance that the address points to. The SCP forwards the Service Request to selected NF Service/NF producer Instance.

3.  The NF Service Producer responds via SCP.

4.  SCP forwards the response.

Note : We do not support Authorization header in Release 19.0.

Indirect Communication is disabled when Test SLF (Nudr) is selected in the Service Based Nodal test case or when SLF (Nudr) is selected in the Service based Node test case. In Service Based Node, it  requires at least one emulation mode other than SCP or NRF (Nnrf) to be selected.

Tcl Parameter: IndirectCommEn

Delegate NF Discovery And Selection

Available when Indirect Communication is enabled. Select for support of Indirect Communication_NF discovery and selection per 3GPP Release 16 , Specification 29.500. 

When enabled, NF Discovery tab becomes available to enable the NF Discovery Query Parameters. 

When "Delegate NF Discovery And Selection" is checked, the target NF node configuration tab on "Network Devices" tab only allows the setting of  "Number of SUTs" option, all other options are not available for input. (which is same like when "NRF Interface" is checked).

Tcl Parameter: DelegateNfDscSelEn

Generate TLS Key Log Files See Generate TLS Key Log Files in Service Based Node Test Case.

^ Back to Top

Service Based Node

UDM (Nudm)

Select to emulate UDM (Nudm)- Unified Data Management Function. Interface Nudm (Nudm NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. UDM SBI Node is available for input. Also available on HSS Node Emulator. See additional details here.

Tcl Parameter: UdmEn

AUSF (Nausf) To UDM (N13)

The SUT is UDM SBI, select From AUSF (N13) - Authentication Server Function. Interface Nausf (NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. When To UDM (N13) is also enabled, AUSF-UDM (NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. AUSF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: AusfEn

Tcl Parameter: N13En

PCF (Npcf)

Select to emulate PCF (Npcf)- Policy Control Function. Interface Npcf (Npcf NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. PCF SBI Node is available for input.

When PCF (Npcf) is enabled, Visiting PCF becomes available to enable. When enabled, interface PCF-AMF (NF Tab - NF Consumer) becomes available for input.

When PCF (Npcf) is enabled, To BSF becomes available to enable. When enabled, interface PCF-BSF (NF Tab - NF Consumer) becomes available for input.

When PCF (Npcf) is enabled, To UDR (N36) becomes available to enable. When enabled, interface PCF-UDR (Pcf to Udr NF Tabbecomes available for input.

When PCF (Npcf) and Roaming Scenario with SEPP are enabled , To H-PCF (N24) becomes available to enable. When enabled, interface PCF-PCF (NF Tab - NF Consumer) becomes available for input. SUT is PCF (N24) SBI.

N24 interface is for roaming scenarios, V-PCF will forward Npcf_UEPolicyControl Create/Update/Delete/Get request got from AMF to H-PCF, H-PCF sends Npcf_UEPolicyControl Create/Update/Delete/Get response to V-PCF, and then V-PCF forward these response to AMF.

For UpdateNotify request, H-PCF sends Npcf_UEPolicyControl UpdateNotify to V-PCF, V-PCF sends response back to H-PCF, and V-PCF relays UpdateNotify to AMF, AMF sends response to V-PCF.

Tcl Parameter: PcfEn

Tcl Parameter: VisitPcfEn

Tcl Parameter: NpcfNbsfEn

Tcl Parameter: N36En

Tcl Parameter: N24En

NSSF (Nnssf)

Select to emulate NSSF (Nnssf)- Network Slice Selection Function (NSSF). Interface Nnssf (Nnssf NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. NSSF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: NssfEn

CHF (Nchf)  

Select to emulate CHF (Nchf)- Charging Function (Nchf). Interface Nchf (Nchf NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. CHF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: ChfEn

NRF (Nnrf)

Select to emulate NRF (Nnrf)- NF Repository Function. Interface Nnrf (NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. NRF SBI Node is available for input. 

To NRF (N27)

The SUT is NRF SBI, select for (NRF) N27 interface support on visited NRF (vNRF), emulated by SBA Node, to realize the message flow below for communication between vNRF and home NRF (hNRF).

Interface Nnrf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and Nnrf-Client (NF Tab - NF Consumer)becomes available for input. NRF SBI Node is available for input.

Available to select when NRF Interface is enabled.

Spec Reference:

  • 3GPP TS 23.501 (Rel 16): System Architecture for the 5G System; Stage 2
  • 3GPP TS 23.502 (Rel 16): Procedures for the 5G System; Stage 2
  • 3GPP TS 29.510 (Rel 16): Network function repository services; Stage 3
  • GSMA NG.113: 5G Roaming Guidelines

Tcl Parameter: N27En

To NRF in Same PLMN

Available to select when NRF Interface is enabled. Select for NRF to NRF Registration and Deregistration as described in sections 5.2.2.2.2 & 5.2.2.2.3 & 5.2.2.2.4 of TS 29.510.

When enabled, NRF register to NRF In Same PLMN Delay (s) becomes available in the Nnrf Client.

Interface Nnrf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and Nnrf-Client (NF Tab - NF Consumer)becomes available for input. NRF SBI Node is available for input. The SUT is NRF SBI.

Tcl Parameter: NnrfToNrfEn

Tcl Parameter: NrfEn

LMF (Nlmf)

Select to emulate LMF (Nlmf)- Location Management Function. The SUT is AMF SBI. Interface Nlmf (NF Tab - NF Producer), LMF-AMF (NF Tab - NF Consumer) and LCS (Lpp and NRPPa Tab) become available for input. LMF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: LmfEn

NEF (Nnef) Select to emulate NEF (Nnef)- Network Exposure Function. Interface Nnef (NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. NEF SBI Node is available for input.
Enable Northbound

Select Enable Northbound - Network Exposure Function (NEF) Northbound Function (NB). Interfaces Nnef (NF Tab - NF Producer) and  NnefNb (NF Tab - NF Producer) become available for input. NEF SBI Node and NEF NB SBI Node are 

are available for input.

Per Spec reference : 29.122 

Tcl Parameter: NnefNbEn

To AMF (N51) The SUT is AMF SBI, select to AMF (N51)- Access and Mobility Function. Interface Nnef (NF Tab - NF Producer) and NEF-AMF (NF Tab - NF Consumer) becomes available for input. NEF SBI Node is available for input. Tcl Parameter: N51En
To SMF (N29) The SUT is SMF SBI, select To SMF (N29)- Session Management function. Interface Nnef (NF Tab - NF Producer) and NEF-SMF (NF Tab - NF Consumer) becomes available for input. NEF SBI Node is available for input. Tcl Parameter: N29En
To UDM (N52)

The SUT is UDM SBI, select To UDM (N52)- Unified Data Management Function Interface Nnef (NF Tab - NF Producer) and NEF-UDM (NF Tab - NF Consumer) becomes available for input. NEF SBI Node is available for input.

Limitation : We support Nudm_EventExposure service on N52 interface, we do not support Nudm_UECM service on N52 interface yet.

Tcl Parameter: N52En

To UDR (N37)

The SUT is UDR SBIselect To UDR (N37)- Unified Data Management Function Interface Nnef (NF Tab - NF Producer) and NEF-UDR (NF Tab - NF Consumer) becomes available for input. NEF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: N37En

To BSF/PCF (Nbsf/N30)

The SUT is PCF SBI and SUT is BSF SBI , select To BSF/PCF (Nbsf/N30) - Binding Support Function (BSF) and Policy Control Function. Interfaces Nnef (NF Tab - NF Producer) , NnefNb (NF Tab - NF Producer) , NEF-PCF (NF Tab NF Consumer) ,and NEF-BSF (NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. NEF SBI Node and NEF NB SBI Node are available for input.

Per Spec reference : 29.122 

Tcl Parameter: NnefNbsfN30En

To SMS-SC (T4)

The SUT is SMS-SC , select To SMS-SC (T4) - Short Message Service - Service Center - Device Triggering procedure using T4 reference. Interfaces Nnef (NF Tab - NF Producerand NEF-T4 (Diameter Tab) become available for input. NEF SBI Node and NEF T4 Node are available for input.

 

Tcl Parameter: T4En

To CAPIF-3/4/5

The SUT is CAPIF-3/4/5select To Common API Framework (CAPIF) Platform. Interface Nnef (NF Tab - NF Producer) and NEF-CAPIF (NF Tab - NF Consumer) becomes available for input. NEF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: NnefNcapifEn

  Tcl Parameter: NefEn
GMLC (Ngmlc)

Select to emulate GMLC (Ngmlc)- Gateway Mobile Location Center Function. The SUT is AMF SBI. Interface Ngmlc (NF Tab - NF Producer)and GMLC-AMF (Gmlc To Amf NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. GMLC SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: GmlcEn

SMSF (Nsmsf)

Select to emulate SMSF (Nsmsf)- Short Message Service Function. The SUT is AMF SBI. Interface Nsmsf (NF Tab - NF Producer)and SMSF-AMF (NF Tab - NF Consumer), SMS Tab  become available for input. SMSF SBI Node is available for input.

To UDM (N21)

The SUT is UDM SBI, select To UDM (N21)- Unified Data Management Function Interface Nsmsf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and SMSF-UDM (NF Tab - NF Consumer) becomes available for input. SMSF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: N21En

Tcl Parameter: SmsfEn

SCP

Select to emulate SCP- Service Communication Proxy. DNS is available for input. Interface SCP (SCP-NF Tab) and SCP-NF (SCP Tab)  become available for input. SCP SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: ScpEn

UDR (Nudr)

Select to emulate UDR - Unified Data Repository. Nudr NF Producer (Nudr NF Tab) becomes available for input. UDR SBI Node is available for input. Reference Document : TS 29.505 v 15.4.0

Tcl Parameter: UdrEn

SLF (Nudr)

Select to emulate SLF- Subscription Locator Function. Nudr (SLF) NF Producer (Nudr NF Tab)  become available for input. SLF SBI Node is available for input. Indirect Communication is disabled when SLF (Nudr) is enabled. Reference Document : TS 29.504 Section 5.3

Tcl Parameter: SlfEn

BSF (Nbsf)

Select to emulate BSF (Nbsf)- Binding Support Function (BSF). Interface Nbsf (NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. BSF SBI Node is available for input. Also available on DRA Node test case.

Tcl Parameter: BsfEn

CBCF

Select to emulate CBCF - Cell Broadcast Center Function (CBCF). Interface Ncbcf (http2 Server) and CBCF-AMF (PWS, NGAP, NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. CBCF SBI Node is available for input. Reference Document : 3GPP TS 23.041

Tcl Parameter: CbcfEn

5G-EIR (N5g-eir)

Select to emulate 5G-EIR (Neir)- Equipment Identity Registry. Interface Neir (NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. 5G-EIR SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: EirEn

CAPIF CF (Ncapifcf)

Select to emulate the CAPIF (Common API Framework). It is responsible for mutual authentication, service and API discovery and invoking the API. CAPIF core function: This authenticates the API invoker, authorises invoker before using API services, publishes and stores API information along with charging and logs.

API Publishing Function based on CAPIF-4 reference point. Interface Ncapifcf (NF Tab - NProducer) becomes available for input. CAPIF-3/4/5 SBI Node is available for input. Spec Reference : 29.222

Supported functions between NEF and CAPIF Core Function: 

  1. Publish service APIs
  2. Unpublish service APIs
  3. Retrieve service APIs
  4. Update service APIs
  5. Modify Service APIs with merge-patch+JSON

Tcl Parameter: CapifcfEn

NWDAF (Nnwdaf)

Select to emulate Network Data Analytics Function (NWDAF). Interface Nnwdaf (NF Tab - NF Producer) becomes available for input. NWDAF SBI Node is available for input.

Spec reference : 3GPP TS 29.520, 3GPP TS 29.510, 3GPP TS 23.288 (release 16.6.0 (2020-12))

Tcl Parameter: NwdafEn

SEPP

 

(Initiator / Responder)

Select to emulate SEPP (Security and Edge Protection Proxy) on Service Based Node. Added support for both vSEPP and hSEPP emulation, using an option (Initiator / Responder) to indicate if the emulated SEPP initiates the N32-c handshake procedures or not.

The N32 interface is used between the SEPPs of a VPLMN and a HPLMN in roaming scenarios.

N32-c, a control plane interface between the SEPPs for performing initial handshake and negotiating the parameters to be applied for the actual N32 message forwarding.

N32-f, a forwarding interface between the SEPPs which is used for forwarding the communication between the NF service consumer and the NF service producer after applying application level security protection.


a. N32-c interface and Handshake procedures
     i. Security Capability Negotiation Procedure
     ii. Parameter Exchange Procedure
            1. Cipher Suite Negotiation
            2. Protection Policy Exchange
            3. Security Information List Exchange
b. N32-f Context Termination Procedure
c. N32-f connection establishment and release

N32-c Interface:

N32-f Interface:

Reference: 

  • 3GPP TS 23.501 V16.7.0 (2020-12)
  • 3GPP TS 23.502 V16.7.0 (2020-12)
  • 3GPP TS 29.500 V16.6.0 (2020-12)
  • 3GPP TS 29.573 V16.5.0 (2020-12)
  • 3GPP TS 33.501 V16.5.0 (2020-12)
  • 3GPP TS 23.003 V16.5.0 (2020-12)
  • RFC 7518
  • RFC 7468

Interface pSEPP N32-c ( NF Tab - NF Producer), cSEPP N32-c ( NF Tab - NF Consumer), pSEPP N32-f (http2 Server), cSEPP N32-c (http2 Server), become available for input. SEPP N32-c SBI Node and SEPP N32-f SBI Node  become available for input. The SUT is SEPP N32-c SBI and SUT is SEPP N32-f SBI.

When SEPP is enabled, Interface SEPP-NF NF Tab - NF Consumer) and Interface SEPP NF Tab - NF Consumerbecome available for input along with SEPP to NF SBI Node.

Tcl Parameter: SeppEn

Tcl Parameter: SeppRole

SMF

Select to emulate SMF (Nsmf)- Session Management Function (SMF) in support of N16 interface with SEPP. Interface Nsmf (Nsmf NF Tab) becomes available for input. SMF SBI Node is available for input. 

Tcl Parameter: SmfEn

NRF Interface

Select to test the NF Repository Function (NRF).  The SUT is NRF SBI. Interface Nnrf Client. See additional details in Service Based Nodal - NRF Interface. For Node side, all the emulated NF nodes (as NF service producer role) need to register themselves to the pre- configured NRF nodes via NF service registration procedure. Also available on DRA Node and DRA Node test case.

Tcl Parameter: NrfIntfEn

Generate TLS Key Log Files

Select to generate TLS Encryption Key Logs for Service Based Nodal and Node. Used in all HTTP/2 TLS connections.

Tcl Parameter: TlsKeyLogFileEn

Message Flow

Select to enable the Message Flow Interface tab.

Tcl Parameter: MessageFlowEn

Roaming Scenario with SEPP

Select for Roaming scenario with SEPP. Available in both Service Based Nodal and Service Based Node and AMF /SMF Node test cases. Available in AMF Node TC when Support Roaming and (N8 Interface or N12 Interface) are enabled.

In Service Based Nodal testing, H-AMF is configurable only if "Roaming Scenario with SEPP" is checked, and Test UDM → From AMF (N8) or Test AUSF → From AMF (N12) is checked. It is mutually exclusive with Test NSSF → From AMF (N22). When enabled, interfaces Target Namf and Target AMF-UDM/Target AMF-AUSF become available. Target AMF SBI Node and SUT H-UDM/H-AUSF/H-NRF/H-SCP. In the roaming scenario with N8 or N12 interface enabled, the existing AMF node emulates the vAMF in visiting network, and registration procedure on visiting network is supported. When "H-AMF" is checked, both vAMF and hAMF are emulated, registration with mobility can be supported - registration on visiting network first, then move back to home network and Register. NOTE: When "H-AMF" is checked, there is a constraint for "Number of Subscribers": [Number of Subscribers] * 2 <= licensed session number. 

N32-f message forwarding procedures 
a. Support N32-f message forwarding procedure
   i. Message forwarding when TLS is selected
   ii. Message forwarding when PRINS is selected 
      1. Message reformat/recover at SEPP
      2. Support emulating intermediary IPX modifying message
b. N32-f Error Reporting Procedure over N32-c
c. Service Based Nodal/Node – Support to emulate SBI application messages over N32-f
   i. Interfaces supporting inter-PLMN communication (currently supported by LS) 
      1. N8 (AMF-UDM)
      2. N10 (SMF-UDM)
      3. N21 (SMSF-UDM)
      4. N12 (AMF-AUSF)
      5. N24 (vPCF-hPCF)

      6. N27 (vNRF-hNRF)

      7. N21 (SMSF (Nsmsf to UDM (N21)) - Mutually exclusive with UDM, AUSF and N52

      8. N52 (Nnef to UDM (N52))
      9. Indirect communication (message relay between SCP and SEPP) and NRF Interface supported.
  ii. Foreign FQDN to Telescopic FQDN Mapping Procedure (applied for N27(vNRF-hNRF))

If PRINS is negotiated as security mode on N32-f interface, the following testing scenarios are supported.

1.1.2.1. SUT: cSEPP - LS: NF (PLMN A) + pSEPP  + cIPX + pIPX + NF(PLMN B)

1.1.2.2. SUT: pSEPP - LS: NF (PLMN A) + cSEPP  + cIPX + pIPX + NF(PLMN B)

Based on 3GPP spec 33.501, when PRINS is used, the JWE profile shall only support cipher suites A128GCM and A256GCM, the JWS profile shall only support cipher suite ES256.

Interface NF-SEPP NF Tab - NF Consumerbecomes available for input. The SUT is SEPP to NF SBI.

Specification Reference:

  • 3GPP TS 23.501 V16.7.0 (2020-12)
  • 3GPP TS 23.502 V16.7.0 (2020-12)
  • 3GPP TS 29.500 V16.6.0 (2020-12)
  • 3GPP TS 29.573 V16.5.0 (2020-12)
  • 3GPP TS 33.501 V16.5.0 (2020-12)
  • 3GPP TS 23.003 V16.5.0 (2020-12)
  • RFC 7518
  • RFC 7468

Tcl Parameter: RoamSeppEn

Tcl Parameter: hAmfEn

 


^ Back to Top

SGSN Node Test Case

Mobility Support
  • The Handoff Protocol list is available when the Mobility Support radio button is other than none (Inter-SGSN or Intra-SGSN)
  • When Intra-SGSN is the Mobility Support, Protocol and Mobility Protocol must match or a validation error occurs.
  • See also the SUTs enabled and connection established in SGSN Node testing.

 

Intra-HNB GW

Available when Mobility support = Intra-SGSN.

Tcl Parameter: IntraHnbGwEn

Perform Serving RNS Relocation Procedure

The Perform Serving RNS Relocation Procedure is used only when doing a mobility test. When enabled, It will eliminate packet loss during handoff.  For details on how it works please refer to 3GPP TS 23.060 v7.4.0.

Gn Interface

In SGSN Node testing, selecting Gn Interface enables the GGSN SUT, SGSN's GTP Control Node, and the GTP User Node. The GGSN User SUT is optional and enabled when you select the Alternate User Address checkbox.  See the SUTs enabled and connection established in SGSN Node testing.

Load Test PDP Context Only

In SGSN Node TC, use the checkbox to set the session loading level (same as in UMTS Session Loading Test).

  • Select the checkbox to indicate that the session loading cycle begins with PDP context activation and ends with context deactivation. The Session Hold Time begins when the last context is activated, and the Session Pending Time begins when the last context is deactivated. The MNs will remain attached through the life of the test.
  • Clear the checkbox (default) to indicate that the session loading cycle begins with an MN attach and ends with an MN detach. The Session Hold Time begins when the MN is successfully attached, and the MN is detached when the hold time expires. PDP contexts may or may not be included in the test. If they are included, any active contexts are deleted when the hold time expires and then the MN is detached.
Round Robin SGSN

The Round Robin SGSN supports UMTS IuPS Flex testing with multiple SGSNs. When the Round Robin SGSN checkbox is disabled, all MNs are forced to attach to the first SGSN node (supports the IuFlex functionality).

NOTE: During SGSN Node testing, Round Robin SGSN is not available when you select Protocol as GPRS on SGSN Node Emulator Configuration tab.

PGW Gn Interface

PGW Gn Interface is available when UMTS version is 7. When you select PGW Gn Interface, the Gn interface tab and test configuration controls are available (similar to GGSN Gn Interface but are mutually exclusive).

Type: True/False

Default: False

Tcl Parameter: PgwGnInterfaceEn

SGW S4 Interface

SGW S4 Interface is available when UMTS version is 8. When you select SGW S4 Interface, S4 > GTPv2 interface tab is enabled for configuration.

Type: True/False

Default: False

Tcl Parameter: SgwS4InterfaceEn

Validate IMEIs and IMSIs

Select to indicate SGSN sends Attach Reject with wrong IMSI or IMEI.

Type: True/False

Default: False

Tcl Parameter: ValidateImeiImsiEn

 

Deactivate PDP after RAU

Available when Mobility Support is Inter-SGSN or Intra-SGSN to support PDP Context Reactivation (deactivates contexts with cause code as reactivation required). You may also configure the deactivation interval and specify whether to perform one time deactivation process or continuous process.

Tcl Parameter: DeactivatePdpAfterRauEn

Gr Interface

Available when Protocol = UMTS and Mobility support = None. Defines the mapping and transport layers between SGSN and HSS/HLR Node.

Tcl Parameter: GrInterfaceEn

 

^ Back to Top


SGW Testing

Initial Network

Select the Initial Network from the dropdown list. This option is available when Test Activity is Inter Technology Mobility or Command Mode and HSGW Nodal Emulation is not selected.

Initial Network indicates where the UE will initially attach / register. 

Select the Handoff Protocol below to indicate the "Target" network.

For example: Initial Network = LTE , Handoff Protocol = GPRS (which is the Target). The UEs will initially attach / register to LTE then handoff to GPRS. 

The F2 Help key has been enhanced to indicate which network is the Target.

Options: LTE, or one of the Target Handoff Protocol options (UMTS (IuPS over IP). UMTS (IuCS & IuPS over IP), GPRS, eHRPD, WiFi) 

Default: LTE

NOTES:

  • When Test Option is Inter Technology Mobility and UMTS Version is 8, depending on the Initial Network, the primary tab name corresponds to the initial network selection and the target tab name to the interface receiving the handoff.

  • Initial Network is LTE: Tabs displayed are S11/S5 and Target S4/S5

  • Initial Network is UMTS: Tabs displayed are S4/S5 and Target S11/S5

  • Initial Network is not available when Test Activity is Command Mode and HSGW Nodal Emulation is not selected.

  • If Initial Network is Target, all Mobile Nodes are distributed on the first HSGW node instead of using Round Robin scheduling.

Handoff Protocol

In SGW Nodal testing, the Handoff Protocol option (UMTS (IuPS over IP). UMTS (IuCS & IuPS over IP), GPRS, eHRPD, WiFi) is available only when the Test Activity is Inter Technology Mobility.

  • When Handoff Protocol is UMTS and UMTS Version is 7 the PGW Node Emulation, HSS Interface, and SGW Relocation selections are not available.

  • When the Handoff Protocol is eHRPD, S2a interface testing uses IPSec protocols and an Ethernet physical layer. Use the PMIPv6 to define the interface. In addition, the following applies when eHRPD is the handoff protocol:

  • UMTS Version, PGW Node Emulation, and SGW Relocation selections are not available.

  • WiFi: Supports for Wi-Fi to 4G mobility handoff. The SGW Nodal test case supports testing both a Wi-Fi Offload Gateway and SGW to verify Wi-Fi to LTE Mobility functionality between the two devices.

NOTE: Inter Technology Mobility hands off to UMTS, GPRS, eHRPD, or WiFi are controlled by license and if your system is not licensed with UMTS, GPRS, or eHRPD, the options will not be visible.

Handoff Type

In SGW Nodal testing, different Handoff types are available depending on the Test Activity you select from the drop-down list. The Handoff Type determines signaling.

Options:  TAU/RAU, INTER RAT

Default: TAU/RAU

Tcl Parameter: HandoffType

TAU/RAU: Indicates that the handoff Routing Area Update procedure takes place when a UE registered with an MME selects a UTRAN or GERAN cell served by a Gn/Gp SGSN. In this case, the UE changes to a Routing Area that the UE has not yet registered with the network.

INTER RAT: Indicates the Interoperation procedures takes place for Gn SGSNs and other EPS network elements— between SGSN and UE, between MME and eNodeB.

  • Test Activity is Inter-MME Mobility or Session Loading With Mobility

Options:  S1, TAU/RAU

Default: S1

Tcl Parameter: HandoffType

  • Test Activity is Intra-MME Mobility or Session Loading With Mobility

Options:  X2, S1, TAU/RAU, Dual Connectivity

Default: S1

Tcl Parameter: HandoffType

Dual Connectivity: Indicates 4G to 5G dual connectivity - phase I. The SGW Nodal will handover between 4G eNodeB and 5G gNodeB. The gNodeB User Node becomes available in Network devices tab. The eNodeB User Node is not available for input.

Options:  TAU/RAU, RNS Relocation

Default: TAU/RAU

Tcl Parameter: HandoffType

NOTES:

  • The S1 handoff type supports GTPv2 Indirect Forwardings for any LTE mobility test in addition to Release 8 Inter-Technology with Inter-RAT handoff type.
  • The TAU/RAU handoff type for Inter-MME and Intra-MME supports support TAU/RAU handoff in idle mode. (Handoff type TAU/RAU simulates a UE connecting to the network/eNodeB, going idle for the specified time, moving from one Tracking Area to another, and re-establishing with the network to a different eNodeB with a different TA.)

UMTS Version

Use the drop-down list to select the LTE release version that will be used in the test.

Options:  7 or 8

Default: 7

Tcl Parameter: UmtsVersion

NOTES:
  • In SGW Nodal test case, when Test Activity = Inter Technology Mobility, UMTS Version = 7 and Initial Network = Target you may specify Home Address Type per Default Bearers on the Mobile subscriber pane as the Home Address Type options are not available.
  • When Test Options is Inter Technology Mobility and UMTS Version is Release 7, the SGW Nodal test sessions hand off between MME and SGSN but SGSN connects to PGW via Gn interface. PDP type and Gn interface are the same as in GGSN Nodal test case and supports GTPv1.
  • In SGW Nodal testing, PMIPv6 is available only UMTS is Release 8 and the Test Options is Inter Technology Mobility.
  • PGW Node Emulation is not available with Inter Technology Mobility and UMTS Version is Release 7.
  • When Test Options is Inter Technology Mobility and UMTS Version is Release 8, the SGW Nodal test sessions hand off between MME and SGSN. MME connects to SGW with S11 and SGSN connects to SGW with S4.

LTE Serving Node In SGW Nodal testing, use the dropdown list to emulate SGSN or MME as from the Serving Node. For mobility tests, the Serving Node selection is forced to MME.

S5/S8 Protocol

 

The S5/S8 Protocol allows you to select PMIPv6 or GTPv2 protocols.

During SGW Nodal testing, select:

  • GTPv2 protocol to enable control layer protocol between the emulated ENodeB<->MME and SGW SUT via the S11/S5 interface. Define GTPV2 settings on the GTPv2 Tab.
  • PMIPv6 protocol to enable IPv4 or IPv6 transport between SGW and PGW via the S5/S8 interface. Define PMIPv6 settings on the PMIPv6 Tab.
NOTE: During SGW Nodal testing, eHRPD Hand Over is performed only if S5/S8 Protocol is PMIPv6 during Inter-Technology Mobily or Command Mode testing.

During SGW Node testing, select:

  • GTPv2 protocol and define control layer settings via the S11/S4/S5/S8 interface. Define GTPV2 protocol settings on the GTPv2 Tab.
  • PMIPv6 protocol and define transport layer settings via the S5/S8 interface and GTPv2 protocol settings via S11/S4 interface. Define PMIPv6 settings on the PMIPv6 Tab.

Transport is available when PMIPv6 is selected. The Transport selection controls the PGW SUT lists on the Network Devices Tab:

  • when IPv6 transport is selected only the PGW IPv6 SUT is available.

  • when IPv4 transport is selected both the PGW IPv6 and PGW IPv4 SUTs are available.

S2a Protocol

Available when the Test Activity is Inter-Technology Mobility and the Handoff Protocol = eHRPD.

Sxa Interface to UP or Sxa+Sxb Interface to UP

Select for the Sxa Interface to the Control and User Plane function in a split SGW Architecture. The Sxa Interface with the PFCP (Packet Forwarding Control Protocol) tab becomes available for input. The Sxa Control Node and Sxa Control GTP Node become available. The SGW User Node is disabled as well as the SGW S5 User node (if Separate S5 Interfaces is enabled).

When PGW Node Emulation is enabled, the Sxa+Sxb Interface with the Sxa+Sxb Interface with the PFCP (Packet Forwarding Control Protocol) tab become available for input.

Sxa to UP becomes available in Network Devices SUT for input. Enter the: Sxa User Node SUT, Sxa User GTP Node SUT, SGW User Node SUT. Up to 10 SUTs are supported. If Separate S5 Interfaces is enabled, the SGW S5 User Node SUT is available for input.  

Sxa+Sxb to UP becomes available in Network Devices SUT when PGW Node emulation is enabled along with Sxa Interface to UP. Enter the: Sxa+Sxb User Node SUT, Sxa+Sxb User GTP Node SUT, SGW User Node SUT. Up to 10 SUTs are supported. The Sxa+Sxb Control GTP Node and Sxa+Sxb Control Node become available.

GTPv2 Version must be > 8.0.0. Available on SGW Node test case.

See TS 23.214 for Architecture enhancements for Control and User plane separation of EPC Nodes.

See TS 29.244 for Interface specifications between the Control plane and User plane of EPC Nodes.

Tcl Parameter: SxaToSgwUEn

Sxa Interface to CP or Sxa+Sxb Interface to CP

Select for the Sxa Interface to the Control and User Plane function in a split SGW Architecture. The Sxa Interface with the PFCP (Packet Forwarding Control Protocol) tab becomes available for input. The Sxa User GTP Node and Sxa User Node become available.

When PGW Node Emulation is enabled, the Sxa+Sxb Interface with the PFCP (Packet Forwarding Control Protocol) tab become available for input. The Sxa+Sxb User GTP Node and Sxa+Sxb User Node become available.

Available on SGW Node test case.

See TS 23.214 for Architecture enhancements for Control and User plane separation of EPC Nodes.

See TS 29.244 for Interface specifications between the Control plane and User plane of EPC Nodes.

Tcl Parameter: SxaToSgwCEn

PGW Node Emulation

Select PGW Node Emulation checkbox for control node availability (Bearer IP Address Pool is only available when emulation is on). The PGW Node Emulation checkbox is not available when Test Activity is Inter Technology Mobility or Command Mode.

See also Network Devices tab for the SUTs and Node configuration enabled.

During SGW Node testing, Bearer IP Address Pool is only available when you select PGW Node Emulation. The PGW Node Emulation checkbox is not available when you select Separate S5 Interface.

 

Data IPSec

Select to use IPSec to encrypt Data Traffic. Define IPSec parameters on the Data IPSec tab. The Data IPSec option is not available if Default Bearers per Session > 1.

Separate S5 Interface

During SGW Node testing, Separate S5 Interface is available when S5/S8 Protocol is GTPv2 and when PGW Node Emulation checkbox is not selected.

Select Separate S5 Interface to configure control and user node settings to test user plane tunneling and tunnel management between Serving GW and PGW.

Tcl Parameter: SeparateS5InterfaceEn

Same GTP-C TEID per MN on S11

During SGW Node testing, available when Separate S5 Interface is enabled. Select for same GTP-C TEID per MN on the S11 interface.

"There shall be only one pair of TEID-C per UE over the S11 and S4 interfaces. The same tunnel is shared for the control messages related to the same UE operation." - Per 3GPP 29.274 Chapter 4.1 specification.

Tcl Parameter: SameGtpcTeidS11En

HSS Interface

In SGW Nodal testing, selecting the HSS Interface checkbox to enable the S6a interface. This parameter is not available when Test Activity is Inter Technology Mobility and UMTS Version is 7.

The HSS SUT via the S6a interface enables transfer of subscription and authentication data for authenticating/authorizing user access to the evolved system (AAA interface) between HSS and MME. It also allows you to define the connection management settings for reliable transport over IP via the SCTP tab.

On the S6a, and S6d tabs of SGW Nodal, disabled the Authentication fields for Secret Key and Operator Variant.  In Location Information, disabled the Mobile Country Code and Mobile Network Code.

NOTES:

  • The HSS and EIR Interfaces are not available if any of the following conditions are true:

  • Test Activity is Inter-Technology,  Handoff Protocol is UMTS/GPRS with UMTS version 7
  • Test Activity is Inter-Technology,  Handoff Protocol is Wifi
  • GTPv2 Version is 8.0.0
  • LTE Relay UE is enabled

 

PGW Gx Interface

The PGW Gx Interface checkbox is available only when the PGW Node Emulation checkbox is selected in the SGW Nodal Test Case. Select the PGW Gx Interface checkbox to add a PCRF SUT (on the Network Devices tab) and the Gx interface tab.

EIR Interface

In SGW Nodal test case, when you select EIR Interface and LTE Serving Node as MME S13 interface tab is available for configuration.

When you select LTE Serving Node as SGSN and EIR Interface, then S13’ interface tab is available.  By default, EIR Interface is not selected.

NOTES:

  • The MME/SGSN sends an Equipment Check Request to the EIR via S13/S13’ interface.

  • The HSS and EIR Interfaces are not available if any of the following conditions are true:

  • Test Activity is Inter-Technology,  Handoff Protocol is UMTS/GPRS with UMTS version 7
  • Test Activity is Inter-Technology,  Handoff Protocol is Wifi
  • GTPv2 Version is 8.0.0
  • LTE Relay UE is enabled

 

S1-U IPSec

In SGW Nodal testing, you can use the S1-U IPSec checkbox to encrypt traffic between the eNodeB and the Serving Gateway. See S1 IPSec tab for IPSec parameters.

The Target S1-U IPSec checkbox is available when Test Activity is Session Loading with Mobility, Inter-MME, and Intra-MME.

SGW Relocation

In SGW Nodal test case, the SGW Relocation checkbox is available for Inter Technology Mobility and Inter-MME Mobility test activity. With these settings, you are also allowed to configure Target eNodeB User Node, Target SGSN Control Node and Target MME Control Node.

When the Test Options are Inter Technology Mobility and you select SGW Relocation, the SGSN connects to Target SGW and Direct Tunnel may be selected. The GTPv2 tab displays Target Bearer Settings with handoff settings for ULI and QOS.

SGW Relocation is not available when the Test Activity is Inter-SGSN Mobility and handoff type is Tau/Rau.

Billing (SGW)

In SGW Nodal test case, the Billing is available only when PGW Node Emulation is selected.  Select Billing and then Ga or Rf:

  • Select Ga to define the Ga>GTP' billing data record information
  • Select Rf (Offline Charging Reference Point between a 3G network element and the CDF) to define Rf>CTF account settings triggered via charging function.

UE Initiates Dedicated Bearers

In SGW Node testing, UE Initiates Dedicated Bearers is available only when S5/S8 Protocol is GTPv2, PGW Node Emulation is selected, and the number of Dedicated Bearers is > 0.  

Circuit Switched Fallback

During SGW Nodal testing, the Circuit Switched Fallback (CSFB) is available when Test Activity is:

  • Inter-Technology Mobility, Handoff Protocol is UMTS or GPRS
  • Session Loading with Mobility with Mobility Type as Inter Technology and Handover Protocol is GPRS.
NOTE: Circuit Switch Fallback is available only when Initial Network is LTE and SGW relocation is not selected and not available when Handoff Protocol is eHRPD (for Teat Activity Inter-Technology Mobility and Session Loading with Mobility).
  • Command Mode or Sequencer and SGSN Node Emulation is selected.

If VoLTE is enabled, Circuit Switched Fallback is disabled and vice versa.

Tcl Parameter: EnbCsfbEn

NOTE: The CSFB handoff is triggered in the idle state via a paging request from the MME or via a service request from the UE. To test UE terminated CSFB, you must configure the page to occur before the CSFB handoff timer expires. If not, the system performs a UE originated CSFB.

Landslide also supports CSFB supports UMTS Version 8 CSFB and UMTS Version 7 CSFB.

 

DTM Support

During SGW Nodal Testing, DTM (Dual Transfer Mode) Support is available when Circuit Switched Fallback is selected and Handoff Protocol is GPRS (not available when Handoff Protocol is UMTS or eHRPD.).

When the DTM Support is not selected the traffic data is not transferred after the session HO to GERAN.

Tcl Parameter: CsfbDTMSupportEn

HSGW Node Emulation

HSGW Node Emulation is available only if your system is licensed and when Test Activity is Command Mode. HSGW Node Emulation is selected by default when the S5/S8 Protocol is GTPv2 or PMIPv6. When you select HSGW Node Emulation, you are required to configure the PGW S2a SUT and Target HSGW Node on the Network Devices tab.

Tcl Parameter: HsgwNodeEn

SGSN Node Emulation

Available if you system has SGSN license and when Test Activity is Command Mode or Sequencer.

When you select SGSN Node Emulation, the Handoff Protocol is either GPRS or UMTS and Circuit Switched Fallback is selected by default.

Clearing Circuit Switch Fallback when SGSN Node Emulation is selected, greys DTM Support parameter.

NOTE:

  • SGSN Node Emulation and HSGW Node Emulation are mutually exclusive. That is, you cannot select SGSN Node Emulation when HSGW Node Emulation is already selected.  
  • SGSN Node Emulation and ePDG Node Emulation are mutually exclusive when UMTS Version = 7.
  • SGSN Node Emulation and ePDG Node Emulation is allowed when UMTS version = 8.

Tcl Parameter: SgsnNodeEn

When you select SGSN Node Emulation, the following options are available for selection.

  • Initial network: LTE, UMTS, GPRS
  • UMTS Version: 7, 8
  • Direct Tunnel. If you selecting Direct Tunnel, RNC User Node is available for configuration on the Network Devices tab.
  • TFT Settings on Mobile Subscriber pane

In addition, PGW GN SUT and SGSN Control Node on Network Devices tab and Gn interface tab are is available for configuration.

SWm Interface

The SWm Interface checkbox is enabled when ePDG Node Emulation is selected. This feature requires Command Mode and WiFi Offload Gateway licenses in order to be visible.

The SWm interface is defined between the ePDG (Evolved Packet Data Gateway) and the 3GPP AAA server or between the ePDG and the 3GPP AAA Proxy for non-trusted non-3GPP access to EPS.

The AAA- Diameter SUT and Target ePDG SWm Node on Network Devices tab and SWm interface tab are available for configuration.

 

Tcl Parameter: SwmIfEn

VoLTE

Available when test Activity is Capacity, Command Mode, Sequencer, Intra-MME Mobility, Inter-MME Mobility, Session Loading or Session Loading with Mobility when mobility type is Inter-MME or Intra-MME.

NOTES:
  • UE Initiates Dedicated Bearers is not available when VoLTE is selected during LTE Mobility test activity. That is, when you select VoLTE and test activity is Intra-MME Mobility, Inter-MME Mobility or Session Loading with Mobility when mobility type is Inter-MME or Intra-MME.
  • If VoLTE is enabled, Circuit Switched Fallback is disabled and vice versa.

 

Select to test the IMS VoLTE feature which supports SIP and RTP-based Voice over in SGW Nodal test case. You are required to configure the following:

SRVCC

Available if you have IMS license. When SRVCC is enabled, the I2 Interface becomes available.

Tcl Parameter: SrvccEn

SRVCC is available and when you select VoLTE.

SRVCC is available only when Test Activity is Inter-Technology Mobility and

  • The Handoff Protocol is set to UMTS (IuCS & IuPS Over IP)
  • UMTS Version is 8
  • Initial Network is LTE
  • S5/S8 Protocol is GTPv2
  • GTPv2 Version is >= 10.6.0 (on GTPv2 tab)

NOTE: When this VoLTE and SRVCC are selected, the following are not available:

Handoff Type, UE Initiates Dedicated Bearers, SGW Relocation, Circuit Switched Fallback, and Billing

When PGW sends a Create Dedicated Bearer Request, it attaches a vSRVCC indicator for the Video Bearer (identified via avp_ims3gppPsToCsSessionContinuity_c). This AVP is added to RAR msg/Charging-Rule-Definition AVP while processing AAR msg from IMS Node; this AVP is also added when the received media type is VIDEO (AAR).

During handover from 4G to 3G RTP/RTCP traffic for both voice and video is stopped and SIP call is internally released (terminated). IMS Node releases access call leg; the trigger is provided by PCRF Af application (Rx/RAR) that notifies bearer resources release.

After Handoff back from 3G to 4G SIP traffic is resumed, that is, SIP call is re-established.

NOTE: VoLTE Traffic start will be restricted to "When User Registered" for VoLTE with SRVCC.

 

I2 Interface

Enable the I2 Interface -  to/from the MSC to IMS for SIP portion of VoLTE calls after SRVCC Handover.  

ePDG Node Emulation

ePDG Node Emulation is available only if your system is licensed and when Test Activity is Command Mode or Sequencer. Select ePDG Node Emulation is selected by default when the S5/S8 Protocol is GTPv2 or PMIPv6. When you select ePDG Node Emulation, you are required to configure the PGW S2b  SUT and Target ePDG Control and User Nodes on the Network Devices tab and GTPv2 tab on the S2b interface.

When you select ePDG Node Emulation, S2b interface is available when S5/S8 Protocol is GTPv2 or PMIPv6.

Emergency PDNs (SGW)

Indicates support for IMS Emergency Session (Emergency PDN) and is available if your system is licensed.

When enabled the Emergency PDN feature allows you to specify a subset of the UEs to be designated as emergency callers and may be identified by contiguous or non-contiguous IMSIs.

  • Emergency PDN Index: Select Emergency PDN Index and enter a value between 1 and 10 to indicate number of default bearers designated as emergency callers.

Type: True/False

Default: False

Tcl Parameters:

EmergencyPdnIndexEn

EmergencyPdnIndex

Range 0 - 10

Default: 0

NOTE: The value entered cannot be equal to or greater than the number of default bearers.
  • Emergency Attach with IMEI: Select to indicate that emergency attach with International Mobile Equipment Identity

Type: True/False

Default: False

Tcl Parameter: EmergencyAttachEn

  • Emergency Attach Without Authentication:  Select to indicate emergency attach without authentication.

Type: True/False

Default: False

Tcl Parameter: EmergencyAttachWoAuthEn

AP Tunnel Type In SGW Nodal test case, Tunnel Type options are: GRE L2 only. Available when Handoff Protocol = WiFi.  

 APN DNS Lookup

Select to enable support for NAPTR Queries - Disabled when PGW Node Emulation is enabled.

SGW Anchoring

Available when APN DNS Lookup is enabled and Default Bearers per Session is > 1.

Select for SGW Anchoring with DNS Query. In this scenario, the subsequent NAPTR queries only ask for PGW and the previous SGW IP is used.

Tcl Parameter: SgwAnchorEn

SGW Load Balancing

Available in SGW Node Emulator Configuration. Select for SGW Load balancing.

Enter SGW Node Index.

Range: 1 to 1000

Default: 1

Tcl Parameter: SgwLoadBalanceEn

Tcl Parameter: SgwNodeIndex

WiFi Offload Node Emulation

Available when your system is licensed for Command Mode/Sequencer. Select to enable AP Tunnel Type and AP/SSID and GRE Interface/Tabs. If AP tunnel Type = None, UE-ePDG IPsec and VoLTE are enabled.

Enable NetLoc Mode

Select to enable Network Location. Available when PGW Gx Interface is selected.

Tcl Parameter: NetLocEn

LTE Relay UE

Select to enable LTE Relay UE support. This is a licensed option. Available when Test Activity = Capacity, Session Loading Test, Command Mode/Sequencer.  S5/S8 protocol must = GTPv2, LTE Serving Node must = MME.

LTE Relay Interface becomes available for configuration.  See Relay UE section in SGW Nodal Test Case.

Changes to the Test Case diagram: UE becomes Relay UE, eNodeB becomes Donor eNodeB, MME becomes Relay MME, SGW becomes Relay SGW and PGW becomes Relay PGW.  

Tcl Parameter: LteRelayUeEn

Disable Re-Attach on ODC

Select to disable recovery behavior of attempting to reattach UEs (via ODC). Used when UEs aren't in the right state or when session is idle. Available when Test Activity = Command Mode or Sequencer.

Tcl Parameter: DisableReAttachOdc

 

High Latency Communication- SGW

Functions for High latency communication may be used to handle mobile terminated (MT) communication with UEs being unreachable while using power saving functions e.g. UE Power Saving Mode or extended idle mode DRX depending on operator configuration. High Latency" refers to the initial response time before normal exchange of packets is established. That is, the time it takes before a UE has woken up from it's power saving state and responded to the initial downlink packet (s). The feature is described in 3GPP TS 23.682 and 3GPP TS 24.302.

Power Saving (T3324)

Select to enable Power Saving (T3324).

Range: 0 to 11660.

Default: 20

Tcl Parameter: T3324PwrSavingValueEn

Tcl Parameter: T3324PwrSavingValue

T3412 Extended Value (s)

This timer controls how frequently the tracking area update request is sent while in Power Saving Mode.

Range: 2 to 35712000

Default: 40

Tcl Parameter: T3412ExValueEn

Tcl Parameter: T3412ExValue

eDRX Value

Select to enable eDRX (extended idle Mode DRX).

The eDRX Parameter consists of two bytes.

  • The MSB specified how long the paging window is (PTW- see table below).
  • The LSB byte is the closed window time during which no Page messages should be sent (eDRX value - see table below).
  • The combination of these two values determines when the MME will attempt to page the UE.

Default: "0x11". - See the breakdown below. Valid values are : 0x00 to (0xff or 0xFF) not case sensitive.

If using the default value of "0x11" for WB-S1, per the tables below, the PTW (value of 1) = 2, 56 seconds and the eDRX (value or 1) = 10, 24 Seconds.

If using the default value of "0x11" for NB-S1, per the tables below, the PTW (value of 1) = 5, 12 seconds and the eDRX (value or 1) = 20, 48 Seconds. (See Note 5 below)

  • The "0x" zero followed by lowercase x , denotes Hex Value (cannot change or delete).   
  • The first value after the x,  corresponds to Paging Time Window (PTW)  - Octet 3 (Bit 8 to 5).  (see table below) Enter 0-9, or A to F
  • The second value after the x,  corresponds to eDRX value - Octet 3 (Bit 4 to 1). (see table below) Enter 0-9, or A to F
  • Tables below are in Binary, you must convert to Hex to enter value in GUI. For example, to select a paging time window length of 17, 92 seconds in WB-S1 mode and an S1 mode eDRX value of 655,36 seconds, you would enter 0xDB.

 

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

 

Extended DRX parameters IEI

octet 1

Length of Extended DRX parameters

octet 2

Paging Time Window

eDRX value

octet 3

                   

 

The PTW Value can be applied to WB-S1 mode (WideBand-IoT) and to NB-S1 mode (NarrowBand-IoT).

 

 

Tcl Parameter: EDrxValueEn

Tcl Parameter: EDrxValue

 

Throttle Information - SGW Nodal

Throttle Data Notification Request

Select Throttle Data Notification Request to enable the SGW Node to support the handling of Data Notification Acknowledge messages with DL low priority traffic Throttling IE received from the SGW Nodal test case emulating the MME (TS 29.274 V15.6.0 Clause 7.2.11.2 and 12.3.3).

 

The Throttling Factor, in the DL low priority traffic Throttling IE which is included in the Downlink Data Notification Acknowledge messages, indicates the number percentage of downlink data messages that the SGW reduces.

Range: 0 to 100

Default : 0

 

The Throttle Delay Time (s) indicates the length of time, in seconds, the SGW will reduce the number percentage of downlink data messages .

Range: 1 to 300

Default : 1

Tcl Parameter: ThrottleDataNotifReqEn

Tcl Parameter: ThrottlingFactor

Tcl Parameter: ThrottleDelayLen

 

 


^ Back to Top

SMF Nodal / Node

Initial Network

Select Initial Network. Available when Test Activity = Inter Technology Mobility in SMF Nodal test case. 

Initial Network indicates where the UE will initially start.

Options: 5GS, LTE
Default : 5GS 

Tcl Variable: InitiateType

Handoff Protocol

Select Handoff Protocol. Available when Test Activity = Inter Technology Mobility in SMF Nodal test case. 

Indicate Target network to handover from 5GS.

Options : LTE (when Test Activity is “Inter Technology Mobility”), None (when Test Activity is “Sequencer” or “Command Mode”)

SMF Nodal will create Gtp Bearers(SGW's role) as many as # of subscribers * # of PDUs and also create GTP Nodes. Each Gtp SGW bearer will be associated with UeSmSession per UE/PDU.

S5 GTPv2 TabSGW Control Node and SGW User Node in Network Devices Tab become available for input. SMF+PGW SUT becomes available for input.

Tcl Variable: HandoffProtocol

Handoff Type

Select Handoff Type. Available when Test Activity = Intra-AMF Mobility, Inter-AMF or Inter Technology Mobility in SMF Nodal test case. gNB User Node and Target gNB User Node and SMF SUT are available for input and Target AMF SBI Node (when Test Activity = Inter-AMF Mobility)

N2 and Mobility Registration Type are supported when Test Activity = Inter-AMF Mobility.

N2 and Xn are supported when Test Activity = Intra-AMF Mobility.

Handover and REG/TAU are supported when Test Activity = Inter Technology Mobility.

Option : Xn, N2 , Mobility Registration Type , Handover , REG/TAU

Tcl Variable: HandoffType

PDU Session Secondary Authentication Select for Secondary Authentication during PDU Session Establishment. Click PDU Session Secondary Authentication to see details in AMF Section. 
Data Traffic

Enables the L3-7 Interface - Data Traffic tab.

NRF Interface

Select to enable the Nnrf Client Interface. NF Tab (NF Consumer - Nnrf Client). NRF SBI SUT becomes available for input. NRF Interface and UDM (N8) interface are mutually exclusive on SMF Nodal Test case. Available on several other 5G test cases including AMF Node and Service Based Nodal/Node.

Tcl Parameter: NrfIntfEn

Vo5G Select to enable Voice over 5G testing.
UDM (N8) Select for N8 (UDM) interface. See additional details in Serviced Based UDM (N8) Section. NRF Interface and UDM (N8) interface are mutually exclusive on SMF Nodal Test case.
Fireball

Select to enable Fireball testing.

UPF Node Emulation

Select for UPF Node Emulation. The N4 (PFCP ) and N6 (N6 Data Traffic) interfaces become available as well as UPF N3 Node, ,UPF N4 Node and UPF N4 GTP Node.

SMF SBI SUT becomes available for input.

Also available on the gNB CU SA Nodal test case.

Tcl Parameter: UpfNodeEmulationEn

Support Mobility SBI Sessions

Select whether to create two sets of all SBI Sessions per subscriber for “Inter-AMF Mobility” in Command Mode/Sequencer (Activate Connection, Release Connection, Xn Handover, N2 Handover , Reg Mobility).


In Command Mode/Sequencer, Inter-AMF Mobility is not disabled by default because it requires two sets of all SBI Sessions per subscriber. Two sets of all SBI Sessions per subscriber won’t be created by default in Command Mode/Sequencer.

Available for Command Mode/Sequencer with Handoff Protocol = LTE/None. 

Tcl Parameter: SuptMobSbiSessEn

UE-Requested PDU Session Modification

Additional details in UE-Requested PDU Session Modification (in AMF Nodal section).

PGW-C Emulation

Select for PGW-C Emulation testing.

N7 Interface

 

Traffic Steering

The SUT is PCF SBI, select N7 Interface from SMF (Session Management Function) to PCF (Policy Control Function) . Interface Nsmf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and SMF-PCF (Smf to Pcf NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. SMF SBI Node is available for input.

When N7 is enabled, the NAS - 5g SM DNN Pane the label "QoS Settings" changes to "Subscribed QoS Settings" with limited fields available for capture.

When N7 is enabled, Disconnect Dedicated Bearers after Connected is not available for input.

5G side: Added N11/N7/N4 interworking in support of the following:

1.UE Requested PDU Session Establishment.

Added support of NAS-SM/N11 triggered Npcf_SmPolicyControlCreate request as well as handling of SmPolicyDecision received in Npcf_SmPolicyControlCreate response from PCF. Handling of both session rule and PCC rule installation were added (See limitation 1). QoS flow binding was implemented per 29.513 sec 6.4. Handling of PCF assigned dynamic QFI was also supported.

2.UE Requested PDU Session Release.
Added support of NAS-SM/N11 triggered Npcf_SmPolicyControlDelete request and response.

3. IMS/PCF triggered PDU Session Modification in support of the VoNR or EPS fallback scenario.  
Added handling of SmPolicyDecision received in Npcf_SmPolicyControlUpdateNotify request from PCF (See limitation 1 and 2). 

4G side: Added S11/S5/S8/N7/N4 interworking in support of the following: 

1.UE Requested PDN Connectivity.

Added support of NAS-ESM/S11/S5/S8 triggered Npcf_SmPolicyControlCreate request as well as handling of SmPolicyDecision received in Npcf_SmPolicyControlCreate response from PCF (See limitation 1).

2.UE Initiated PDN Disconnection.
Added support of NAS-ESM/S11/S5/S8 triggered Npcf_SmPolicyControlDelete request and response.

3. IMS/PCF triggered dedicated bearer activation and deactivation in support of the VoLTE or EPS fallback scenario.  
Added handling of SmPolicyDecision received in Npcf_SmPolicyControlUpdateNotify request from PCF (See limitation 1 and 3). 


Spec references: 23.501, 23.502, 29.512, 29.513, 29.514, 23.503, 29.571 and 29.244

Limitations:
1.There are areas not yet supported. For example, condition data and usage monitoring are not yet supported for session rules. For PCC rules, charging, traffic control, condition data , usage monitoring and Reflective QoS are not yet supported.
2. For PCC rule installation, only supports creation of new QoS flow(s). For PCC rule removal, only supports removal of entire QoS flow(s). PCC rule updates are not supported. Updates to existing QoS flow(s) (adding/removing a QoS rule, etc) are not supported.
3. For PCC rule installation, only supports creation of new dedicated bearer(s). For PCC rule removal, only supports removal of entire dedicated bearer(s). PCC rule updates are not supported. Updates to existing dedicated bearer(s) are not supported.
 

When N7 Interface is enabled, Traffic Steering checkbox becomes available for selection. When enabled, the DNAI on Nas 5G Sm tab and the DNAI on N4 tab become available for input.

Enable Traffic Steering for :

  • The ULCL and PSA addition/removal triggered by PCF via N7 interface based on Section 4.3.5.4 and 4.3.5.5 of 3GPP TS 23.502 and Section 4.2.6.2.6.2 of 3GPP TS 29.512.
  • When SMF receives a Npcf_SMPolicyControl_UpdateNotify Request with a new PCC Rule that refers to TrafficControlData which contains DNAI in the routeToLocs attribute for a PDU session, the SMF will add a ULCL + PSA or a PSA (if a ULCL already existed) to the uplink data path corresponding to the DNAI.
  • when SMF receives a Npcf_SMPolicyControl_UpdateNotify Request that requests deletion of a PCC Rule previously used for uplink data path addition, the SMF will delete the data path by deleting the PSA or ULCL + PSA (if only PSA exists after the deletion) specified by DNAI,
  • For both addition and deletion cases, SMF initiates N4 message exchange towards UPF, as well as N11 message exchange toward AMF.

Limitations : 

  • Landslide SMF node supports only one DNAI within routeToLocs of Traffic Control Data from PCF.
  • Landslide SMF does not support addition of ULCL + PSA when a ULCL already existed.

Tcl Parameter: N7En

Tcl Parameter: TraSteEn

N10 Interface

The SUT is UDM SBI, select N10 Interface - SMF (Session Management Function) to UDM (Unified Data Management Function). Interface Nsmf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and SMF-UDM (NF Tab - NF Consumer) become available for input. SMF SBI Node is available for input.

Tcl Parameter: N10En

N16 Interface 

Emulate H-SMF / V-SMF

Support Interworking with EPS

 

 

The SUT is SMF SBI, select Emulate V-SMF ( visting SMF ) - Session Management Function. Interface Nsmf (NF Tab - NF Producer) and SMF-SMF (Smf To Smf NF Tab - NF Consumer ) become available for input. SMF SBI Node is available for input. 

Available on SMF Node test case only when N16 Interface is enabled and Emulate = H-SMF ( home SMF ). Interface Nsmf (NF Tab - NF Producer)  become available for input. SMF SBI Node is available for input

Select Support Interworking with EPS to indicate whether V-SMF supports the interworking with EPS which is required for 5gs/Eps handover in home routed roaming. Becomes available when Emulate is V-SMF. Select the GTPv2 Version on the Nsmf Interface.

Added support for the following procedure in the home-routed roaming scenario: 
 
1) EPS ID bearer ID allocation (Assign/Release) procedure during PDU Session Establishment procedure / PDU Session Modification procedure [Spec: TS23.502 4.11.1.4.1]
2) Handover procedures 
      5GS to EPS Handover using N26 interface [Spec: TS23.502 4.11.1.2.1]
      EPS to 5GS Handover using N26 interface [Spec: TS23.502 4.11.1.2.2]
3) EPS fallback procedure for IMS voice [Spec: TS23.502 4.13.6.1]

N16 Interface is disabled when PDU Session Secondary Authentication , or Support URLLC are selected. 

Limitations : 

  • Only PDU session establishment and release procedures are supported in current implementation. PDU session / QoS modification is not yet supported
  • Current implementation for N4 signaling is per 23.502 v16.8.0. There are some version differences between v16.8.0 and the prior versions. Additional PFCP messages are introduced in v16.8.0, which enables separate handling of uplink and downlink traffic for the interim period. The UPF node is expected to support all versions up to v16.8.0
  • Some behaviors in V-AMF/V-SMF/V-UPF for the B2B test were simplified. Thus, V-AMF/V-SMF/V-UPF should be not used for other purposes except for the in-house B2B test.

  • Currently, N4 procedure for indirect data forwarding tunnel between V-SMF and V-UPF is not supported. In the non-roaming scenario (N4 between SMF and UPF), the limitation is the same. Thus, to make the overall call flow work, the information for the indirect data forwarding tunnel will be set to the fake data which is generated by V-SMF itself without the interaction with V-UPF. Because of this limitation, data traffic over the indirect data forwarding channel will not work. This limitation is the caveat between V-SMF and V-UPF which are only used in the in-house B2B.

  • If an unexpected situation happens unlike the expected call flow, each node will not handle it to recover the error situation. So, if the error happens to happen, UE may get stuck in some status. In this case, the nodal/node that faced the unexpected situation will require enhancement to deal with it.

  • In the Home-Routed Roaming scenario, 5GS/EPS Idle Mode Mobility is not supported.

Tcl Parameter: N16Emulate

Tcl Parameter: N16VSmfSuptIwWithEpsEn

Tcl Parameter: N16En

Command Mode   

Off  Enabled

When Command Mode is enabled, a "Command" button becomes available under the N4 (PFCP ) tab.

Select Enabled for SMF Node to initiate the following attacks based on the PFCP Session SEID(s) specified the user using Command Mode Test Activity - SMF Node Test Case.

  • Session Deletion attack - When user issues the "Release Session" command, the attacker node will send a PFCP Session Deletion Request to the PFCP Session on the UPF Node under test.
  • Drop Packets attack - When user issues the "Drop Packets" command, the attacker node will send a PFCP Session Modification Request containing a "DROP" flag in the Uplink and/or Downlink FAR to the PFCP Session on the UPF Node under test. 
  • Update Outer Header Creation IP attack - When user issues the "Update Outer Header Creation IP" command, the attacker node will send a PFCP Session Modification Request containing a new Outer Header Creation IP in the Uplink and/or Downlink FAR to the PFCP Session on the UPF Node under test.

Limitations:

  1. This functionality is not supported on test cases with SMF Emulation.
  2. The "# of Nodes" field under "Network Devices|SMF SBI Node" tab must be set to a value greater than 1. This is to ensure that there is an attacker node available.
  3. The "Starting SEID" and "Ending SEID" correspond to the CP side SEID(s) and are automatically populated with the SEID of the first PFCP Session.
  4. Sequencer is not supported.
Multipart Message Options  

Select to input value instead of using the system default value (++Boundary) for the Boundary Delimiter.

Also available in AMF Node test case.

See TS 29.502 Annex B. HTTP Multipart Messages.

Enter up to 70 characters.

Valid set of characters: [a-z , A-Z, 0-9,:'()+_,-./=?] If ':' is used, the string must be in quotes. example: "abc:123"

Select to Use Lowercase Header Field Name in Body Part. For example, if enabled, the name of "Content-Type" and "Content-Id" will be encoded as "content-type" and "content-id".

Tcl Parameter: MptMsgBoundaryDelimEn

Tcl Parameter: MptMsgBoundaryDelim

Tcl Parameter: MptMsgLcHdrNameInBodyEn

 

 


^ Back to Top

 

SMS Network

SMS-SC

The SMS-SC can be configured to:

  • Send SMS Mobile Terminating (MT) messages to an MSC  (MAP-E Tab)
  • Receive SMS Mobile Originating (MO) messages from an MSC (MAP-E Tab)
  • Initiate MAP Send Routing Info messages towards the HLR  (MAP-C)
  • T4 interface is the reference point between SMS-SC and NEF (acts as MTC-IWF). Exclusive to MAP-C or MAP-E for SMS-SC. 

Number of Recipients on Mobile Subscribers - SMS Terminating Pane defines the target subscribers for which an MT SMS message can be sent.

Number of Originating Subscribers on Mobile Subscribers - SMS Originating Pane defines the target subscribers for which an MT SMS message can be sent.

Tcl Parameter: SmsScMapCEn

Tcl Parameter: SmsScMapEEn

Tcl Parameter: SmsScT4En

Tcl Parameter: SmsMode

SMS-HLR

The SMS-HLR responds to requests received. it does not autonomously generate any MAP requests. The data in the SMS terminating pane on the SMS Network Test Configuration tab (mobile subscribers section), defines the number of subscribers and their associated identities that are recognized/supported by the HLR. When a map request is received, the HLR will validate that it recognizes the subscriber identified in the request and respond positively. If the HLR does not recognized the subscriber, it will respond with an error.  

Sms-Hlr is used to define the information sent from the SMS to the HLR from the SMS Network test case.

Tcl Parameter: SmsHlrMapCEn

Tcl Parameter: SmsHlrMapDEn

Tcl Parameter: SmsMode

MSC

The MSC can be configured to:

  • Send a single MAP-UPDATE-LOCATION request for each defined subscriber (MAP-D)
  • Receive SMS Mobile Originating (MO) messages from an MSC (MAP-E Tab) or
  • Receive SMS Mobile Terminating (MT) messages from an MSC  (MAP-E Tab)
  • Receive Both MO and MT messages from an MSC
  • Emulate SMS entities (SMS-IWMSC and SMS-GMSC) that communicate with an MME via SGd Interface. SGd interface is a diameter interface that carries SMS messages between an MME and an SMS entity.  The SMS entity involved depends on the direction of the SMS.  When an SMS message is being sent to a mobile subscriber via the SGd interface, a SMS-GMSC sends a Diameter MT-Forward Short Message request (TFR) to the MME.
  • S6c is a diameter interface that carries routing information between an HSS and an SMS-GMSC.  When an SMS message is being sent to a mobile subscriber via the SGd interface, the SMS-GMSC sends an S6c routing info request (Send-Routing-Info-for-SM-Request) to the HSS to determine on which MME the destination subscriber is registered. The HSS responds with routing information that the SMS-GMSC uses to send the SMS message towards the correct MME. The HSS determines the routing information to send using information it receives over the S6a interface (when the MME sends an Update Location Request to the HSS). S6c becomes available when SGd is enabled and Number of Recipients > 0.

 

  • SGs is the interface between the MSC and MME. The SGs interface with SGsAP and SCTP become available for input as well as SGs Node.

3GPP TS 29.338 (14.1.0) – this defines the Diameter based interfaces specific to SMS when used with SMS in MME architecture. This includes the S6c, SGd, and Gdd interfaces. The Gdd interface is not applicable. 3GPP TS 29.272 (15.6.0) defines the S6a interface.

Number of Recipients on Mobile Subscribers - SMS Terminating Pane defines the target subscribers for which an MT SMS message can be received.

Number of Originating Subscribers on Mobile Subscribers - SMS Originating Pane defines the target subscribers for which an MT SMS message can be received.

Tcl Parameter: SmsMscMapDEn

Tcl Parameter: SmsMscMapEEn

Tcl Parameter: SmsMscSgdEn

Tcl Parameter: SmsMscS6cEn

Tcl Parameter: SmsMscSgsEn

Tcl Parameter: SmsMode

   

^ Back to Top

 


 

UE Emulator Data Node

UE Emulator Data Node

 

 

Adds the ability for Landslide to interoperate with an external Simnovus UE emulator for the purposes of sending/receiving simulated user data traffic. The Ue Emulator Data Node test case requires the common L3-7 tab to configure the DMFs. Modified to configure the number of PDUs per UE. The L3-7 tab modified to allow the DMFs to be assigned to a Default Bearer.

For External Data testing, define a single ETH port and IP Address to serve as the External Data host. This is the IP Address is expected to be filled out in the Server's IP (in the User Plane pane) Address in DU Nodal Testing and also selected for the GTP Test Node in the UE Emulator Data Node Test Case.  

When user enabled the External Data, they will be required to select the "External Data Test Session" and it must contain a single "UE Emulator Data Node" Test Case.   

When the user started the DU Nodal test, if a External Data Test Session is selected that Test Session will be started first. Once it is confirmed started, the DU Nodal Test on the UE Emulator will be started.

Interface with an external UE emulator. The emulator communicates to the Landslide TAS a REST API and a Websocket. The Simnovus system sends commands to the Landslide TAS as UEs are attached to the network an are ready for data. The TAS then sends new "c_run" commands to the UE Emulator Data Node test case to provision the UE IP Address with the following data:

  • UE IP Address
  • UE Index (a unique integer for each UE 0-N)
  • PDU Index (an integer unique to each UE identifying the PDU to start. 0-N)
  • VLAN Tag

Emulator Options

For External Data testing, define a single ETH port and IP Address to serve as the External Data host. This is the IP Address that is expected to be filled out in the Remote UE Server Address in DU Nodal Testing and also selected for the GTP Test Node in the UE Emulator Data Node Test Case. 

Additional details in Common Node Parameters

 

^ Back to Top


UE Node

Type

UE Handset

LTE U1 Modem

UE Handset - select to perform tests (DNS, HTTP, etc) on a handset device (Android only). Must select a handset device by enabling Test UE/Select UE.

UE table is populated via TS Admin  - UE Tab. Follow instructions on UE Tab to get Handset connected and ready to test.

Handset must have App installed before testing can begin.

 

LTE U1 Modem - Available on the E10 when running EDGE software. Enables support of real LTE SIM attached to an E10, Allows testing of L1-L3 over the LTE Uu Interface.

Only one UE per module (up to four modules) is currently supported. OTA Nodes - Devices - becomes available for input (Assigned Interface from TS- Admin OTA Tab). Additional details when running tests using Sequencer (Settings available for LTE U1 Modem Type) - See On Demand Test Case Command for UE Node Test Case)

This is a licensed feature.

NOTES:

  • Plug in Device (Over The Air Module) to USB Port #1 up to port #4 on E10 device.
  • Reboot (may need a second reboot)

  • Run ipcfg (will reboot again as part of configuration process)

  • When connecting Telit Modems, you will need to run ipcfg 3 times to ensure the modems are connected and the OTA Tab is populated correctly with the proper Interface / Port, etc.

  • After Telit LE910 modems are plugged into E10 USB ports, we

  • need to run “ipcfg” command from terminal several times (normally 2-3 times) to ensure following:

    • Scan USB bus to record new hardware information

    • Mapping new hardware into Landslide ethmap file

    • Register and display modem interface information in OTA tab.

  • Connect to TAS and go to TS Admin - Verify the OTA Tab is available and populated with Interface, Port, Technology, Driver, Firmware, vSIM Adapter (not a physical SIM) , LTE Offset (indicates which offset the interface is on the port starting with 0) and Test RID information (any current test session)  - See screen capture below with 4 Modules plugged in. The eth3 / eth4 and eth6 / eth7 modules are USB 2.0 / Telit Modems and the gobi-5-0 / gobi-5-1, gobi-6-0 / gobi-6-1 are USB 3.0 Modem.

The OTA ports display red with down arrows, like ETH, when they are down. When U1 interfaces are down, your test will be prevented from starting.

  • Upgrade - Select to upgrade WWAN Modem firmware. A pop up box will allow you to Upgrade All wwans or the selected wwan (if a wwan is selected in the table).

There is no coexistence for Sierra and Telit modules, user can verify this by checking “Driver” column above.

Values of STATUS_OF_CLIENT parameter when UE Info level is 10 and UE info monitoring / reporting configuration is enabled:

  Initial Succeeded Failed
LS start U1 Idle Created Failed to start
      Timeout to start
U1 registration     Failed to register
      Timeout to register
U1 read SIM     Failed to read SMS storage
      Timeout to read SMS storage
U1 attach   Connected Failed to connect
      Timeout to connect
      Disconnected
LS get U1 ip     Failed to dhcp
      Timeout to dhcp
      Disconnected
LS & U1 ready for data traffic   Established Disconnected

Tcl Parameter: UeTestType

External Data

Available when LTE U1 Modem is enabled. Enabled for Sequencer when Number of OTA UEs = 1. Sequencer will be blocked at OK if the UEs assigned Interface is not selecting a 5G Modem. External Data topic for additional information. 

Added support for Quectel 5G Modem to execute Sequencer Test On Demand Test Case Command for UE Node Test Case for ExecuteExtApps.

VoLTE or

VoLTE w/o SIP Authentication  

Available when LTE U1 Modem is enabled and Test Activity is not Sequencer. Select to test the IMS VoLTE feature which supports SIP and RTP-based Voice over in the UE Node test case. When Use SIM Server is not enabled, select VoLTE without SIP Authentication.

Notes : 

  • Only “VoLTE without SIP authentication” is supported with U1 modem (L-U1-LTE-001).
  • If U1 modem (L-U1-LTE-002) is used, you should enable “Use sim server” and “VoLTE” 
  • Both U1 modem products (L-U1-LTE-001, L-U1-LTE-002) do not support to SIP IPSec function.

The VoLTE - Security Tab will be disabled and not available for input.

You are required to configure the following:

Use SIM Server

See additional detail in Use SIM Server in the Mobile Subscribers topic.

RF UEs

Available when Test Activity = Mobility. This functionality supports the emulation of large numbers of Wi-Fi clients with either an over-the-air or a cabled interface toward an Access Point (AP) and Access Controller SUT. This functionality requires one of the following supported RF Client-emulation Wi-Fi Cards.

RF Interface becomes available for capture.

Tcl Parameter : WfoRfUeEn

SWu IPSEC

Select to support SWu IPSec with RF UEs enabled.

Tcl Parameter : SwuIpsecEn

Initial Network

Available when Type = UE Handset.

Select Initial Network. Options = LTE or WIFI.

Tcl Parameter : InitiateType

TEST UE

Select UE

Use SIM

When you plug a real handset on the USB port, the Select UE table will get populated via TS Admin - UE Tab.

Serial Number (SN) , Mobile Equipment Identifier (MEID) , Manufacturer, Product and USB Id are populated.

Before you use the "Use SIM" feature, execute the Setup Script (Managing Test Server UE) and select Grab SIM Cards Info to write all available SIM cards to file on the handset. Then the TS must be Recycled for changes to be seen in Landslide. To add or remove a SIM card , re-run the handset setup script step.

Select Use SIM to select a SIM from the available SIMs related to the selected handset list. The Select SIM panel includes : Active checkbox, Name of Sim, MDN and Provider. 

If no SIMs are reported by the UE, the SIM enabler will be forced deselected and shown as disabled/grey.

See the Landslide Tcl API Object and Perform Function Reference or Using the RESTFul API. It contains reference information about the Landslide RESTFul API system. Refer to Swagger UI on Landslide Home Page, it contains the latest most accurate information for anything it covers.

Go to the Parameter Class UeNode section for additional information.

Tcl Parameter: Ue

Handset Connection Type

Select USB (Physical) connection. Only supported option at this time.

Tcl Parameter: HandSetConnType

VisionWorks Inter-Carrier Intent-Of-Test for Messaging

Select to indicate "INTER-CARRIER" INTENT_OF_TEST for the Modem SMS tests. UE_MSG and UE_TO_UE_MSG records for UuModem Interface. On Demand Test Case Command for UE Node Test Case) - SMS Send and SMS Receive.

Tcl Parameter: MessageTestInterCarrierEn

Enable VoLTE Call POLQA

Select for execute a POLQA VoLTE test for 4G Telit Modem.

The checkbox is enabled for LTE U1 Modem when Sequencer is the test activity. When checked, the Test Data File selector panel labeled "POLQA Audio TDF (.wav)" is enabled.

VoLTE Call Flows:

VoLTE POLQA MOS Measurement:

MO Side:

MT Side:

Please make sure to start MT side before MO side. User can achieve this by adding more delay for MO side in automation control.

Notes:

  • User needs to use sample audio file with 16000 bit rate for testing using audio length for 7-10 seconds.
  • User needs to select same audio file on MO and MT side. If using different files, the MOS score will not be reliable. 

Refer to the Use Case document for additional test setup.

Tcl Parameter: PolqaTdfFileEn

Tcl Parameter: PolqaTdfFile

Mobile Info

Additional details in topic UE Node App.

DNS Test

Additional details in topic UE Node App.

Speedtest.net

Additional details in topic UE Node App.

HTTP

Additional details in topic UE Node App.

Latency / Traceroute Test

Additional details in topic UE Node App.

Iperf

Additional details in topic UE Node App.

Voice

Additional details in topic UE Node App.

Message

Additional details in topic UE Node App.

Voice Mail

Additional details in topic UE Node App.

Video

Additional details in topic UE Node App.

WhatsApp

Additional details in topic UE Node App.

 

^ Back to Top


UMTS Testing

In the UMTS test case, you can choose the type of protocols used, the release version, the test configuration, when PDP contexts should be activated, and the initiator for QOS updates.

Protocol and Mobility/Handoff Protocol

Use the drop-down lists to select the protocols and the type of interface (Iu-PS or Gb) that will be used in the test. The Mobility Protocol list is available when the Mobility or Session Loading With Mobility test activity is selected, and it allows you to select the configuration that will be used with the handoff SGSN. See About SGSN Testing for descriptions of the protocols used with each option.

Protocol and Mobility/Handoff Protocol Options:
  • UMTS (Iu-PS over IP) — Iu-PS interface testing using IP-based protocols with Ethernet physical layer. Use the IuPS tab to define the interface.

  • GPRS — Gb interface testing using IP-based protocols and an Ethernet physical layer. Use the Gb tab to define the interface.

Default: UMTS (IuPS over IP) or GPRS depending on the application

Tcl Parameter:  

GprsProtocol

GprsMobProtocol

 

UMTS Version

Use the drop-down list to select the GPRS release version that will be used in the test. When you choose Release 6, the following parameters are enabled:

Options: 4, 6, 7, 8

Default: 4

Tcl Parameter: UmtsVersion

GGSN Node Emulation

By default, the test case tests a SGSN SUT and a GGSN SUT. Use the checkbox to simulate the GGSN and change the test to an SGSN nodal configuration. When you use a GGSN node, the Gn tab defines the GGSN side of the Gn interface, the GGSN Control Node defines the simulator, and the address pool for PDP contexts is defined on the Mobile Subscriber pane.

Must enable "Activate PDP Contexts upon GMM attach" or select Command Mode/Sequencer Test Activity for this field to become available.

NOTE: When the GGSN is simulated, only a Local Network Host may be used for Data Traffic.

 

PGW Node Emulation

PGW Node Emulation is available when UMTS version is 7. When you select PGW Node Emulation, the Gn interface tab and test configuration controls are available (similar to GGSN Node Emulation but are mutually exclusive).

Must enable "Activate PDP Contexts upon GMM attach" for this field to become available.

Type: True/False

Default: False

Tcl Parameter: PgwEmulationEn

SGW/PGW Node Emulation

SGW/PGW Node Emulation is available when UMTS version is 8. When you select SGW/PGW Node Emulation, S4 > GTPv2 interface tab is enabled for configuration.

Must enable "Activate PDP Contexts upon GMM attach" for this field to become available.

Type: True/False

Default: False

Tcl Parameter: SgwPgwEmulationEn

 

Activate PDP Contexts upon GMM Attach Deactivate PDP Contexts upon GMM Attach

When you select the checkbox (default setting), the test will attempt to activate the number of PDP contexts defined on the Mobile Subscribers pane after an MN successfully attaches to the SGSN SUT. When you clear the checkbox, the test will only perform attaches and detaches with the SGSN.

Deactivate PDP Contexts upon GMM Detach  - when enabled the GUI will validate:

Detach Rate must be <=  PDP Deactivation Rate/PDP Contexts per UE

PDP Contexts per UE = Number of Primary Contexts + (Number of Primary Contexts * Number of Secondary Contexts)

NOTE: When the Test Activity is Command Mode, the following are not available:

  • Activate PDP Contexts upon GMM Attach  
  • Deactivate PDP Contexts upon GMM Detach
Auto-Start Secondary Contexts

By default, secondary PDP contexts are automatically activated after the associated primary context is activated. When the test includes secondary contexts, you can clear the Auto-Start Secondary Contexts checkbox and trigger activation of secondary contexts from within a DMF with event controls. Three default DMFs that trigger secondary context activation are provided in the Basic Library:

Direct Tunnel

The Direct Tunnel feature is enabled when you select the UMTS version 7 or 8.   Use the UMTS version 7 or 8 to enable the Direct Tunnel Feature and then select the Direct Tunnel- Primary RNC checkbox to use the RNC and GGSN to by-pass the SGSN and establish a direct connection to the GTP User Plane.

When you select a Mobility or Session Loading With Mobility test activity, for UMTS protocol/mobility protocol, the Direct Tunnel- Target RNC becomes available. Select the Direct Tunnel- Target RNC checkbox to define the target RNC and GGSN to by-pass the SGSN and establish a direct connection to the GTP User Plane.

NOTE: When the Test Activity is Command Mode, the Direct Tunnel - Primary RNC is not available.

Initiate Delete PDP Context

When you select Initiate Delete PDP Context, the SGSN sends a Delete PDP Context Request to the GGSN, triggering the GGSN to release the context and tear down its tunnel with the SGSN. Upon completion, the GGSN replies with a Delete PDP Context Accept, allowing the SGSN to tear down its tunnel with the GGSN.

QOS Initiate

When you select the QOS Update Test in an SGSN nodal test, you can use the radio buttons to select which device will initiate the PDP context update: the MN or the emulated GGSN. In an end-to-end test, MN is the only option.

Round Robin SGSN

The Round Robin SGSN supports UMTS IuPS Flex testing with multiple SGSNs. When the Round Robin SGSN checkbox is disabled, all MNs are forced to attach to the first SGSN node (supports the IuFlex functionality).

NOTE: During UMTS testing, Round Robin SGSN is not available when you select Protocol or Handoff Protocol as GPRS on UMTS Test Configuration tab.

 

Billing

In UMTS Nodal test case, the Billing checkbox is enabled only when the GGSN Emulation and Activate PDP Contexts upon GMM Attach checkboxes are selected.  Select the Billing checkbox to define the Ga>GTP' billing data record information.

Log RNC Status

In UMTS test case, select to ensure that the test run logs reports status of each RNC goes up or down.

You may use the available log, for example, to reset some values on the SUT, ignore the associated set of ALARMS, and so on. The log reports

NOTE: The log is available from about 20 seconds before a test starts, which you may call via the CLI. The log is available via the Test Results after the test completes.
 Dual Connectivity

Select to indicate if the MS supports Dual Connectivity of E-UTRAN with NR. It will be added to the MS Network Capability IE for Dual Connectivity NR in the Attach Request (per spec 3GPP TS 24.008 table 10.5.145).

Available when Protocol = UMTS (IuPS over IP) and UMTS Version = 8.

 

^ Back to Top


UPF Nodal / UPF Node

PGW-U Emulation

PGW-U Emulation checkbox was added to UPF Node for 5G/4G mobility scenarios. Select PGW-U Emulation for UPF Node to internally allocate additional map space to accommodate multiple TEIDs (4G Uplink) per PFCP Session. 

Tcl Parameter: PgwUEmulationEn

N3 IPSec / Target N3 IPSec Select for IPSec on the N3 / N3/N9 / Target N3 interfaces. Additional details here - N3 IPSec
NRF Interface

Select to enable the UPF and Nnrf Client Interface. NF Tab (NF Consumer - Nnrf Client).

Tcl Parameter: NrfIntfEN

 

^ Back to Top


WiMax Testing

In addition to selecting a SUT with the WAC drop-down list, you can define the port used for the BS-WAC interface with WAC Port.

EAP Authorization If the SUT requires that MNs be authorized, you can use the checkbox to enable EAP-TTLS authentication. Click the EAP Settings... button to access the EAP parameters and configure the user credentials and digital certificate settings. Since EAP-TTLS is the only method used in WiMax testing, only those settings are displayed.
ISF Select the check box to allow the MS to establish an Initial Service Flow (initial service flow) after attaching to the WAC.
Round Robin Configuration Use the checkbox to enable round-robin configuration to distribute MSS. If you do not select the checkbox, the normal single WAC configuration is used to distribute MSS.

^ Back to Top


Wifi Offload Gateway

Select the required options to perform Wifi Offload Gateway testing.

Inter SSID/GW Mobility

Select Inter SSID/GW Mobility to test mobility between SSIDs and include DHCP messaging.  

  • When you do not select UE Graceful Mobility (on the Mobile Subscriber pane), a DHCP Request is sent with the UE’s existing IP address.  

  • When you select Graceful Mobility, a DHCP Release is sent to the old SSID, and DHCP negotiation begins anew on the Target SSID, and the UE may receive a new IP address.

Tcl Parameter : InterSsidMobilityEn

Inter Access Point Mobility Select Inter-AP Mobility to test mobility between the access points. The data messages from the UE go through a different Access Point and performs “seamless mobility”.   Tcl Parameter : InterApMobilityEn
Data Traffic Data IPSec

Select to support IPSec tunnel between UE through the AP to the Wifi Offload Gateway. Selecting Data IPSec supports IPSec Tunnel irrespective of the Tunnel Type (GRE, CAPWAP, or None).

NOTE: Data IPSec is not available when you select AP Tunnel Type as GRE L3.

 

Configure L3-7 | Data IPSec tab.

DHCP Relay Node Emulation

Select to indicate that the DHCP Relay Agent forwards all the messages from DHCP server to the UE.

In the 802.11 WLAN, AP is first hop of STA. The DHCP Relay Agent is an embedded function of AP. AP will analyze each message from STA. If the messages are DHCP message, it’ll invoke the DHCP relay function and forward them. All the messages from DHCP server are also handled by the DHCP Relay Agent and then forwarded to UE.

DHCP Relay Node Emulation is not available when you select IP Address Type as Dual Stack on Mobile Subscriber pane or AP Tunnel Type = DS Lite.

Tcl Parameter : ApDhcpRelayEn

AP Tunnel Type

Indicates the Tunnel Type between Access Point and Gateway:

   Options: GRE L2, CAPWAP, NONE, GRE L3, DS Lite, L2TPv3
 
  • GRE L2: Indicates the options for the GRE tunnel between the Access Point and the GW. Indicates the Gateway is an aggregator Access point to another Gateway. The Layer 2 GRE (End-Point tunnel) interfaces with the MAC Address or Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplier (DSLAM) address, etc.

  • CAPWAP: (Control and Provisioning of Wireless Access Points) Indicates the protocol that enables a controller to manage a collection of wireless access points (Protocol Specification RFC 5415; IEEE 802.11 Binding RFC 5416). See CAPWAP settings.

When Tunnel Type is CAPWAP, UE DHCP via GRE Tunnel is not available.

  • NONE: Indicates no tunnel between Access Point and WOGW.

NOTES: In Wifi Offload GW Nodal test case, when the Tunnel Type is NONE and...

  • The Test Activity is Capacity, UE Authentication is enabled on the Mobile Subscribers pane.

  • The Test Activity is Mobility, the test option for Inter SSID Mobility is disabled.

  • The following changes are required for the Wifi Offload Nodal test case:

  • UE DHCP via GRE Tunnel and Management Interface is not available.

  • GRE L3: Indicates the options for the GRE tunnel between the Access Point and the GW. The Layer 3 GRE (End-Point tunnel) interfaces with the IP Address you assign, that is, supports routed IP directly over GRE.
NOTE: Data IPSec is not available when you select AP Tunnel Type as GRE L3.

NOTE: In Wifi Offload GW Node test case, when the Tunnel Type is L3, only the Hybrid option is available on the Emulation Options pane and is selected by default.

  • DS Lite: Select to cause the WiFi Starting Address to become inactive. The WAN uses DHCPv6 to obtain AFTR (WiFi GW) name and AFTR (WiFi GW) Address via DNS query. The DHCP messaging broadcasts to any DHCPv6 server that is listening.  Only IPv4 IP Address Type is supported. Only UE Static IPv4 is available, all other options are not supported. Physical Interface of AP-WAN Node only shows IPv6 interfaces.

NOTE: In Wifi Offload Gateway Nodal test case, the following applies for UE DNS query to learn PDG IP Address:  

  • Tunnel Type should be NONE (tunneled GRE and CAPWAP are not supported).
  • On the IPSec tab, Identification Type FQDN format must be that of the IMIS (e.g., 505024101215074) so that the MN-NAI in the Mip (PMIPv6 Binding) is IMIS@APN name.
  • Tunnel Settings on the IPSec tab supports one tunnel (multiple-IPSec tunnel is not supported).

 

  • L2TPv3: Select for Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol Version 3. It is an IETF standard related to L2TP that can be used as an alternative protocol to Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) for encapsulation of multiprotocol Layer 2 communications traffic over IP networks. Per RFC 3931. Not available when Test Activity = Command Mode or Sequencer.  When Test Activity = Mobility, Inter Access Point Mobility is automatically selected and Inter SSID/GW Mobility is disabled. When selected, L2TPv3 Tab becomes available for input.

Tcl Parameter : TunnelType

Hybrid Access  

Available when Tunnel Type is GRE L3 and is selected by default to configure the network for Hybrid Access.

Configure DSL and LTE access information on the Hybrid tab, HG LTE Node and HG DSL Node, and HAAP (Hybrid Access Aggregation Point) SUT.

Hybrid Access indicates the bundling of two or more access line over different technologies (e.g. DSL and LTE) to one (Internet) connection.

Tcl Parameter : HybridAccessEn

GRE L3 Protocol Type

Available when Tunnel Type is GRE L3. Select the Hybrid Access GRE L3 Protocol type.

GRE protocol type is 0x0101 for Rev_2 and 0xB7EA for Rev_5.

The Tunnel type used only 1 bit - bit 3 in Rev_2 but Rev_5 uses all 4 bits (0-3)

LTE Protocol value was 0 (0000) for Rev_2 and 2 Rev_5 (0010)

DSL Protocol value was 1 (1000) for Rev_2 and 1 for Rev_5 (0001)

 

Options: Rev2, Rev5

Default: Rev2

Tcl Parameter : GreL3ProtocolType

AP-WAN IPSec

In Wifi offload Gateway Nodal, select to establish IPsec tunnel between AP and Security Gateway (SecGW).

NOTE: When AP Tunnel Type is NONE, only Tunnel Mode is available in the ESP Data Mode drop down list of Tunnel Settings.

 

RF UEs

This functionality supports the emulation of large numbers of Wi-Fi clients with either an over-the-air or a cabled interface toward an Access Point (AP) and Access Controller SUT. This functionality requires one of the following supported RF Client-emulation Wi-Fi Cards.

RF Interface becomes available for capture.

Tcl Parameter : WfoRfUeEn

RF AP Emulation

This functionality will simulate a software AP. Each AP supports up to 200 clients. If Emulate DHCP Relay Node in Wifi Offload Test Case is enabled, then the Access point will act as a DHCP Relay Node. Specify the DHCP server in the DHCP Relay Agent Tab.

AP RF Interface becomes available for capture.

Tcl Parameter : WfoRfApEn

SIP VoIP

Enable Volte support . SIP VoIP tab will become available.  

Specify Mobile Subscriber APNs

Available when AP Tunnel type is None and Data Ipsec is selected. Enables the Number of APNs checkbox. Used for the scenario where WOGW Nodal is working with EPC.

Tcl Parameter : WfoMsApnsEn

AP-WAN PPPoE

Enables the PPP tab which is used to configure PPoE Client parameters. This is only available when AP Tunnel Type = GRE L2.

Tcl Parameter : PppOeEn

Failover Testing

Checkbox is available only if CAPWAP license is present. Enabled when AP Tunnel Type = CAPWAP and licensed for CAPWAP. Used for CAPWAP failover testing, AP/SSID Tab - Update Failover Testing pane with IP Addresses.

Tcl Parameter : FailoverTestEn

Flex Offload

Checkbox is available only if CAPWAP license is present. Enabled when AP Tunnel Type = CAPWAP and licensed for CAPWAP. Used for port based separation of control and traffic data. When enabled, Data Traffic from emulated AP will go over IP directly to Network Host, not in CAPWAP tunnel. Control Traffic still goes to controller inside CAPWAP Tunnel.

Tcl Parameter : FlexOffloadEn

MOBIKE

Checkbox is available when Test Activity = Mobility, Data IPSec is enabled and AP Tunnel Type = NONE. Select for MOBIKE Protocol. If MOBIKE is selected, Inter Access Point Mobility and Specify Mobile Subscriber APNs are automatically checked. Dual-Stack cannot be selected. The UE Target Static Ipv4 or UE Target Static IPv6 must be filled and the source and target IP cannot overlap.

Tcl Parameter : WfoDataMobikeEn

E911 Location Load Test

Select for E911 Load Testing emulating the same UE(s) is attached to a different location each time it makes an emergency call. Must enable SIP VoIP and Enable Emergency on SIP VoIP tab. When enabled, the E911 Location Load Test pane becomes available for input.

The Phonebook tab becomes available and the Emergency phone number to emergency service URN translation pane is available for input.

E-CSCF: The Emergency CSCF handles certain aspects of emergency sessions, e.g. routing of emergency requests to the correct emergency center or PSAP.

Emergency Service Query Key (ESQK): A 10-digit North American Numbering Plan number used to identify a particular emergency call instance. It is used by the LRF as a key to look up for the location information and callback information associated with the emergency call instance and is also used by the PSAP to query location information from the LRF.

Wireless E911 ESRD/ESRK Number: A 10-digit number used for the purpose of routing an E911 call to the appropriate Public Safety Answering Point (PSAP) when that call is originating from wireless equipment. The Emergency Services Routing Digit (ESRD) identifies the cell site and sector of the call origination in a wireless call scenario. The Emergency Services Routing Key (ESRK) uniquely identifies the call in a given cell site/sector and correlates data that is provided to a PSAP by different paths, such as the voice path and the Automatic Location Identification (ALI) data path. Both the ESRD and ESRK define a route to the proper PSAP.

Location Retrieval Function (LRF): This functional entity handles the retrieval of location information for the UE including, where required, interim location information, initial location information and updated location information.

Public Safety Answering Point (PSAP): A physical location, where emergency calls from the public are received.

Tcl Parameter : WfoE911LoadTestEn

E911 Location Load Test (pane) - AP Test Parameters Test Data File

Test Data File - A TDF input file will be used. It contains the Access Type and AP IDs. See example.  

The access Type can be any of the following:

        IEEE_80211 = 0

        IEEE_80211_A = 1

        IEEE_80211_B = 2

        IEEE_80211_G = 3

 IEEE_80211_N = 4

Select the TDF Row Limit  (range from 1 to 400,000 (default= 500).

Example of TDF file: Each time UE make a call it picks a random entry from 0 to 399,000 and apply Access Type and AP ID from this entry into SIP P-ANI header.

Select Stop Test Case when TDF is Completed to stop the test case automatically after the final entry in the AP Test Parameters TDF file is used when testing E911 VoLTE Scenarios.

Tcl Parameter : E911CgfFile

Tcl Parameter : E911CfgFileRowLimit

Tcl Parameter : E911StopTestCaseEn

Data via GRE Tunnel

Available in Wifi Offload Gateway Nodal when Flex Offload has been enabled and AP Tunnel Type = CPAWAP. Select to send data via GRE tunnel to the address configured in

GRE Tunnel Endpoint Address:  Enter a valid IPv4 or IPv6 address.

Tcl Parameter : GreTunnelEn

Tcl Parameter : EndpointAddr

SWu IPSec

Select to support SWu IPSec in the Wifi Offload Gateway Nodal and UE Node test cases with RF UEs enabled and not Session Loading Test Activity. Enter Valid IPv4 address in UE SWu IPv4 Address.

Tcl Parameter : SwuIpsecEn

Dual DHCP Relay Agent Node

In Wifi Offload Gateway Node test case, select to indicate supports for Dual Stack (UE DHCPv4 + UE DHCPv6). The two DHCP relay agent nodes forward the IPv4 and IPv6 DHCP messages individually. One is used for DHCPv4 messages forwarding, and the other is used for DHCPv6 messages forwarding.

  • Gn to GGSN

In Wifi Offload Node test case, select Gn to GGSN to configure GTP parameters (GTP-U).

Indicates the network side Gateway supports termination via Tunneled 3G (GGSN emulation over Gn).

  • S2a to PGW

 

In Wifi Offload Node test case, select S2b to PGW to test mobility support between eHRPD access and the PGW.

Indicates the network side Gateway supports termination via Tunneled 4G (PGW with either GTPv2 S2a ).

  • S2b to PGW

  • S2a/S2b protocol: GTPv2; PMIPv6 SWn IPSec

In Wifi Offload Node test case, select S2b to PGW to test mobility support between ePDG and the Gateway.

Indicates the network side Gateway supports termination via Tunneled 4G (PGW with either GTPv2 or PMIPv6 over S2 ).

S2a/S2b Protocol is available when you select S2b to PGW.

  • Select GTPv2 to configure GTPv2 parameters
  • Select PMIPv6 to configure PMIPv6 and SWn IPSec parameters.

NOTES:

  • PMIPv6 and SWn IPSec are only available when you select S2b to PGW and AP Tunnel Type is None.

  • SWn IPSec is associated with the PMIPv6 (available with IPSec license)and is selected by default when you select PMIPv6. Must enable with GTPv2 use, not automatically enabled.

CoA Simulation

In Wifi Offload Node testing, select the CoA Simulation check box to enable and define the CoA Simulation parameters (CoA Simulation) on the RADIUS tab.

Tcl Parameter: RadCoaSimulationEn

Disconnect Simulation

In Wifi Offload Node testing, select the Disconnect Simulation checkbox to define the Deactivation Rate (session/sec) for the Mobile Subscribers.

Tcl Parameter: RadDisconnEn

Firmware Download Emulation Firmware Size

In Wifi Offload Node test case, select for Firmware Download emulation (Per RFC 5415). This is only available for CAPWAP Tunnel Type.

Enable and Enter the Firmware Size.

Range: 0 to 65535

Default: 65535

Tcl Parameter: CapWapImgDownLoadEn

Tcl Parameter: CapWapImgDataSize

  

^ Back to Top